[go: up one dir, main page]

WO2025069656A1 - Laminate and display device - Google Patents

Laminate and display device Download PDF

Info

Publication number
WO2025069656A1
WO2025069656A1 PCT/JP2024/025563 JP2024025563W WO2025069656A1 WO 2025069656 A1 WO2025069656 A1 WO 2025069656A1 JP 2024025563 W JP2024025563 W JP 2024025563W WO 2025069656 A1 WO2025069656 A1 WO 2025069656A1
Authority
WO
WIPO (PCT)
Prior art keywords
layer
resin layer
group
range
resin
Prior art date
Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
Pending
Application number
PCT/JP2024/025563
Other languages
French (fr)
Japanese (ja)
Inventor
奈々恵 藤枝
Current Assignee (The listed assignees may be inaccurate. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of the list.)
Konica Minolta Inc
Original Assignee
Konica Minolta Inc
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Application filed by Konica Minolta Inc filed Critical Konica Minolta Inc
Publication of WO2025069656A1 publication Critical patent/WO2025069656A1/en
Pending legal-status Critical Current
Anticipated expiration legal-status Critical

Links

Images

Classifications

    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B27/00Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin
    • B32B27/18Layered products comprising a layer of synthetic resin characterised by the use of special additives
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B7/00Layered products characterised by the relation between layers; Layered products characterised by the relative orientation of features between layers, or by the relative values of a measurable parameter between layers, i.e. products comprising layers having different physical, chemical or physicochemical properties; Layered products characterised by the interconnection of layers
    • B32B7/02Physical, chemical or physicochemical properties
    • B32B7/022Mechanical properties
    • BPERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
    • B32LAYERED PRODUCTS
    • B32BLAYERED PRODUCTS, i.e. PRODUCTS BUILT-UP OF STRATA OF FLAT OR NON-FLAT, e.g. CELLULAR OR HONEYCOMB, FORM
    • B32B7/00Layered products characterised by the relation between layers; Layered products characterised by the relative orientation of features between layers, or by the relative values of a measurable parameter between layers, i.e. products comprising layers having different physical, chemical or physicochemical properties; Layered products characterised by the interconnection of layers
    • B32B7/02Physical, chemical or physicochemical properties
    • B32B7/023Optical properties
    • GPHYSICS
    • G02OPTICS
    • G02BOPTICAL ELEMENTS, SYSTEMS OR APPARATUS
    • G02B5/00Optical elements other than lenses
    • G02B5/20Filters
    • G02B5/22Absorbing filters
    • GPHYSICS
    • G09EDUCATION; CRYPTOGRAPHY; DISPLAY; ADVERTISING; SEALS
    • G09FDISPLAYING; ADVERTISING; SIGNS; LABELS OR NAME-PLATES; SEALS
    • G09F9/00Indicating arrangements for variable information in which the information is built-up on a support by selection or combination of individual elements

Definitions

  • the present invention relates to a laminate and a display device. More specifically, the present invention relates to a laminate and a display device that combines light resistance and impact resistance.
  • Flexible displays consist of a display component and a cover component that protects the display component.
  • the substrate used for the cover member is required to have flexibility. Therefore, it has been considered to change the conventionally used glass substrate to a resin substrate or to make the glass substrate itself thinner.
  • thin-film glass Ultra Thin Glass: UTG
  • UTG Ultra Thin Glass
  • a technique is known in which a protective film is attached to the thin film glass to improve impact resistance when used as a cover member.
  • Patent Document 1 discloses a technology for improving the impact resistance of a cover member, in which a laminate in which a cured layer is laminated on a protective film is used as the cover member.
  • the demand for impact resistance continues to increase, leaving room for improvement.
  • Patent Document 2 discloses a technology for achieving both light resistance and impact resistance in a display device, in which a cover member is made of an adhesive layer containing a (meth)acrylic polymer of a specific composition and an ultraviolet absorber.
  • Patent Document 3 also discloses a technology for improving the light resistance of display devices, in which a highly transparent optical film with excellent blocking properties for ultraviolet light and the short wavelength region of visible light is used as a cover member.
  • a highly transparent optical film with excellent blocking properties for ultraviolet light and the short wavelength region of visible light is used as a cover member.
  • the demand for impact resistance continues to increase, and there is room for improvement in achieving both light resistance and impact resistance.
  • the present invention was made in consideration of the above problems and circumstances, and the problem to be solved is to provide a laminate and a display device that combine light resistance and impact resistance.
  • the present inventors have investigated the causes of the above-mentioned problems, and as a result, have discovered that in a laminate having a resin layer, a cured layer, and an adhesive layer, when the resin layer contains a dye compound having ultraviolet absorbing ability, and the light transmittance in the visible light region of the resin layer is each within a specific range, and the storage modulus of the resin layer is also within a specific range, both of which can achieve both light resistance and impact resistance, thereby arriving at the present invention. That is, the above-mentioned problems of the present invention are solved by the following means.
  • a laminate having a resin layer, a cured layer, and an adhesive layer A first cured layer, a first resin layer, a first adhesive layer, a second cured layer, and a second resin layer are laminated in this order, the first resin layer contains a dye compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the range of 360 to 379 nm in an ultraviolet-visible light absorption spectrum in a wavelength region of 300 to 460 nm, The first resin layer has an average light transmittance of 87% or more in a wavelength range of 450 to 800 nm;
  • the storage modulus of the first resin layer at 25° C. is within a range of 4.0 to 8.0 GPa, a ratio of a storage modulus at 25° C. of the second resin layer to that of the first resin layer is within a range of 0.7 to 1.5.
  • R 11 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a hydroxy group, an amino group, an alkyl-substituted amino group, a carboxy group, an alkyloxycarbonyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkylcarbonyloxyalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group, an alkyloxycarbonylalkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group, or a sulfo group.
  • R 12 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydroxy group.
  • R 21 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydroxy group.
  • R 22 , R 23 , and R 24 represent an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkyl-substituted amino group, a carboxy group, an alkyloxycarbonyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkylcarbonyloxyalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group, an alkyloxycarbonylalkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group, or a sulfo group.
  • a display device comprising the laminate according to claim 10.
  • the above-mentioned means of the present invention make it possible to provide a laminate and a display device that combine light resistance and impact resistance.
  • the cover member has a member that protects the thin film glass.
  • the cover member when a cover member that includes thin film glass and a member that protects the thin film glass is attached to a display device, the display device is required to have both light resistance and impact resistance.
  • the member that protects the thin film glass is required to be flexible and thin.
  • the laminate of the present invention as a member for protecting thin glass i.e., a glass protection film, is formed by laminating a first cured layer, a first resin layer, a first adhesive layer, a second cured layer, and a second resin layer in this order.
  • the laminate having a resin layer can improve the light resistance and flexibility of the display device when the laminate is attached.
  • the first resin layer contains a dye compound whose maximum absorption wavelength is in the range of 360 to 379 nm in the absorption spectrum of the wavelength region of 300 to 460 nm.
  • the first resin layer is endowed with the property of absorbing ultraviolet rays. This makes it possible to protect the display device from ultraviolet rays and improve the light resistance of the display device when the laminate is attached.
  • the average light transmittance of the first resin layer in the wavelength range of 450 to 800 nm is set to 87% or more, that is, the first resin layer is given the property of transmitting visible light. This makes it possible to prevent the light emitted from the light-emitting element or light-emitting device in the display device from being absorbed by the resin layer, and to increase the amount of visible light emission. In other words, it is possible to reduce light emission loss.
  • the storage modulus of the first resin layer within a specific range, that is, by arranging a resin layer that is softer than the cured layer, the impact resistance of the laminate can be improved. Furthermore, the ratio of the storage modulus of the second resin layer to the first resin layer is set within a specific range. In other words, the storage modulus of the first resin layer and the storage modulus of the second resin layer are set to be approximately the same. This can further improve the flexibility of the laminate.
  • a resin layer with high flexibility is placed near the cured layer, that is, the first resin layer is placed near the first cured layer, and the second resin layer is placed near the second cured layer. This allows each cured layer to bend following the resin layer, which is thought to improve the flexibility of the entire laminate.
  • the laminate of the present invention is a laminate having a resin layer, a cured layer, and an adhesive layer.
  • the laminate of the present invention is laminated in the order of a first cured layer, a first resin layer, a first adhesive layer, a second cured layer, and a second resin layer.
  • the first resin layer contains a dye compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in a range of 360 to 379 nm in an ultraviolet-visible light absorption spectrum of a wavelength region of 300 to 460 nm.
  • the average light transmittance of the first resin layer in a wavelength region of 450 to 800 nm is 87% or more.
  • the storage modulus of the first resin layer at 25° C. is in the range of 4.0 to 8.0 GPa.
  • the ratio of the storage modulus of the second resin layer at 25° C. to that of the first resin layer is in the range of 0.7 to 1.5.
  • the laminate is characterized by the above. This feature is a technical feature common to or corresponding to the following embodiments
  • the first resin layer preferably contains a cellulose ester, from the viewpoints of making it easy to add additives to the resin and adjusting the light transmittance and storage modulus of the resin layer to desired values.
  • the dye compound has a structure represented by the above general formula (1).
  • the dye compound has a structure represented by the above general formula (2).
  • the thickness of the first resin layer is preferably within the range of 15 to 50 ⁇ m, from the viewpoint of being able to adjust the light transmittance and storage modulus of the resin layer to desired values and obtaining flexibility.
  • the storage modulus of the second resin layer at 25°C is within the range of 4.0 to 8.0 GPa.
  • the cover member further has a glass layer, and is laminated in the following order: the first hardened layer, the first resin layer, the first adhesive layer, the second hardened layer, the second resin layer, and the glass layer.
  • the second adhesive layer is further included, and the first hardened layer, the first resin layer, the first adhesive layer, the second hardened layer, the second resin layer, the second adhesive layer, and the glass layer are laminated in this order.
  • the thickness of the glass layer is within the range of 10 to 30 ⁇ m.
  • the laminate further includes a third adhesive layer, and is laminated in the following order: the first hardened layer, the first resin layer, the first adhesive layer, the second hardened layer, the second resin layer, the second adhesive layer, the glass layer, and the third adhesive layer.
  • the display device of the present invention is characterized by comprising the laminate.
  • the first resin layer of the laminate is disposed closer to the viewing side of the display device than the second resin layer.
  • the laminate of the present invention is a laminate having a resin layer, a cured layer, and an adhesive layer.
  • the laminate of the present invention is a laminate in which a first cured layer, a first resin layer, a first adhesive layer, a second cured layer, and a second resin layer are laminated in this order.
  • the first resin layer contains a dye compound whose maximum absorption wavelength is present in a range of 360 to 379 nm in an ultraviolet-visible light absorption spectrum of a wavelength region of 300 to 460 nm.
  • the first resin layer has an average light transmittance of 87% or more in a wavelength region of 450 to 800 nm.
  • the first resin layer has a storage modulus at 25° C. in a range of 4.0 to 8.0 GPa.
  • the ratio of the storage modulus at 25° C. of the second resin layer to that of the first resin layer is in a range of 0.7 to 1.5.
  • the laminate is characterized by the above.
  • the laminate of the present invention is used as a protective member for thin-film glass (protective film for glass). It is preferable that the laminate of the present invention is attached to thin-film glass and used as a cover member for a display device.
  • the laminate may have other layers as necessary.
  • FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view of the basic layer structure of a laminate.
  • the laminate 10 is formed by laminating a first cured layer 1, a first resin layer 2, a first adhesive layer 3, a second cured layer 4, and a second resin layer 5 in this order.
  • the first cured layer 1 and the second cured layer 4 may be of the same material and physical properties, or may be of different materials and physical properties.
  • the first resin layer 2 and the second resin layer 5 may be of the same material and physical properties, or may be of different materials and physical properties, as long as they satisfy the storage modulus conditions.
  • the laminate 10 has a first adhesive layer 3 between the first resin layer 2 and the second cured layer 4. If necessary, an adhesive layer may be further provided between the first cured layer 1 and the first resin layer 2, or between the second cured layer 4 and the second resin layer 5.
  • Figures 2 and 3 are cross-sectional views of the basic layer structure of a laminate having a glass layer.
  • the laminate 11 may further have a glass layer 6 on the side of the second resin layer 5 opposite the second cured layer 4.
  • the laminate 12 may have a second adhesive layer between the second resin layer 5 and the glass layer 6.
  • the second adhesive layer may be of the same material and physical properties as the first adhesive layer, or may be of a different material and physical properties.
  • the first resin layer and the second resin layer have similar characteristics.
  • the first resin layer and the second resin layer do not necessarily have to have similar characteristics. In other words, there are no particular restrictions on the light transmittance of the second resin layer.
  • the laminate of the present invention has a cured layer, a resin layer, and an adhesive layer. It may further have a glass layer.
  • the cured layer, the resin layer, the adhesive layer, and the glass layer will be described below.
  • the laminate of the present invention has a hardened layer, which can improve the impact resistance of a display device when the laminate is attached.
  • a hardened layer which can improve the impact resistance of a display device when the laminate is attached.
  • the flexibility of the display device when the laminate is attached can be improved while maintaining the impact resistance.
  • the term "cured layer” refers to a layer formed by curing a resin by heating or irradiating it with active energy rays. It is preferable that the cured layer exhibits a hardness of "HB” or higher in the pencil hardness test specified in JIS K5600-2014.
  • the first and second hardened layers may be made of the same material and have the same physical properties, or may be made of different materials and have different physical properties.
  • the thickness of the cured layer is preferably within the range of 0.01 to 20 ⁇ m, and more preferably within the range of 0.5 to 10 ⁇ m.
  • the cured layer may be made of the same material as the adhesive layer described below. However, the cured layer satisfies the above hardness conditions and does not have adhesive properties. Specifically, the cured layer does not have sufficient adhesive properties to attach the laminate to a display device or to bond the layers in the laminate together.
  • Resin there are no particular limitations on the resin, so long as it is a curable resin that is cured by heating or irradiation with active energy rays. Among them, active energy ray curable resins are preferred from the viewpoint of curing at room temperature in a short time.
  • the active energy ray curable resin is preferably a resin containing a monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond.
  • active energy rays examples include ultraviolet rays and electron beams. Among them, from the viewpoint of mechanical strength such as scratch resistance, impact resistance, and pencil hardness, it is preferable that the active energy rays be ultraviolet rays.
  • the active energy ray curable resin is preferably an acrylic material.
  • acrylic materials include monofunctional or polyfunctional (meth)acrylate compounds such as (meth)acrylic acid esters of polyhydric alcohols, and polyfunctional urethane (meth)acrylate compounds synthesized from diisocyanates, polyhydric alcohols, and hydroxy esters of (meth)acrylic acid, etc.
  • examples of the material include polyethers, polyesters, epoxy resins, alkyd resins, spiroacetal resins, polybutadienes, and polyene-polythiol resins having acrylate functional groups.
  • ultraviolet-curable acrylate resins those that are cured by ultraviolet light are more preferable.
  • ultraviolet-curable acrylate resins ultraviolet-curable urethane acrylate resins, ultraviolet-curable polyester acrylates, ultraviolet-curable epoxy acrylate resins, ultraviolet-curable polyol acrylates, ultraviolet-curable epoxy resins, etc. are preferable.
  • ultraviolet-curable acrylate resins are preferable.
  • the cured layer is formed, for example, using a composition for forming a cured layer that contains an active energy ray-curable resin, a polymerization initiator, and a solvent.
  • the solvent contained in the composition for forming a cured layer is preferably a solvent that dissolves or swells the resin layer. By dissolving or swelling the resin layer with the solvent, the composition for forming a cured layer can easily penetrate from the surface of the resin layer to the inside, improving the adhesion between the resin layer and the cured layer.
  • the cured layer may contain conventionally known fine particles, dispersants, antistatic agents, silane coupling agents, thickeners, coloring inhibitors, colorants (pigments or dyes), defoamers, flame retardants, adhesion promoters, polymerization inhibitors, antioxidants, surface modifiers, etc.
  • the cured layer may contain a photosensitizer. Examples of photosensitizers include n-butylamine, triethylamine, and poly-n-butylphosphine.
  • the cured layer contains fine particles.
  • the content of the fine particles is preferably within the range of 100 to 400% based on the total mass of the active energy ray curable resin.
  • the fine particles are preferably fine particles composed of a metal oxide.
  • fine particles composed of a metal oxide are also referred to as "metal oxide particles”.
  • metal oxides examples include silica, alumina, zirconia, titanium oxide, and antimony pentoxide. Of these, it is preferable that the metal oxide particles are composed of silica.
  • the silica microparticles may be hollow particles with cavities formed inside.
  • the fine particles are preferably coated with a polymeric silane coupling agent.
  • a polymeric silane coupling agent By coating the surfaces of the fine particles with a polymeric silane coupling agent, the fine particles can be uniformly dispersed in the composition for forming the cured layer.
  • the average particle size of the fine particles coated with the polymeric silane coupling agent is preferably within the range of 5 to 500 nm, and more preferably within the range of 10 to 200 nm. By being within the above range, the optical properties of the cured layer can be improved.
  • the polymeric silane coupling agent is prepared by reacting a polymerizable monomer with a silane coupling agent (reactive silane compound).
  • the polymerizable monomer may be a monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond, and among these, a monomer selected from (meth)acrylic acid and its derivatives is preferable.
  • the reactive silane compound is preferably a hydrolyzable silane compound in which three alkoxy groups and one functional group are bonded to a silicon atom. Examples of functional groups bonded to silicon atoms include (meth)acryloxy groups, epoxy groups (glycidyl groups), urethane groups, amino groups, fluoro groups, and mercapto groups.
  • the polymeric silane coupling agent can be synthesized, for example, in accordance with the method for producing a reaction product of a polymerizable monomer and a reactive silane compound disclosed in JP-A-11-116240.
  • the number average molecular weight of the polymeric silane coupling agent is preferably in the range of 2,500 to 150,000, and more preferably in the range of 2,000 to 100,000, calculated as polystyrene.
  • a dispersion liquid is prepared by dispersing silica fine particles and a polymeric silane coupling agent in an organic solvent.
  • An alkali is added to this dispersion liquid to generate OH groups on the surface of the silica fine particles.
  • the polymeric silane coupling agent is adsorbed to the OH groups.
  • the OH groups are bonded to the OH groups of the polymeric silane coupling agent by a dehydration reaction.
  • the silica fine particles to which the polymeric silane coupling agent is adsorbed or bonded are separated from the dispersion liquid and dried. This results in silica fine particles coated with the polymeric silane coupling agent.
  • the method for preparing the composition for forming the cured layer is not particularly limited as long as it is a method that can uniformly mix the solid components contained in the cured layer with the solvent.
  • the composition for forming the cured layer can be prepared by mixing or dissolving each of the solid components and the solvent using a known device such as a paint shaker, a bead mill, a kneader, or a mixer.
  • the cured layer can be formed, for example, by applying a composition for forming a cured layer to the surface of a resin layer and curing the active energy ray-curable resin in the coating.
  • a composition for forming a cured layer can be applied to the surface of a resin layer and curing the active energy ray-curable resin in the coating.
  • the method for applying the composition for forming a cured layer there are no particular limitations on the method for applying the composition for forming a cured layer, and any conventionally known method can be used.
  • the coating method is preferably, for example, a microgravure coating method from the viewpoint of forming a uniform thin layer. Also, from the viewpoint of forming a thick layer, a die coating method is preferable. After removing the solvent from the coating film as necessary, the coating film is irradiated with active energy rays to cure the active energy ray curable resin, thereby obtaining a cured layer.
  • the cured layer does not necessarily have to be formed directly on the surface of the resin layer.
  • the cured layer may be formed on a support, and after peeling the cured layer from the support, the resin layer and the cured layer may be bonded together via an adhesive layer.
  • the first resin layer according to the present invention contains a dye compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the range of 360 to 379 nm in the ultraviolet-visible light absorption spectrum in the wavelength region of 300 to 460 nm.
  • the average light transmittance of the first resin layer according to the present invention in the wavelength region of 450 to 800 nm (visible light region) is 87% or more.
  • the first resin layer according to the present invention also has a storage modulus at 25° C. in the range of 4.0 to 8.0 GPa. Furthermore, the ratio of the storage modulus at 25° C. of the second resin layer according to the present invention to that of the first resin layer is in the range of 0.7 to 1.5.
  • the laminate of the present invention has a resin layer, which is believed to improve the light resistance and flexibility of the display device when the laminate is attached.
  • the first resin layer is disposed near the first cured layer
  • the second resin layer is disposed near the second cured layer. This allows each cured layer to bend following the resin layer, which is believed to improve the flexibility of the laminate as a whole.
  • the "resin layer” refers to a layer that contains a resin as a main component and does not correspond to the above-mentioned cured layer or the adhesive layer described below.
  • the first resin layer and the second resin layer may be made of the same material and have the same physical properties, or may be made of different materials and have different physical properties, so long as they satisfy the conditions of light transmittance and storage modulus.
  • the light transmittance of the resin layer can be adjusted by incorporating dyes or the like into the resin layer.
  • the storage modulus of the resin layer can be adjusted by incorporating plasticizers, particles (rubber particles, metal oxide particles, etc.), fibers (acicular particles, cellulose nanofibers, etc.) into the resin layer. Conventional plasticizers, particles, and fibers can be used.
  • the storage modulus of the resin layer can also be adjusted by the production conditions of the resin layer.
  • the resin contained in the resin layer as a film-forming component is preferably a thermoplastic resin material, and is not limited as long as it can be handled as a film after film formation.
  • thermoplastic resins include cellulose esters such as triacetyl cellulose (TAC), cellulose acetate propionate (CAP), and diacetyl cellulose (DAC); (meth)acrylic resins such as polymethyl methacrylate (PMMA) and styrene-(meth)acrylate copolymers; cyclic olefin resins such as cycloolefin resins (COP); and polyesters such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET).
  • TAC triacetyl cellulose
  • CAP cellulose acetate propionate
  • DAC diacetyl cellulose
  • (meth)acrylic resins such as polymethyl methacrylate (PMMA) and styrene-(meth)acrylate copolymers
  • cyclic olefin resins
  • the resin is preferably a cellulose ester, since it is easy for a network to form between molecules and it can impart rigidity to the resin layer.
  • pigments, plasticizers, particles, fibers, etc. can be added to the cellulose ester.
  • Cellulose ester is a polymer in which ⁇ -glucose units are linked in a linear chain via ⁇ -1,4-glycosidic bonds.
  • Cellulose ester is cellulose in which some or all of the hydrogen atoms in the hydroxyl groups (-OH) at the 2-, 3-, and 6-positions in one glucose unit are substituted with acyl groups.
  • the cellulose ester is not particularly limited, but is preferably an ester of a linear or branched carboxylic acid having about 2 to 22 carbon atoms.
  • the carboxylic acid constituting the ester include an aliphatic carboxylic acid, an alicyclic carboxylic acid, and an aromatic carboxylic acid.
  • Examples of the substituted acyl groups of cellulose esters include acyl groups having 2 to 22 carbon atoms, such as acetyl, propionyl, butyryl, isobutyryl, valeryl, pivaloyl, hexanoyl, octanoyl, lauroyl, and stearoyl.
  • the carboxylic acid (acyl group) constituting the ester may have a substituent.
  • the carboxylic acid constituting the ester is preferably a lower fatty acid having 6 or less carbon atoms, and more preferably a lower fatty acid having 3 or less carbon atoms.
  • the acyl group in the cellulose ester may be of a single type or a combination of multiple acyl groups.
  • cellulose esters include cellulose acetates such as diacetyl cellulose (DAC) and triacetyl cellulose (TAC), as well as mixed fatty acid esters of cellulose to which a propionate group or a butyrate group is bonded in addition to an acetyl group, such as cellulose acetate propionate (CAP), cellulose acetate butyrate, and cellulose acetate propionate butyrate.
  • CAP cellulose acetate propionate
  • CAP cellulose acetate propionate
  • CAP cellulose acetate propionate
  • CAP cellulose acetate propionate
  • CAP cellulose acetate propionate
  • CAP cellulose acetate propionate
  • CAP cellulose acetate propionate
  • CAP cellulose acetate propionate
  • CAP cellulose acetate butyrate
  • cellulose acetate propionate butyrate cellulose acetate propionate butyrate
  • the degree of acyl substitution represents the average number of acyl groups per glucose unit, i.e., how many of the hydrogen atoms in the hydroxyl groups at the 2-, 3-, and 6-positions in one glucose unit are substituted with acyl groups. Therefore, the maximum degree of substitution of the acyl group is 3.0, which means that all of the hydrogen atoms of the hydroxy groups at the 2-, 3- and 6-positions are substituted with acyl groups.
  • the acyl groups may be substituted evenly at the 2-, 3- and 6-positions of one glucose unit, or may be substituted with a distribution.
  • the degree of acyl substitution can be determined by the method specified in ASTM-D817-96.
  • the substitution degree of the acyl group of the cellulose ester is too large, the retardation is difficult to be expressed, so it is necessary to increase the stretching ratio when preparing the resin layer. However, it is difficult to uniformly stretch at a high stretching ratio, and the thickness of the resin layer is likely to vary greatly.
  • the smaller the substitution degree of the acyl group of the cellulose ester the easier it is to express the retardation, so the thickness of the resin layer can be made thin and uniform.
  • the degree of substitution of the acyl group in the cellulose ester is too small, the durability of the resin layer decreases, and therefore, from the viewpoint of durability, it is preferable not to make the degree of substitution too small.
  • the humidity-dependent change in retardation (Rt, phase difference) in the thickness direction occurs when water molecules coordinate with the carbonyl groups of cellulose. Therefore, the smaller the degree of acyl group substitution, i.e., the fewer the carbonyl groups in the cellulose, the less humidity-dependent change in Rt occurs.
  • the degree of substitution of the acyl group in the cellulose ester is preferably within the range of 2.1 to 3.0. By being in the above range, environmental fluctuations (particularly fluctuations in Rt due to humidity) can be suppressed, and the uniformity of the thickness of the resin layer can be improved. In addition, the flowability and stretchability during the production of the resin layer can be improved.
  • the degree of substitution of the acyl group of the cellulose ester satisfies both of the following formulas (a) and (b).
  • X is the degree of substitution of the acetyl group
  • Y is the degree of substitution of the propionyl group or the butyryl group, or the degree of substitution of a mixture thereof.
  • the degree of substitution X of the acetyl group of cellulose acetate satisfies 2.1 ⁇ X ⁇ 3.0.
  • examples of cellulose acetate that satisfies the above range include cellulose diacetate (DAC) and cellulose triacetate (TAC).
  • the cellulose ester is preferably cellulose acetate propionate (CAP).
  • CAP cellulose acetate propionate
  • X and Y satisfy any of the following: 0.95 ⁇ X ⁇ 2.25, 0.1 ⁇ Y ⁇ 1.2, 2.15 ⁇ X+Y ⁇ 2.45.
  • cellulose acetates with different degrees of substitution may be mixed. There are no particular limitations on the mixing ratio of the different cellulose acetates.
  • the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the cellulose ester is preferably within the range of 2 ⁇ 10 4 to 3 ⁇ 10 5 , more preferably within the range of 2 ⁇ 10 4 to 1.2 ⁇ 10 5 , and even more preferably within the range of 4 ⁇ 10 4 to 8 ⁇ 10 4 .
  • the number average molecular weight (Mn) of cellulose ester can be measured in the same manner as for (meth)acrylic resins described below.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the cellulose ester is preferably within the range of 2 ⁇ 10 4 to 1 ⁇ 10 6 , more preferably within the range of 2 ⁇ 10 4 to 1.2 ⁇ 10 5 , and even more preferably within the range of 4 ⁇ 10 4 to 8 ⁇ 10 4 .
  • the raw cellulose for cellulose ester is not particularly limited, but examples include cotton linters, wood pulp, kenaf, etc. Furthermore, the cellulose esters obtained from these may be mixed in any desired ratio.
  • Cellulose esters such as cellulose acetate and cellulose acetate propionate can be synthesized by known methods.
  • the raw material cellulose, organic acid (acetic acid, propionic acid, etc.), acid anhydride (acetic anhydride, propionic anhydride, etc.) and catalyst (sulfuric acid, etc.) are mixed together.
  • the cellulose is then esterified and the reaction is allowed to proceed until a cellulose triester is produced.
  • mixed ester type cellulose esters such as cellulose acetate propionate and cellulose acetate butyrate.
  • the cellulose triester is then hydrolyzed to give a cellulose ester having the desired degree of acyl substitution. Thereafter, the cellulose ester is finally obtained through steps such as filtration, precipitation, washing, dehydration, drying, etc. Specifically, the cellulose ester can be synthesized by referring to the method described in JP-A-10-45804.
  • the cycloolefin resin is preferably a polymer of a cycloolefin monomer, or a copolymer of a cycloolefin monomer and another monomer copolymerizable with the cycloolefin monomer.
  • the cycloolefin monomer is preferably a cycloolefin monomer having a norbornene skeleton. Among them, a cycloolefin monomer having a structure represented by the following general formula (A-1) or (A-2) is more preferable.
  • R 1 to R 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, or a polar group.
  • p represents an integer of 0 to 2.
  • R 1 to R 4 do not all represent hydrogen atoms at the same time, R 1 and R 2 do not both represent hydrogen atoms, and R 3 and R 4 do not both represent hydrogen atoms.
  • the hydrocarbon group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms represented by R 1 to R 4 is, for example, preferably a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • the hydrocarbon group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms may further have a linking group containing, for example, a halogen atom, an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, or a silicon atom.
  • linking groups include divalent polar groups such as a carbonyl group, an imino group, an ether bond, a silyl ether bond, and a thioether bond.
  • Examples of the hydrocarbon group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, and a butyl group.
  • examples of the polar group represented by R 1 to R 4 include a carboxy group, a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an amino group, an amide group, and a cyano group.
  • a carboxy group, a hydroxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, or an aryloxycarbonyl group is preferable.
  • an alkoxycarbonyl group or an aryloxycarbonyl group is preferable from the viewpoint of solubility during solution casting.
  • p is preferably 1 or 2 from the viewpoint of increasing heat resistance.
  • p is 1 or 2 from the viewpoint of increasing heat resistance.
  • the resulting polymer is bulky and the glass transition temperature is easily improved.
  • it becomes somewhat responsive to humidity, making it easier to control the curl balance of the laminate having a resin layer.
  • R5 represents a hydrogen atom, a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or an alkylsilyl group having an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms.
  • R6 represents a carboxy group, a hydroxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an amino group, an amido group, a cyano group, or a halogen atom (a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, or an iodine atom).
  • p represents an integer of 0 to 2.
  • R 5 in the above general formula (A-2) is preferably a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and more preferably a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
  • R6 is preferably a carboxy group, a hydroxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, or an aryloxycarbonyl group, and more preferably an alkoxycarbonyl group or an aryloxycarbonyl group from the viewpoint of solubility during solution casting.
  • p is preferably 1 or 2 from the viewpoint of improving heat resistance.
  • p is 1 or 2 from the viewpoint of improving heat resistance.
  • the cycloolefin monomer is preferably a cycloolefin monomer having the structure represented by the above general formula (A-2).
  • the crystallinity is reduced and the solubility in an organic solvent is improved.
  • R 5 and R 6 in the general formula (A-2) are substituted on only one side of the carbon atoms constituting the ring with respect to the symmetric axis of the molecule, so that the symmetry of the molecule is low. That is, the cycloolefin monomer having the structure represented by the general formula (A-2) is suitable for producing a resin layer by a solution casting method because of its high solubility.
  • the content of the cycloolefin monomer having the structure represented by general formula (A-2) in the cycloolefin resin is preferably 70 mol% or more relative to the total number of moles of all cycloolefin monomers constituting the cycloolefin resin. Also, it is more preferable that it is 80 mol% or more, and even more preferable that it is 100 mol%.
  • the content of the cycloolefin monomer having the structure represented by general formula (A-2) is 70 mol% or more, the orientation of the cycloolefin resin is increased, and the phase difference (retardation) value is likely to increase.
  • cycloolefin monomers having a structure represented by general formula (A-1) are shown below as exemplary compounds 1 to 14.
  • Specific examples of cycloolefin monomers having a structure represented by general formula (A-2) are shown below as exemplary compounds 15 to 34.
  • copolymerizable monomers capable of ring-opening copolymerization include cycloolefins such as cyclobutene, cyclopentene, cycloheptene, cyclooctene, and dicyclopentadiene.
  • Examples of copolymerizable monomers capable of addition copolymerization include unsaturated double bond-containing compounds, vinyl cyclic hydrocarbon monomers, (meth)acrylates, etc.
  • Examples of unsaturated double bond-containing compounds include olefin compounds having 2 to 12 carbon atoms (preferably 2 to 8), such as ethylene, propylene, and butene.
  • Examples of vinyl cyclic hydrocarbon monomers include vinylcyclopentene monomers such as 4-vinylcyclopentene and 2-methyl-4-isopropenylcyclopentene.
  • (meth)acrylates examples include alkyl (meth)acrylates having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, such as methyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, and cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate.
  • the content of the cycloolefin monomer in a copolymer of a cycloolefin monomer and a copolymerizable monomer is preferably within the range of 20 to 80 mol %, and more preferably within the range of 30 to 70 mol %, based on the total of all monomers constituting the copolymer.
  • the cycloolefin resin is a polymer obtained by homopolymerizing or copolymerizing a cycloolefin monomer having a norbornene skeleton, preferably a cycloolefin monomer having a structure represented by the above general formula (A-1) or (A-2).
  • Examples of such polymers include the following.
  • Ring-opening polymer of cycloolefin monomer 1) Ring-opening polymer of cycloolefin monomer; 2) Ring-opening copolymer of cycloolefin monomer and a copolymerizable monomer capable of ring-opening copolymerization therewith; 3) Hydrogenated product of ring-opening (co)polymer of 1) or 2) above; 4) (co)polymer obtained by cyclizing ring-opening (co)polymer of 1) or 2) above by Friedel-Crafts reaction and then hydrogenating it; 5) Saturated copolymer of cycloolefin monomer and unsaturated double bond-containing compound; 6) Addition copolymer of cycloolefin monomer and vinyl cyclic hydrocarbon monomer and hydrogenated product thereof; 7) Alternating copolymer of cycloolefin monomer and (meth)acrylate.
  • the polymers 1) to 7) above can all be obtained by known methods, for example, the methods described in JP-A-2008-107534 and JP-A-2005-227606.
  • the catalyst and solvent used in the ring-opening copolymerization 2) above can be, for example, those described in paragraphs 0019 to 0024 of JP-A-2008-107534.
  • the catalyst used in the hydrogenation 3) and 6) above can be, for example, those described in paragraphs 0025 to 0028 of JP-A-2008-107534.
  • the acidic compound used in the Friedel-Crafts reaction 4) above can be, for example, those described in paragraph 0029 of JP-A-2008-107534.
  • the catalyst used in the addition polymerization 5) to 7) above can be, for example, those described in paragraphs 0058 to 0063 of JP-A-2005-227606.
  • the alternating copolymerization reaction of 7) above can be carried out, for example, by the method described in paragraphs 0071 to 0072 of JP 2005-227606 A.
  • the cycloolefin resin preferably contains at least one of a structural unit represented by the following general formula (B-1) and a structural unit represented by the following general formula (B-2). It is more preferred that the cycloolefin resin contains only a structural unit represented by general formula (B-2), or contains both a structural unit represented by general formula (B-1) and a structural unit represented by general formula (B-2).
  • the structural unit represented by general formula (B-1) is a structural unit derived from the cycloolefin monomer represented by the aforementioned general formula (A-1), and the structural unit represented by general formula (B-2) is a structural unit derived from the cycloolefin monomer represented by the aforementioned general formula (A-2).
  • R 1 to R 4 and p have the same meanings as R 1 to R 4 and p in the above general formula (A-1), respectively.
  • R 5 to R 6 and p have the same meanings as R 5 to R 6 and p in general formula (A-2), respectively.
  • the cycloolefin resin used in the present invention may be a commercially available product.
  • Examples of commercially available cycloolefin resins include "ARTON (registered trademark) G780", “ARTON (registered trademark) F”, “ARTON (registered trademark) R4500, R4900, R5000”, and “ARTON (registered trademark) RX4500” (all manufactured by JSR Corporation).
  • the intrinsic viscosity [ ⁇ ]inh of the cycloolefin resin at 30° C. is preferably within the range of 0.2 to 5 cm 3 /g, more preferably within the range of 0.3 to 3 cm 3 /g, and even more preferably within the range of 0.4 to 1.5 cm 3 /g.
  • the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the cycloolefin resin is preferably within the range of 8,000 to 100,000, more preferably within the range of 10,000 to 80,000, and even more preferably within the range of 12,000 to 50,000.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the cycloolefin resin is preferably within a range of 20,000 to 300,000, more preferably within a range of 30,000 to 250,000, and further preferably within a range of 40,000 to 200,000.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) can be measured by the same method as that for the (meth)acrylic resin described above.
  • the cycloolefin resin has good heat resistance, water resistance, chemical resistance, mechanical properties, and moldability as a resin layer.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of cycloolefin resins is usually 110°C or higher, preferably in the range of 110 to 350°C, more preferably in the range of 120 to 250°C, and even more preferably in the range of 120 to 220°C. Having a Tg of 110°C or higher makes it possible to suppress deformation under high temperature conditions. On the other hand, having a Tg of 350°C or lower makes molding easier and suppresses deterioration of the resin due to heat during molding processing.
  • the content of the cycloolefin resin is preferably 70% by mass or more, and more preferably 80% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the resin layer.
  • Polyimide is synthesized by a polymerization reaction between a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and a diamine.
  • tetracarboxylic dianhydride examples include aromatic tetracarboxylic dianhydrides, aliphatic tetracarboxylic dianhydrides, and alicyclic tetracarboxylic dianhydrides. Among these, aromatic tetracarboxylic dianhydrides are preferred.
  • the diamine may be an aromatic diamine, an aliphatic diamine, or an alicyclic diamine, and among these, an aromatic diamine is preferred.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polyimide is preferably within the range of 100,000 to 300,000, and more preferably within the range of 130,000 to 250,000. By being within the above range, it is possible to prevent the resin layer from breaking due to the transport tension during transport.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) can be measured in the same manner as for the (meth)acrylic resin described above.
  • the polyimide content is preferably 60% by mass or more, and more preferably 70% by mass or more, relative to the total mass of the resin layer.
  • the first resin layer contains a dye compound.
  • the dye compound has a maximum absorption wavelength in the range of 360 to 379 nm in an ultraviolet-visible light absorption spectrum in a wavelength range of 300 to 460 nm.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength of each dye compound refers to the maximum absorption wavelength in the absorption spectrum in the wavelength range of 300 to 460 nm.
  • the dye compound has the above-mentioned light absorption properties, and thus can protect the light emitting element (particularly the organic EL element) or the light emitting device from external light and suppress deterioration.
  • the dye compound does not have fluorescence or phosphorescence properties (photoluminescence), which would impair the display properties of the organic EL element.
  • the dye compound is not particularly limited in structure, etc., as long as it has the above-mentioned light absorption characteristics.
  • Examples of the dye compound include organic compounds and inorganic compounds. From the viewpoint of dispersibility in the resin component and transparency of the first resin layer, it is preferable that the dye compound is an organic compound.
  • organic compounds examples include azomethine compounds, indole compounds, cinnamic acid compounds, pyrimidine compounds, methine compounds, porphyrin compounds, dicyanomethine compounds, and benzotriazole compounds. Among these, benzotriazole compounds are preferred.
  • the benzotriazole-based compound preferably has a structure represented by the following general formula (1) or (2).
  • Dye compounds having these structures have extremely high ultraviolet absorption ability and low light absorptance in the wavelength range of 450 to 800 nm. Therefore, the average light transmittance of the first resin layer in the ultraviolet range can be made extremely low, and the average light transmittance in the wavelength range of 450 to 800 nm can be adjusted to 87% or more.
  • the dye compound is a compound having a structure represented by the following general formula (1) or (2).
  • the compound has a substituent of a specific structure on the benzotriazole skeleton, and is therefore highly hydrophobic. This strengthens the interaction between the compound, the resin, and other additives, suppresses decomposition of the compound by light, and is thought to improve the light resistance of the compound.
  • the resin and the compound are highly compatible. Therefore, even if the compound is contained in the resin in an amount necessary to form a desired absorption spectrum, it is thought that bleeding out or whitening is unlikely to occur.
  • R 11 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a hydroxy group, an amino group, an alkyl-substituted amino group, a carboxy group, an alkyloxycarbonyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkylcarbonyloxyalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group, an alkyloxycarbonylalkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group, or a sulfo group.
  • R 12 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydroxy group.
  • R 21 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydroxy group.
  • R 22 , R 23 , and R 24 represent an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkyl-substituted amino group, a carboxy group, an alkyloxycarbonyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkylcarbonyloxyalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group, an alkyloxycarbonylalkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group, or a sulfo group.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group portion of the substituents represented by R 11 , R 22 , R 23 and R 24 is preferably within the range of 1 to 20, more preferably within the range of 1 to 10.
  • the alkyl group portion may be linear, branched, cyclic or a combination thereof.
  • the number of carbon atoms in the aryl group is preferably within the range of 5 to 30.
  • the aryl group may have a heteroatom.
  • the aromatic ring in the aryl group may be a monocyclic or condensed ring.
  • alkyl group or alkyl group moiety examples include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, an n-butyl group, an isobutyl group, a sec-butyl group, a tert-butyl group, an n-hexyl group, an n-octyl group, and a 2-ethylhexyl group.
  • aryl group include a phenoxy group, a naphthyloxy group, and a 2-methylphenoxy group.
  • the substituents represented by R 11 , R 22 , R 23 and R 24 may further have a substituent.
  • the compounds having the structures represented by the general formulas (1) and (2) according to the present invention can be synthesized by conventionally known methods.
  • An example of the synthesis method is shown below. First, nitroanilines are diazotized. The resulting diazo compound is coupled with sesamol by a conventional method. The resulting nitrophenylazo compound is reduced to synthesize the desired benzotriazole derivative.
  • the reaction product is washed twice with 100 mL of warm water. 0.1 g of activated carbon is added to the reaction product, and the mixture is stirred under reflux to decolorize. The reaction product is then filtered while hot, and the filtrate is cooled to 5°C. The precipitated crystals are filtered, washed with toluene, and dried at 60°C to obtain 0.5 g of compound (1-8). The yield is 43%.
  • the resulting compound (1-8) is 6-(5-methoxycarbonyl-2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)benzo[1,3]dioxol-5-ol, and has a maximum absorption wavelength of 377 nm.
  • the maximum absorption wavelength of a dye compound can be determined by measuring the absorption spectrum of the dye compound in chloroform using, for example, an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer "UV-2450" (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation).
  • the "maximum absorption wavelength” refers to the wavelength (nm) that shows the maximum and maximal absorbance (absorption intensity) in the ultraviolet-visible light absorption spectrum of the dye compound obtained by measurement.
  • the dye compounds may be used alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the second resin layer may or may not contain a dye compound.
  • the content of the dye compound is preferably within a range of 0.01 to 10% by mass, and more preferably within a range of 0.02 to 8% by mass, based on the total mass of the resin as a film-forming component.
  • the resin layer can sufficiently absorb light in a wavelength range that does not affect the light emission of the light-emitting element or light-emitting device, and deterioration of the light-emitting element or light-emitting device due to external light can be suppressed.
  • the resin layer preferably contains a plasticizer.
  • a plasticizer By containing a plasticizer, the flexibility and processability of the resin layer can be improved.
  • the plasticizer include polyester.
  • the polyester is obtained by polymerizing a dicarboxylic acid and a diol.
  • the proportion of structural units derived from aromatic dicarboxylic acids is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, and even more preferably 90% or more.
  • the proportion of structural units derived from aliphatic diols is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, and even more preferably 90% or more.
  • the polyester may be contained alone or in combination of two or more types.
  • aromatic dicarboxylic acids examples include terephthalic acid; isophthalic acid; naphthalenedicarboxylic acids such as 2,6-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 1,5-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, and 2,7-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid; 4,4'-biphenyldicarboxylic acid; 3,4'-biphenyldicarboxylic acid; and ester-forming derivatives thereof.
  • Aliphatic dicarboxylic acids such as adipic acid, azelaic acid, and sebacic acid
  • monocarboxylic acids such as benzoic acid, propionic acid, and butyric acid
  • aliphatic diols examples include ethylene glycol, 1,3-propylene diol, 1,4-butanediol, 1,4-cyclohexanedimethanol, 1,6-hexanediol, and ester-forming derivatives thereof.
  • polyester monoalcohols such as butyl alcohol, hexyl alcohol, octyl alcohol, etc., and polyhydric alcohols such as trimethylolpropane, glycerin, pentaerythritol, etc. may be used as long as the object of the present invention is not impaired.
  • monoalcohols such as butyl alcohol, hexyl alcohol, octyl alcohol, etc.
  • polyhydric alcohols such as trimethylolpropane, glycerin, pentaerythritol, etc.
  • Polyesters can be synthesized by known methods such as direct esterification and transesterification.
  • Polycondensation catalysts used in polyester synthesis include known antimony compounds such as antimony trioxide and antimony pentoxide; germanium compounds such as germanium oxide; titanium compounds such as titanium acetate; and aluminum compounds such as aluminum chloride.
  • antimony compounds such as antimony trioxide and antimony pentoxide
  • germanium compounds such as germanium oxide
  • titanium compounds such as titanium acetate
  • aluminum compounds such as aluminum chloride.
  • polycondensation catalysts are not limited to these.
  • Preferred polyesters include polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene terephthalate-isophthalate copolymer, polyethylene-1,4-cyclohexanedimethylene-terephthalate copolymer, polyethylene-2,6-naphthalene dicarboxylate, polyethylene-2,6-naphthalene dicarboxylate-terephthalate copolymer, polyethylene-terephthalate-4,4'-biphenyl dicarboxylate, poly-1,3-propylene terephthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, polybutylene-2,6-naphthalene dicarboxylate, etc.
  • polyesters include polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene terephthalate-isophthalate copolymer, polyethylene-1,4-cyclohexanedimethylene-terephthalate copolymer, polybutylene terephthalate, and polyethylene-2,6-naphthalenedicarboxylate.
  • the plasticizer content is preferably within the range of 0 to 35% by mass, and more preferably within the range of 5 to 30% by mass, relative to the total mass of the resin as a film-forming component.
  • the resin layer may contain an ultraviolet absorber, if necessary. By containing an ultraviolet absorber, the light absorptance of the resin layer in the ultraviolet region can be further improved.
  • the term "ultraviolet light absorber” refers to a compound that has the function of absorbing ultraviolet light with a wavelength of at least 400 nm or less. There are no particular limitations on the ultraviolet light absorber as long as it has the above absorption characteristics.
  • the ultraviolet light absorber used in the present invention is preferably a compound whose maximum absorption wavelength is in the range of 300 to 359 nm in the ultraviolet-visible light absorption spectrum in the wavelength region of 300 to 460 nm.
  • ultraviolet absorbents examples include triazine-based ultraviolet absorbents, benzotriazole-based ultraviolet absorbents, benzophenone-based ultraviolet absorbents, oxybenzophenone-based ultraviolet absorbents, salicylic acid ester-based ultraviolet absorbents, and cyanoacrylate-based ultraviolet absorbents. These may be contained alone or in combination of two or more.
  • triazine-based UV absorbers or benzotriazole-based UV absorbers are preferable.
  • triazine-based UV absorbers having two or less hydroxyl groups per molecule or benzotriazole-based UV absorbers having one benzotriazole skeleton per molecule are preferable.
  • UV absorbents have good solubility with the above resins.
  • these UV absorbents have high UV absorption capabilities at wavelengths around 380 nm.
  • triazine-based UV absorbers having two or less hydroxy groups in one molecule examples include 2,4-bis-[ ⁇ 4-(4-ethylhexyloxy)-4-hydroxy ⁇ -phenyl]-6-(4-methoxyphenyl)-1,3,5-triazine ("Tinosorb (registered trademark) S” (BASF Corporation)), 2,4-bis[2-hydroxy-4-butoxyphenyl]-6-(2,4-dibutoxyphenyl)-1,3,5-triazine ("TINUVIN (registered trademark) 460" (BASF Corporation)), 2- (4,6-bis(2,4-dimethylphenyl)-1,3,5-triazin-2-yl)-5-hydroxyphenyl and [(C10-C16 (mainly C12-C13) alkyloxy)methyl]oxirane reaction products (“TINUVIN (registered trademark) 400" (BASF Corporation)), 2-[4,6-bis(2,4-dimethylphenyl)-1,3,5-
  • examples of benzotriazole-based ultraviolet absorbers having one benzotriazole skeleton per molecule include 2-(2H-benzotriazole-2-yl)-6-(1-methyl-1-phenylethyl)-4-(1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl)phenol ("TINUVIN (registered trademark) 928" (BASF Corporation)), 2-(2-hydroxy-5-tert-butylphenyl)-2H-benzotriazole (“TINUVIN (registered trademark) PS” (BASF Corporation)), and an ester compound of benzenepropanoic acid and 3-(2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)-5-(1,1-dimethylethyl)-4-hydroxy (C7-9 side chain and linear alkyl) (“TINUVIN (registered trademark) 384-2").
  • examples of the benzophenone-based ultraviolet absorbers (benzophenone-based compounds) and oxybenzophenone-based ultraviolet absorbers (oxybenzophenone-based compounds) include 2,4-dihydroxybenzophenone, 2-hydroxy-4-methoxybenzophenone, 2-hydroxy-4-methoxybenzophenone-5-sulfonic acid (anhydrous and trihydrate), 2-hydroxy-4-octyloxybenzophenone, 4-dodecyloxy-2-hydroxybenzophenone, 4-benzyloxy-2-hydroxybenzophenone, 2,2',4,4'-tetrahydroxybenzophenone, 2,2'-dihydroxy-4,4-dimethoxybenzophenone, 2,2',4,4'-tetrahydroxybenzophenone ("SeeSorb (registered trademark) 106" (manufactured by Shipro Chemical Co., Ltd.)), 2,2'-dihydroxy-4-methoxybenzophenone ("KEMISORB (registered trademark) 111" (man
  • examples of the salicylic acid ester-based ultraviolet absorbers include phenyl-2-acryloyloxybenzoate, phenyl-2-acryloyloxy-3-methylbenzoate, phenyl-2-acryloyloxy-4-methylbenzoate, phenyl-2-acryloyloxy-5-methylbenzoate, phenyl-2-acryloyloxy-3-methoxybenzoate, phenyl-2-hydroxybenzoate, phenyl-2-hydroxy-3-methylbenzoate, phenyl-2-hydroxy-4-methylbenzoate, phenyl-2-hydroxy-5-methylbenzoate, phenyl-2-hydroxy-3-methoxybenzoate, 2,4-di-tert-butylphenyl-3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzoate ("TINUVIN (registered trademark) 120" (manufactured by BASF Corporation)), and the like.
  • TINUVIN registered trademark
  • cyanoacrylate-based ultraviolet absorbers examples include alkyl-2-cyanoacrylate, cycloalkyl-2-cyanoacrylate, alkoxyalkyl-2-cyanoacrylate, alkenyl-2-cyanoacrylate, and alkynyl-2-cyanoacrylate.
  • the ultraviolet absorbing agent may be contained alone or in combination of two or more kinds.
  • the content of the ultraviolet absorber is preferably within a range of 0.1 to 8 mass %, and more preferably within a range of 0.5 to 5 mass %, based on the total mass of the resin as the film-forming component.
  • the light absorptance of the resin layer in the ultraviolet region can be improved.
  • the laminate protects the light-emitting element or light-emitting device in the display device from external light (ultraviolet rays), and improves the light resistance of the display device when the laminate is attached.
  • the quality of the display device can be maintained for a long period of time.
  • the resin layer preferably contains an antioxidant.
  • an antioxidant By containing an antioxidant, deterioration of the resin layer can be suppressed. Specifically, decomposition of the resin layer due to halogens from residual solvents, phosphoric acid from phosphoric acid-based plasticizers, etc. can be delayed or prevented.
  • the light absorption waveform in the resin layer can be made sharper by using the above-mentioned dye compound and an antioxidant in combination.
  • the antioxidant is not particularly limited, but is preferably a hindered phenol compound.
  • Hindered phenol compounds have a high affinity with the dye compound. Their interaction makes the light absorption waveform sharper, suppresses light absorption on the long wavelength side, and reduces the light emission loss of the light emitting element or light emitting device.
  • Hindered phenol antioxidants include, for example, 2,6-di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pentaerythrityl-tetrakis[3-(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propionate], triethylene glycol-bis[3-(3-t-butyl-5-methyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propionate], 1,6-hexanediol-bis[3-(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propionate], 2,4-bis-(n-octylthio)-6-(4-hydroxy-3,5-di-t-butylanilino) -1,3,5-triazine, 2,2-thio-diethylenebis[3-(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propionate], octadecyl-3-(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)prop
  • 2,6-di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pentaerythrityl-tetrakis[3-(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propionate], or triethylene glycol-bis[3-(3-t-butyl-5-methyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propionate] are preferred.
  • hydrazine-based metal deactivators such as N,N'-bis[3-(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propionyl]hydrazine, or phosphorus-based processing stabilizers such as tris(2,4-di-t-butylphenyl)phosphite may be used in combination.
  • antioxidants As the hindered phenol-based antioxidant, commercially available products may be used. Examples of commercially available products include “Irganox (registered trademark) 1076” and “Irganox (registered trademark) 1010” (both manufactured by BASF Japan Ltd.).
  • the content of the antioxidant is preferably 5% by mass or less, more preferably 2% by mass or less, and even more preferably within the range of 0.5 to 1% by mass, based on the total mass of the resin as a film-forming component.
  • the resin layer preferably contains fine particles. By containing fine particles, the light emission loss of the light emitting element or the light emitting device can be reduced. In addition, slipperiness can be imparted to the resin layer.
  • the fine particles may be of an inorganic compound or an organic compound.
  • inorganic compounds include silicon dioxide, titanium dioxide, aluminum oxide, zirconium oxide, calcium carbonate, talc, clay, calcined kaolin, calcined calcium silicate, hydrated calcium silicate, aluminum silicate, magnesium silicate, and calcium phosphate.
  • organic compounds include polytetrafluoroethylene, cellulose acetate, polystyrene, polymethyl methacrylate, polypropyl methacrylate, polymethyl acrylate, polyethylene carbonate, styrene-acrylic resins, silicone resins, polycarbonate, benzoguanamine resins, melamine resins, polyolefins, polyesters, polyamides, polyimides, and polyethylene fluoride.
  • Other examples include crushed fractions of organic polymer compounds such as starch.
  • fine particles include polymer compounds synthesized by suspension polymerization, polymer compounds made spherical by spray drying or dispersion methods, and inorganic compounds.
  • the average particle size of the primary particles of the microparticles is preferably within the range of 5 to 400 nm, and more preferably within the range of 10 to 300 nm.
  • the fine particles may be contained in the resin layer mainly as secondary aggregates with a particle size in the range of 0.05 to 0.3 ⁇ m. If the average particle size of the primary particles of the fine particles is in the range of 100 to 400 nm, the fine particles may be contained as primary particles without agglomeration.
  • the fine particles contain silicon, and it is particularly preferable that they contain silicon dioxide.
  • silicon dioxide fine particles include "Aerosil (registered trademark) R972, R972V, R974, R812, 200, 200V, 300, R202, OX50, and TT600" (all manufactured by Nippon Aerosil Co., Ltd.).
  • Silicon-containing microparticles have a high affinity with the dye compound. By using silicon-containing microparticles in combination with the dye compound, the light absorption waveform in the resin layer can be made sharper. Furthermore, light absorption on the long wavelength side is suppressed, and the luminescence loss of the light-emitting element or light-emitting device can be reduced.
  • the silicon-containing microparticles the above-mentioned "Aerosil (registered trademark) R812 or R972" is particularly preferable. These highly hydrophobic microparticles have a high affinity with the dye compound, and the interaction between them can further reduce the luminescence loss of the light-emitting element or light-emitting device.
  • These fine particles may be contained alone or in combination of two or more kinds.
  • the content of the fine particles is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less, and further preferably within the range of 0.5 to 2% by mass, based on the total mass of the resin as the film-forming component.
  • the addition of fine particles is preferably performed by in-line addition and mixing.
  • An example of an in-line mixer is a static mixer.
  • Another example of a static mixer is the static in-pipe mixer "Hi-Mixer SWJ type" (manufactured by Toray Engineering Co., Ltd.).
  • the resin layer may further contain other additives, such as particles (rubber particles, metal oxide particles, etc.), fibers (acicular particles, cellulose nanofibers, etc.), antistatic agents, release agents, thickeners, etc., as necessary.
  • additives such as particles (rubber particles, metal oxide particles, etc.), fibers (acicular particles, cellulose nanofibers, etc.), antistatic agents, release agents, thickeners, etc., as necessary.
  • the method for producing the resin layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably a solution casting method or a melt casting method from the viewpoints of suppressing coloration, foreign matter defects, and optical defects such as die lines, etc.
  • the solution casting method is preferred from the viewpoints of low temperature in the processing step and the ability to add various additives.
  • a dope containing resin, solvent, and any other ingredients is prepared, and then the dope is cast onto a substrate and then dried to obtain a resin layer.
  • the method for producing a resin layer using the solution casting method is described below.
  • the resin used as the film-forming component is cellulose ester
  • conventionally known methods can be used.
  • the cast membrane when explaining the method for producing the resin layer, the cast membrane is also called a "web.”
  • the web that has been dried and has had some of the solvent removed is also called a "film.”
  • the solvent contained in the dope may be one type alone or two or more types. It is preferable to use a mixture of a good solvent and a poor solvent for cellulose ester from the viewpoint of production efficiency.
  • good solvents include methylene chloride and methyl acetate.
  • poor solvents include methanol, ethanol, n-butanol, cyclohexane, cyclohexanone, etc.
  • the dope preferably contains water in the range of 0.01 to 2% by mass.
  • the solvent removed from the casting film by drying may be recovered and reused to dissolve the cellulose ester.
  • the cellulose ester can be dissolved in a dope by any of the conventional methods. By combining heating and pressure, the cellulose ester can be heated to a temperature equal to or higher than the boiling point at normal pressure. In preparing the dope, the dye compound and the like can be dissolved or dispersed by a general method.
  • the cellulose ester solution is filtered using a suitable filter material such as filter paper.
  • the filter material preferably has an absolute filtration accuracy of 0.008 mm or less, more preferably within the range of 0.001 to 0.008 mm, and even more preferably within the range of 0.003 to 0.006 mm.
  • Filter materials made of plastics such as polypropylene and Teflon (registered trademark), or metals such as stainless steel, are preferred as they are less susceptible to fiber shedding.
  • the dope can be filtered by a normal method.
  • the filtration temperature is preferably equal to or higher than the boiling point of the solvent at normal pressure, and is in a range in which the solvent does not boil under pressure. By filtering while heating, the increase in the difference in filtration pressure (differential pressure) before and after filtration can be reduced.
  • the filtration temperature is preferably within the range of 45 to 120°C, more preferably within the range of 45 to 70°C, and even more preferably within the range of 45 to 55°C.
  • the filtration pressure is preferably 1.6 MPa or less, more preferably 1.2 MPa or less, and even more preferably 1.0 MPa or less.
  • the metal support used in the casting process is preferably one with a mirror-finished surface.
  • the metal support is preferably, for example, a stainless steel belt or a cast drum with a plated surface.
  • the casting width is preferably within the range of 1 to 4 m.
  • the surface temperature of the metal support during the casting process is preferably -50°C or higher and lower than the boiling point of the solvent, more preferably within the range of 0 to 40°C, and even more preferably within the range of 5 to 30°C.
  • the amount of residual solvent when the casting film (web) is peeled off from the metal support is preferably within the range of 10 to 150% by mass. It is more preferably within the range of 20 to 40% by mass or within the range of 60 to 130% by mass. And it is even more preferably within the range of 20 to 30% by mass or within the range of 70 to 120% by mass.
  • the amount of residual solvent is defined by the following formula:
  • M is the mass of a sample taken at any time during or after the production of the web or film
  • N is the mass of M after heating at 115° C. for 1 hour.
  • Step of peeling off the cast film from the support The cast film (web) is peeled off from the metal support.
  • a method for peeling off the web from the metal support a known method can be used.
  • the residual solvent content is preferably 1% by mass or less, more preferably 0.1% by mass or less, and further preferably in the range of 0 to 0.01% by mass.
  • the web drying process generally involves the roll drying method or the tenter method, which dries the web while transporting it.
  • the roll drying method the web is dried by passing it alternately through multiple rolls arranged above and below.
  • the web is preferably stretched in the longitudinal direction (MD) immediately after peeling from the metal support, where the amount of residual solvent in the web is large. It is also preferable to stretch the web in the transverse direction (TD) using a tenter method in which both ends of the web are held by clips or the like.
  • the drying temperature in the web drying process is preferably in the range of 90 to 200°C, and more preferably in the range of 110 to 190°C. It is preferable to increase the drying temperature in stages.
  • the preferred drying time depends on the drying temperature, but is preferably within the range of 5 to 60 minutes, and more preferably within the range of 10 to 30 minutes.
  • the thickness of the film is not particularly limited, but is preferably within the range of 10 to 200 ⁇ m, more preferably within the range of 10 to 100 ⁇ m, and more preferably within the range of 20 to 60 ⁇ m.
  • the width of the film is preferably within the range of 1 to 4 m. From the viewpoint of productivity, the width is preferably within the range of 1.6 to 4 m, and more preferably within the range of 1.8 to 3.6 m.
  • the stretching operation can be performed sequentially or simultaneously in the longitudinal direction (MD) and transverse direction (TD) of the film.
  • the final stretching ratios in the two mutually perpendicular axial directions are preferably within the ranges of 1.0 to 2.0 times in the MD direction and 1.07 to 2.0 times in the TD direction. Also, it is preferably within the ranges of 1.0 to 1.5 times in the MD direction and 1.07 to 2.0 times in the TD direction.
  • a difference in peripheral speed is applied to multiple rolls and the difference in roll peripheral speed is used to stretch in the MD direction.
  • both ends of the web are fixed with clips or pins, and the spacing between the clips or pins is widened in the direction of travel to stretch in the MD direction, and a method in which the web is similarly widened in the lateral direction to stretch in the TD direction.
  • Another method is to simultaneously widen the web in both the MD and TD directions to stretch in both the MD and TD directions.
  • the width is preferably maintained or the film is stretched in the width direction using a tenter, which may be a pin tenter or a clip tenter.
  • the film transport tension during the film-forming process depends on the temperature, but is preferably within the range of 120 to 200 N/m, more preferably within the range of 140 to 200 N/m, and even more preferably within the range of 140 to 160 N/m.
  • the temperature of the film during stretching is preferably within the range of (Tg-30) to (Tg+100)°C, more preferably within the range of (Tg-20) to (Tg+80)°C, and even more preferably within the range of (Tg-5) to (Tg+20)°C.
  • the Tg of the film can be controlled by the type of materials that make up the film and the ratio of those materials.
  • the Tg of the film when dry is preferably 110°C or higher, and more preferably 120°C or higher.
  • the Tg of the film when dry is preferably 190°C or less, and more preferably 170°C or less.
  • the Tg of the film can be determined by the method described in JIS K7121, etc.
  • the average surface roughness Ra of the film is preferably within the range of 2.0 to 4.0 nm, and more preferably within the range of 2.5 to 3.5 nm.
  • the average surface roughness Ra (nm) of the film and the polarity of the film itself with respect to the solvent satisfy the following relationship.
  • the film is preferably heat-set.
  • the temperature during heat-setting is preferably higher than the temperature during the final stretching in the TD direction.
  • Heat-setting is preferably performed at a temperature of (Tg-20°C) or lower, usually for 0.5 to 300 seconds. In this case, it is preferable to heat-set the film while sequentially increasing the temperature in two or more divided regions so that the temperature difference is in the range of 1 to 100°C.
  • the heat-set film is usually cooled to below Tg, and the clipped portions at both ends of the film are cut and wound up. At this time, it is preferable to relax the film by 0.1 to 10% in the TD or MD directions within a temperature range below the final heat-setting temperature and above Tg.
  • the film is preferably cooled slowly from the final heat setting temperature to Tg at a cooling rate of 100°C per second or less.
  • a cooling rate of 100°C per second or less.
  • any conventionally known method can be used. From the viewpoint of improving the dimensional stability of the film, it is preferable to carry out these treatments while sequentially cooling in multiple temperature ranges.
  • the cooling rate is calculated by (T1-Tg)/t, where T1 is the final heat setting temperature and t is the time it takes for the film to reach Tg from the final heat setting temperature.
  • the optimal conditions for these heat fixing conditions and cooling and relaxation treatment conditions vary depending on the types of additives, such as cellulose ester and dye compounds, that make up the film (resin layer).
  • additives such as cellulose ester and dye compounds
  • the physical properties of the resulting biaxially stretched film can be measured, and the constituent materials of the optical film can be appropriately selected so that the optical film has the desired characteristics.
  • the first resin layer has an average light transmittance of 87% or more in the wavelength region of 450 to 800 nm. By being within the above range, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the light emitting element in the display device from being absorbed by the resin layer, and to increase the amount of light emission that is visually recognized. In other words, it is possible to reduce the light emission loss.
  • the first resin preferably absorbs more ultraviolet light and transmits more visible light. In other words, it is preferable that the average light transmittance in the ultraviolet region is lower, and that the average light transmittance in the wavelength region of 450 to 800 nm is higher.
  • the light absorption characteristics of the second resin layer are not particularly limited. However, from the viewpoint of further reducing the light emission loss, it is preferable that the visible light transmittance is high.
  • the light transmittance of the resin layer can be adjusted by including the above-mentioned dye compound.
  • the average light transmittance in the wavelength region of 450 to 800 nm can be measured by the following method.
  • the resin layer is conditioned for 24 hours in an air-conditioned room at a temperature of 23° C. and a relative humidity of 55 RH. Then, in accordance with JIS K-7375:2008, the light transmittance is measured using an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (for example, “UV-2450” (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation)) to determine the arithmetic average value in the wavelength region of 450 to 800 nm.
  • an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer for example, “UV-2450” (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation)
  • the first resin layer has a storage modulus in the range of 4.0 to 8.0 GPa at 25° C. This makes the first resin layer relatively soft, and can improve the flexibility of the laminate.
  • the ratio of the storage modulus of the second resin layer to that of the first resin layer at 25° C. is within the range of 0.7 to 1.5. That is, the storage modulus of the first resin layer and the storage modulus of the second resin layer are approximately the same, so that the flexibility of the laminate can be further improved.
  • the storage modulus of the resin layer at 25°C can be adjusted by appropriately selecting the type and content of materials (resin, rubber particles, plasticizer, etc.). It can also be adjusted by the manufacturing conditions of the resin layer.
  • the storage modulus of the resin layer at 25° C. can be measured using a rheometer device “RSA-3” (manufactured by TA Instruments Japan, Inc.) under the following test conditions.
  • Test conditions dynamic viscoelasticity test
  • Testing machine Dynamic viscoelasticity measuring device "RSA-3” (manufactured by TA Instruments Japan, Inc.)
  • Deformation method tension Preload load: 55g Temperature range: -70 to 200°C Frequency: 1.0Hz Displacement: ⁇ 0.1% Sample: Width 5mm Chuck distance: 20 mm
  • the thickness of the resin layer is preferably in the range of 10 to 60 ⁇ m, more preferably in the range of 15 to 50 ⁇ m, and further preferably in the range of 20 to 40 ⁇ m.
  • the flexibility can be improved.
  • the glass transition temperature of the resin layer is preferably within the range of -30 to 180°C. If multiple glass transition temperatures are observed when measuring the glass transition temperature of the resin layer, the lowest glass transition temperature observed shall be regarded as the glass transition temperature of the resin layer.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) can be measured in accordance with JIS K 7121 (2012) using a DSC (Differential Scanning Colorimetry) device.
  • Adhesive Layer The laminate of the present invention has an adhesive layer, which allows the layers to be bonded together to form a laminate.
  • the "adhesive layer” refers to a layer having sufficient adhesiveness to attach the laminate to a display device or to bond the layers in the laminate together.
  • the adhesive layer is preferably made of an adhesive.
  • the adhesive that is preferably used will be described below.
  • the first adhesive layer and the second and third adhesive layers that are provided as necessary may be made of the same material and have the same physical properties, or may be made of different materials and have different physical properties.
  • the adhesive layer may be in the form of a film that can be rolled up, or in the form of a coating layer.
  • a coating layer is formed by applying an adhesive onto an adjacent layer and then curing the applied layer.
  • the adhesive is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include rubber-based adhesives, acrylic-based adhesives, silicone-based adhesives, urethane-based adhesives, vinyl alkyl ether-based adhesives, polyvinyl alcohol-based adhesives, polyvinylpyrrolidone-based adhesives, polyacrylamide-based adhesives, and cellulose-based adhesives.
  • acrylic-based adhesives are preferred.
  • Acrylic-based adhesives are excellent in transparency and adhesive properties (adhesion, cohesion, and adhesion). They are also excellent in weather resistance, heat resistance, and the like.
  • the "acrylic adhesive” refers to an adhesive containing an acrylic resin as a main component.
  • the adhesive layer made of an acrylic adhesive is preferably a layer formed by, for example, ultraviolet curing (ultraviolet polymerization) of an ultraviolet-curable acrylic adhesive. Note that, by ultraviolet curing (ultraviolet polymerization) of an ultraviolet-curable acrylic adhesive, a (meth)acrylic resin is generated.
  • the "ultraviolet-curable acrylic adhesive” preferably contains a monomer component containing alkyl (meth)acrylate or a partial polymer of the monomer component, a photopolymerization initiator, etc.
  • the ultraviolet-curable acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive contains, as its main component, a (meth)acrylic resin obtained by ultraviolet curing (ultraviolet polymerization) an acrylate-containing monomer component or a partial polymer of the monomer component.
  • a (meth)acrylic resin obtained by ultraviolet curing (ultraviolet polymerization) an acrylate-containing monomer component or a partial polymer of the monomer component.
  • the alkyl (meth)acrylate contained in the monomer component and other monomers that may be contained will be described below.
  • the other monomers that may be contained are preferably monofunctional monomers, but may also be polyfunctional monomers.
  • alkyl (meth)acrylate refers to acrylic and methacrylic, and is a general term for both.
  • alkyl (meth)acrylate refers to alkyl acrylate and alkyl methacrylate, and is a general term for both.
  • the alkyl (meth)acrylate in the adhesive layer is preferably an alkyl (meth)acrylate having a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms at the ester terminal. These may be contained alone or in combination of two or more.
  • alkyl (meth)acrylate examples include alkyl (meth)acrylates having a branched alkyl group having 4 to 9 carbon atoms.
  • alkyl (meth)acrylate examples include n-butyl (meth)acrylate, sec-butyl (meth)acrylate, tert-butyl (meth)acrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, n-pentyl (meth)acrylate, isopentyl (meth)acrylate, isohexyl (meth)acrylate, isoheptyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, isooctyl (meth)acrylate, and isononyl (meth)acrylate. These may be contained alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of alkyl (meth)acrylate having an alkyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms at the ester end is preferably 40% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, and even more preferably 60% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the monomer component.
  • Examples of monofunctional copolymerization monomers (monofunctional monomers) other than alkyl (meth)acrylates include cyclic nitrogen-containing monomers.
  • the cyclic nitrogen-containing monomer is not particularly limited as long as it has a polymerizable functional group having an unsaturated double bond, such as a (meth)acryloyl group or a vinyl group, and has a cyclic nitrogen structure.
  • the cyclic nitrogen structure is preferably one having a nitrogen atom in the cyclic structure.
  • Examples of the cyclic nitrogen-containing monomer include lactam-based vinyl monomers such as N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-vinyl- ⁇ -caprolactam, and methylvinylpyrrolidone, and vinyl-based monomers having a nitrogen-containing heterocycle such as vinylpyridine, vinylpiperidone, vinylpyrimidine, vinylpiperazine, vinylpyrazine, vinylpyrrole, vinylimidazole, vinyloxazole, and vinylmorpholine. Also included are (meth)acrylic monomers containing a heterocycle such as a morpholine ring, a piperidine ring, a pyrrolidine ring, and a piperazine ring. Specific examples include N-acryloylmorpholine, N-acryloylpiperidine, N-methacryloylpiperidine, and N-acryloylpyrrolidine. Among these, lactam vinyl monomers are preferred.
  • the content of the cyclic nitrogen-containing monomer is preferably 0.5 to 50 mass%, more preferably 0.5 to 40 mass%, and even more preferably 0.5 to 30 mass%, based on the total mass of the monomer components.
  • a monofunctional monomer is a hydroxyl group-containing monomer.
  • the hydroxyl group-containing monomer has a polymerizable functional group with an unsaturated double bond, such as a (meth)acryloyl group or a vinyl group, and also has a hydroxyl group.
  • hydroxy group-containing monomer examples include hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 6-hydroxyhexyl (meth)acrylate, 8-hydroxyoctyl (meth)acrylate, 10-hydroxydecyl (meth)acrylate, and 12-hydroxylauryl (meth)acrylate; and hydroxyalkyl cycloalkane (meth)acrylates such as (4-hydroxymethylcyclohexyl)methyl (meth)acrylate.
  • hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 6-hydroxy
  • hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylamide examples include hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylamide, allyl alcohol, 2-hydroxyethyl vinyl ether, 4-hydroxybutyl vinyl ether, and diethylene glycol monovinyl ether.
  • hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates are preferred. These may be contained alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer is preferably within the range of 1 to 30% by mass, more preferably within the range of 2 to 27% by mass, and even more preferably within the range of 3 to 25% by mass, based on the total mass of the monomer components.
  • monofunctional monomers include carboxyl group-containing monomers and monomers having a cyclic ether group.
  • carboxyl group-containing monomer there are no particular limitations on the carboxyl group-containing monomer, so long as it has a polymerizable functional group with an unsaturated double bond, such as a (meth)acryloyl group or a vinyl group, and also has a carboxyl group.
  • carboxy group-containing monomer examples include (meth)acrylic acid, carboxyethyl (meth)acrylate, carboxypentyl (meth)acrylate, itaconic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, etc.
  • itaconic acid or maleic acid may be an anhydride thereof.
  • the carboxy group-containing monomer is preferably acrylic acid or methacrylic acid, and more preferably acrylic acid. These may be contained alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the monomer having a cyclic ether group is not particularly limited as long as it has a polymerizable functional group having an unsaturated double bond, such as a (meth)acryloyl group or a vinyl group, and also has a cyclic ether group, such as an epoxy group or an oxetane group.
  • Examples of epoxy group-containing monomers include glycidyl (meth)acrylate, 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate glycidyl ether, etc.
  • Examples of oxetane group-containing monomers include 3-oxetanylmethyl (meth)acrylate, 3-methyl-oxetanylmethyl (meth)acrylate, 3-ethyl-oxetanylmethyl (meth)acrylate, 3-butyl-oxetanylmethyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hexyl-oxetanylmethyl (meth)acrylate, etc. These may be contained alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the carboxyl group-containing monomer or the monomer having a cyclic ether group is preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 27% by mass or less, and even more preferably 25% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the monomer components.
  • monofunctional monomers include, for example, alkyl(meth)acrylates represented by CH 2 ⁇ C(R 1 )COOR 2 , where R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and R 2 represents a substituted alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, or a cyclic cycloalkyl group.
  • alkyl (meth)acrylate represented by CH 2 ⁇ C(R 1 )COOR 2 examples include phenoxyethyl (meth)acrylate, benzyl (meth)acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, 3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, and isobornyl (meth)acrylate. These may be contained alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the alkyl (meth)acrylate represented by the above CH 2 ⁇ C(R 1 )COOR 2 is preferably 50 mass% or less, more preferably 45 mass% or less, and even more preferably 40 mass% or less, based on the total mass of the monomer component.
  • monofunctional monomers include, for example, vinyl acetate, vinyl propionate, styrene, ⁇ -methylstyrene; glycol-based acrylic acid ester monomers such as polyethylene glycol (meth)acrylate, polypropylene glycol (meth)acrylate, methoxyethylene glycol (meth)acrylate, and methoxypolypropylene glycol (meth)acrylate; acrylic acid ester monomers such as tetrahydrofurfuryl (meth)acrylate, fluorine (meth)acrylate, silicone (meth)acrylate, and 2-methoxyethyl acrylate; amide group-containing monomers, amino group-containing monomers, imide group-containing monomers, N-acryloylmorpholine, and vinyl ether monomers. Also included are monomers having a cyclic structure such as terpene (meth)acrylate and dicyclopentanyl (meth)acrylate.
  • silane-based monomers containing a silicon atom examples include 3-acryloxypropyltriethoxysilane, vinyltrimethoxysilane, vinyltriethoxysilane, 4-vinylbutyltrimethoxysilane, 4-vinylbutyltriethoxysilane, 8-vinyloctyltrimethoxysilane, 8-vinyloctyltriethoxysilane, 10-methacryloyloxydecyltrimethoxysilane, 10-acryloyloxydecyltrimethoxysilane, 10-methacryloyloxydecyltriethoxysilane, and 10-acryloyloxydecyltriethoxysilane.
  • monomers may contain polyfunctional monomers as necessary in order to adjust the cohesive strength of the adhesive layer.
  • the polyfunctional monomer is not particularly limited as long as it is a monomer having at least two polymerizable functional groups having an unsaturated double bond, such as a (meth)acryloyl group or a vinyl group.
  • polyfunctional monomers include ester compounds of polyhydric alcohols and (meth)acrylic acid such as (poly)ethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, (poly)propylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, neopentyl glycol di(meth)acrylate, pentaerythritol di(meth)acrylate, pentaerythritol tri(meth)acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate, 1,2-ethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol di(meth)acrylate, 1,12-dodecanediol di(meth)acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate, and tetramethylolmethane tri(meth)acrylate; allyl (meth)acrylate, vinyl (meth)acrylate, divinylbenzene, epoxy acrylate, polyester acrylate, urethane tri(
  • trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate hexanediol di(meth)acrylate, or dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate is preferred. These may be contained alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the polyfunctional monomer varies depending on the molecular weight, the number of functional groups, etc., but is preferably 3 mass% or less, more preferably 2 mass% or less, and even more preferably 1 mass% or less, relative to the total mass of the monofunctional monomer.
  • the content of the polyfunctional monomer is preferably 0.001 mass% or more.
  • the monomer component may contain a partial polymer of the above monomer component.
  • the ultraviolet-curable acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive according to the present invention preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator. By including a photopolymerization initiator, the monomer components can be polymerized sufficiently.
  • the photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it generates radicals by ultraviolet light and initiates photopolymerization, and any commonly used photopolymerization initiator can be suitably used. Examples include benzoin ether-based photopolymerization initiators, acetophenone-based photopolymerization initiators, ⁇ -ketol-based photopolymerization initiators, photoactive oxime-based photopolymerization initiators, benzoin-based photopolymerization initiators, benzyl-based photopolymerization initiators, benzophenone-based photopolymerization initiators, ketal-based photopolymerization initiators, thioxanthone-based photopolymerization initiators, and acylphosphine oxide-based photopolymerization initiators.
  • bis(2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl)-phenylphosphine oxide examples include, for example, “Omnirad (registered trademark) 819" (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.)), 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl-diphenyl-phosphine oxide (commercially available products include, for example, "Omnirad (registered trademark) TPO H” (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.)), and the like. These may be contained alone or in combination of two or more.
  • the content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably within the range of 0.005 to 0.5% by mass, and more preferably within the range of 0.02 to 0.1% by mass, based on the total mass of the monomer components. By being within the above range, ultraviolet curing (ultraviolet polymerization) can proceed sufficiently.
  • the ultraviolet-curable acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive according to the present invention may further contain a silane coupling agent, a crosslinking agent, and the like.
  • Silane coupling agents include, for example, epoxy group-containing silane coupling agents such as 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropyltriethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldiethoxysilane, and 2-(3,4-epoxycyclohexyl)ethyltrimethoxysilane; amino group-containing silane coupling agents such as 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, N-2-(aminoethyl)-3-aminopropylmethyldimethoxysilane, 3-triethoxysilyl-N-(1,3-dimethylbutylidene)propylamine, and N-phenyl- ⁇ -aminopropyltrimethoxysilane; (meth)acrylic group-containing silane coupling agents such as 3-acryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane and 3-methacryloxypropyltriethoxysilane; and isocyan
  • the content of the silane coupling agent is preferably 1% by mass or less, more preferably in the range of 0.01 to 1% by mass, and even more preferably in the range of 0.02 to 0.6% by mass, based on the total mass of the monomer components.
  • crosslinking agent examples include isocyanate-based crosslinking agents, epoxy-based crosslinking agents, silicone-based crosslinking agents, oxazoline-based crosslinking agents, aziridine-based crosslinking agents, silane-based crosslinking agents, alkyl etherified melamine-based crosslinking agents, metal chelate-based crosslinking agents, peroxides, etc.
  • isocyanate-based crosslinking agents are preferred. These may be contained alone or in combination of two or more.
  • An isocyanate-based crosslinking agent is a compound that has two or more isocyanate groups (including isocyanate regenerating functional groups in which the isocyanate group is temporarily protected by a blocking agent or by polymerization, etc.) in one molecule.
  • isocyanate-based crosslinking agents include aromatic isocyanates such as tolylene diisocyanate and xylylene diisocyanate; alicyclic isocyanates such as isophorone diisocyanate; and aliphatic isocyanates such as hexamethylene diisocyanate.
  • the content of the crosslinking agent is preferably 5% by mass or less, more preferably in the range of 0.01 to 5% by mass, even more preferably in the range of 0.01 to 4% by mass, and particularly preferably in the range of 0.02 to 3% by mass, based on the total mass of the monomer components.
  • the UV-curable acrylic adhesive may contain other additives as appropriate depending on the application.
  • additives include tackifiers; fillers such as hollow glass balloons; plasticizers; anti-aging agents; and antioxidants.
  • tackifiers refer to substances that are solid, semi-solid, or liquid at room temperature, such as rosin derivative resins, terpene resins, petroleum resins, and oil-soluble phenolic resins.
  • the viscosity of the UV-curable acrylic adhesive is preferable to adjust the viscosity of the UV-curable acrylic adhesive to a level suitable for application.
  • the viscosity can be adjusted, for example, by adding various resins such as thickening additives, polyfunctional monomers, etc., or by partially polymerizing the monomer components in the UV-curable acrylic adhesive.
  • the partial polymerization may be carried out before or after adding various polymers such as thickening additives, polyfunctional monomers, etc.
  • the viscosity of the ultraviolet-curable acrylic adhesive varies depending on the content of additives, etc. Therefore, the polymerization rate when the monomer components in the ultraviolet-curable acrylic adhesive are partially polymerized cannot be uniquely determined.
  • the polymerization rate is preferably 20% or less, more preferably within the range of 3 to 20%, and even more preferably within the range of 5 to 15%.
  • the viscosity can be adjusted to a level suitable for application work.
  • the adhesive layer can be produced by applying an ultraviolet-curable acrylic adhesive onto an adjacent layer, irradiating it with ultraviolet light, and ultraviolet curing (ultraviolet polymerization).
  • an ultraviolet-curable acrylic adhesive may be applied onto a substrate, and then irradiated with ultraviolet light to effect ultraviolet curing (ultraviolet polymerization), thereby producing a film-like adhesive layer.
  • the substrate is not particularly limited, and examples include release films, transparent resin films, etc.
  • release films include release resin films such as polyethylene, polypropylene, polyethylene terephthalate, and polyester films; porous materials such as paper, cloth, and nonwoven fabric; and thin materials such as nets, foam sheets, metal foils, and laminates of these.
  • resin films are preferred from the viewpoint of excellent surface smoothness.
  • release resin films include polyethylene film, polypropylene film, polybutene film, polybutadiene film, polymethylpentene film, polyvinyl chloride film, vinyl chloride copolymer film, polyethylene terephthalate film, polybutylene terephthalate film, polyurethane film, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer film, etc.
  • the thickness of the release film is preferably within the range of 5 to 200 ⁇ m, and more preferably within the range of 5 to 100 ⁇ m.
  • the release film is preferably subjected to a release treatment using a silicone-based, fluorine-based, long-chain alkyl-based or fatty acid amide-based release agent. It is also preferable to perform an anti-soiling treatment using silica powder or the like. In addition, anti-static treatments such as coating, kneading or deposition may be performed. In particular, release treatment using a silicone-based, fluorine-based or long-chain alkyl-based release agent makes it easier to peel off the film-like adhesive layer.
  • the transparent resin film is not particularly limited, but is preferably transparent and composed of a single layer film.
  • transparent resin films include polyesters such as polyethylene terephthalate and polyethylene naphthalate, acetate resins, polyethersulfone, polycarbonate, polyamide, polyimide, polyolefin, (meth)acrylic resins, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinylidene chloride, polystyrene, polyvinyl alcohol, polyarylate, and polyphenylene sulfide.
  • polyester, polyimide, or polyethersulfone is preferable.
  • the thickness of the transparent resin film is preferably within the range of 2 to 200 ⁇ m, and more preferably within the range of 20 to 188 ⁇ m.
  • the method for applying the UV-curable acrylic adhesive is not particularly limited, and any conventionally known method can be used.
  • application methods include roll coating, kiss roll coating, gravure coating, reverse coating, roll brushing, spray coating, dip roll coating, bar coating, knife coating, air knife coating, curtain coating, lip coating, and die coater methods.
  • the illuminance of the ultraviolet light irradiated to the ultraviolet-curable acrylic adhesive is preferably within the range of 5 to 200 mW/ cm2 .
  • the illuminance of the ultraviolet light is preferably within the range of 5 to 200 mW/ cm2 .
  • the polymerization reaction time can be shortened, resulting in excellent productivity.
  • the photopolymerization initiator can be prevented from being rapidly consumed.
  • the polymerization proceeds sufficiently, and a high molecular weight polymer ((meth)acrylic resin) can be obtained. This allows the adhesive layer to have excellent holding power, especially at high temperatures.
  • the integrated amount of ultraviolet light is preferably within the range of 100 to 5000 mJ/ cm2 .
  • the ultraviolet lamp used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but is preferably an LED lamp.
  • the LED lamp emits less heat than other ultraviolet lamps, so that the temperature rise during the ultraviolet curing of the ultraviolet curing acrylic adhesive can be suppressed. This allows a polymer with a high molecular weight to be obtained, and an adhesive layer with sufficient cohesive strength can be obtained, thereby increasing the holding power at high temperatures when the adhesive sheet is made.
  • the ultraviolet lamp may be a combination of a plurality of ultraviolet lamps.
  • ultraviolet light may be intermittently irradiated, and a light period during which ultraviolet light is irradiated and a dark period during which ultraviolet light is not irradiated may be provided.
  • the final polymerization rate of the monomer components in the UV-curable acrylic adhesive is preferably 90% or more, more preferably 95% or more, and even more preferably 98% or more.
  • the peak wavelength of the ultraviolet light irradiated onto the ultraviolet-curing acrylic adhesive is preferably within the range of 200 to 500 nm, and more preferably within the range of 300 to 450 nm.
  • the peak wavelength of the ultraviolet light is 500 nm or less, the photopolymerization initiator decomposes and the polymerization reaction begins.
  • the peak wavelength of the ultraviolet light is 200 nm or more, the scission of the polymer chain can be suppressed, and sufficient adhesion can be obtained.
  • Methods for blocking oxygen include creating a release film on the coating layer of the UV-curable acrylic adhesive, and carrying out the polymerization reaction in a nitrogen atmosphere.
  • release films include the release films mentioned above.
  • the thickness of the adhesive layer is preferably within the range of 2 to 60 ⁇ m, more preferably within the range of 2 to 20 ⁇ m, and even more preferably within the range of 5 to 15 ⁇ m.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin material (e.g., (meth)acrylic resin) used in the adhesive layer is preferably within the range of 100,000 to 5,000,000, and more preferably within the range of 200,000 to 1,000,000, from the viewpoint of controlling the storage modulus.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin material used in the adhesive layer is preferably smaller than the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin material used in the optical film. This allows the effects of the present invention to be obtained more efficiently.
  • the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin material can be measured using a gel permeation chromatography "HLC8220GPC” (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) and columns “TSK-GEL G6000", “HXL-G5000”, “HXL-G5000”, “HXL-G4000”, and “HXL-G3000HXL” (all manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, in series). 20 mg ⁇ 0.5 mg of a sample is dissolved in 10 mL of tetrahydrofuran and filtered through a 0.45 mm filter. 100 mL of this solution is then injected into a column (temperature 40° C.) and measured with an RI detector at a temperature of 40° C., and the value is expressed in terms of styrene.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the adhesive layer is preferably 0°C or lower, more preferably -10°C or lower, and even more preferably -20°C or lower, from the viewpoint of achieving both impact resistance in a low-temperature environment and contrast after bending.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) can be measured in accordance with JIS K 7121 (2012) using a DSC (Differential Scanning Colorimetry) device.
  • the second adhesive layer may have a bezel.
  • zel refers to an area that has an extremely low transmittance of visible light and is formed in a frame shape around the periphery of a display device.
  • a bezel By having a bezel, it is possible to house devices for controlling transistors, etc., and ICs for accumulating information. It also protects the display device and improves its strength. On the other hand, by making the bezel thinner, it is possible to make the display device smaller and lighter. It is also possible to make the area in which an image is displayed larger.
  • the bezel is preferably disposed within the second adhesive layer and in contact with the second resin layer or the glass layer.
  • the bezel does not necessarily have to be disposed within the second adhesive layer, and may be disposed within the first adhesive layer or between other layers of the laminate.
  • the bezel is a colored light-shielding film that contains a dye or pigment.
  • a dye or pigment there are no particular limitations on the method of forming the bezel, but it is preferable that it is formed, for example, by a coating method. It is preferable that the bezel is formed in a frame shape on a flat surface.
  • the laminate of the present invention is attached to a thin glass film, and then attached to a display device.
  • the glass layer according to the present invention is preferably a thin film glass from the viewpoint of excellent durability, flatness, etc.
  • materials for thin film glass include lithium aluminosilicate glass, soda-lime glass, borosilicate glass, silica glass, alkali metal aluminosilicate glass, and aluminosilicate glass with a low alkali content.
  • the thin film glass is preferably an alkali-free glass that contains substantially no alkali components.
  • the content of alkali components is preferably 1000 ppm by mass or less, more preferably 500 ppm by mass or less, and even more preferably 300 ppm by mass or less, relative to the total mass of the thin film glass.
  • the thickness of the thin film glass is preferably within a range of 10 to 50 ⁇ m.
  • the thickness of the thin film glass 10 ⁇ m or more, sufficient impact resistance of the laminate can be obtained.
  • the thickness of the thin film glass 50 ⁇ m or less sufficient flexibility of the laminate can be obtained.
  • the thinner the thin film glass is, the thinner the laminate can be, and the thinner the display device can be. From the viewpoint of achieving both impact resistance and flexibility, the thickness of the thin glass is more preferably within the range of 10 to 40 ⁇ m, and further preferably within the range of 10 to 30 ⁇ m.
  • Thin glass can be produced by commonly known methods, such as the float method, down-draw method, overflow down-draw method, etc.
  • the overflow down-draw method or float method is preferred because the surface of the thin glass does not come into contact with the forming member during production, and the surface of the obtained thin glass is less likely to be scratched.
  • the float method is preferred from the viewpoint of obtaining a thin glass having a thickness in the range of 10 to 50 ⁇ m.
  • the thinner the glass the weaker it is and the more susceptible it is to breakage, making it difficult to handle and process thin-film glass on its own.
  • a thicker support substrate carrier substrate
  • peeling off the support substrate as a post-processing step
  • FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a method for producing thin-film glass.
  • Step 1 in step 1, a thin film glass 22 is prepared so that a first surface of the thin film glass is in contact with a carrier substrate 21 having a bonding surface. Then, a contact film 23 having adhesive force is pressure-bonded to a second surface opposite to the first surface.
  • the thin-film glass material is poured to the desired thickness onto a carrier substrate 21 that has sufficient strength and a thickness that is easy to process. This creates a first surface of the thin-film glass 22 that is in contact with the carrier substrate 21. Then, a contact film 23 is pressed onto a second surface on the opposite side to the first surface.
  • Step 2 As shown in FIG. 4, in step 2, the thin glass 22 is peeled off from the carrier substrate 21 by the contact film 23 having high adhesive strength.
  • Step 3 in step 3, a weakening treatment (electromagnetic radiation irradiation 24) is performed to weaken the adhesive strength of the contact film, thereby removing the contact film 23 from the second surface of the thin glass 22.
  • a weakening treatment electromagnettic radiation irradiation 24
  • the contact film 23 is used to safely hold the thin-film glass 22, thereby protecting the thin-film glass 22.
  • the exposed surface of the thin-film glass 22 can be protected from, for example, mechanical damage, and can be handled safely and easily.
  • Examples of materials for the contact film include polyolefins (PO) such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET) and polyethylene (PE).
  • PO polyolefins
  • PET polyethylene terephthalate
  • PE polyethylene
  • the contact film is typically adhered to the thin glass by an adhesive layer made of an adhesive provided on one side of the substrate.
  • the contact film may also be adhered directly to the thin glass by the adhesive properties of the contact film itself.
  • the adhesion strength between the contact film and the second surface of the thin film glass is appropriately selected so that the peeling device transmits sufficient force to peel the thin film glass from the carrier substrate.
  • the contact film is preferably in the form of a foil or tape. By forming it into a foil or tape, it can be wound into a roll.
  • the thickness of the contact film is preferably 50 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 80 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 125 ⁇ m or more, and particularly preferably 150 ⁇ m or more.
  • the thin glass is preferably fabricated on a carrier substrate by the aforementioned downdraw method, overflow downdraw method, or float method.
  • the thickness of the carrier substrate is preferably 100 ⁇ m or more, more preferably 300 ⁇ m or more, and even more preferably 500 ⁇ m or more. Furthermore, the width of the carrier substrate is preferably 3 inches or more (1 inch is 2.54 cm), more preferably 6 inches or more, even more preferably 8 inches or more, and particularly preferably 12 inches or more.
  • the carrier substrate is preferably equal to or larger than the first generation glass substrate size, for example, second to eighth generation sizes. Alternatively, it may be even larger, for example, 1x1m to 3x3m.
  • the carrier substrate may be of various shapes, such as rectangular, elliptical, circular, etc.
  • the thin glass film, together with the contact film, is peeled off from the carrier substrate by the adhesive force of the contact film.
  • the contact film is then peeled off, leaving a single thin glass film.
  • the adhesive strength of the contact film Before peeling the contact film from the thin glass, it is preferable to weaken the adhesive strength of the contact film by subjecting it to a treatment to weaken its adhesive strength. Specifically, it is preferable to reduce the adhesive strength to 0.5 N/25 mm or less.
  • electromagnetic radiation such as infrared, ultraviolet, or visible light
  • the electromagnetic radiation may be narrowband or may cover a wider band depending on the adhesive material used. It may also be laser radiation.
  • Some commercially available adhesive materials can be at least partially deactivated by exposure to electromagnetic radiation and can be used as contact films.
  • heat treatment may be used as a weakening treatment.
  • the electromagnetic radiation is preferably applied from the outer surface of the contact film, i.e., the side to which the thin glass is not adhered.
  • An example of a contact film is "NDS4150-20" (manufactured by Dao Ming Optical Co., Ltd.).
  • a corresponding weakening treatment is exposure to ultraviolet light with a wavelength of 365 nm.
  • the method for producing the laminate of the present invention is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a method in which a cured layer, a resin layer, and an adhesive layer are disposed in this order.
  • the thickness of the laminate of the present invention is preferably within a range of 100 to 300 ⁇ m, and more preferably within a range of 100 to 200 ⁇ m, from the viewpoint of achieving both impact resistance and flexibility.
  • the display device of the present invention is characterized by comprising the laminate described above.
  • the laminate preferably has a glass layer.
  • the first resin layer is disposed closer to the viewing side of the display device than the second resin layer.
  • the display device of the present invention can be obtained by attaching the laminate to the surface of the display device described below.
  • the laminate preferably has a glass layer.
  • the display device of the present invention may also have a polarizing plate between the laminate and the display device described below.
  • the laminate can suppress external light reflection, that is, since the laminate has some of the function of a polarizing plate, it does not necessarily have to have a polarizing plate.
  • a “display device” refers to a device having a display mechanism, and has a light-emitting element or a light-emitting device as a light source.
  • a device having a display mechanism is also called a "display member.”
  • Examples of the display device include a liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence (EL) display device, an inorganic electroluminescence (EL) display device, a touch panel display device, an electron emission display device (such as a field emission display device (FED) and a surface field emission display device (SED)), an electronic paper (a display device using electronic ink or an electrophoretic element), a plasma display device, a projection type display device (such as a grating light valve (GLV) display device and a display device having a digital micromirror device (DMD)), a piezoelectric ceramic display, and the like.
  • Examples of the liquid crystal display device include a transmissive liquid crystal display device, a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display device, a reflective liquid crystal display device, a direct-view liquid crystal display device, and a projection liquid crystal display device.
  • These display devices may be display devices that display two-dimensional images, or may be stereoscopic display devices that display three-dimensional images.
  • an organic EL display device or a touch panel display device is preferable, and an organic EL display device is more preferable.
  • the display device of the present invention is equipped with the above-mentioned laminate (cover member), thereby achieving both light resistance and impact resistance.
  • FIG. 5 shows an example of application to an organic EL display, which is an example of a display device.
  • the display device 100 has an organic EL layer 9 on the surface of the glass layer 6 opposite to the second adhesive layer 7.
  • a third adhesive layer 8 may be provided between the glass layer 6 and the organic EL layer 9.
  • the third adhesive layer may be made of the same material and have the same physical properties as the first adhesive layer and the second adhesive layer, or may be made of a different material and have different physical properties.
  • an organic EL display is composed of an organic EL layer consisting of an electrode/electron transport layer/light-emitting layer/hole transport layer/transparent electrode, and a polarizing plate equipped with a retardation plate (lambda/4 plate) to improve image quality.
  • a polarizing plate equipped with a retardation plate (lambda/4 plate) to improve image quality.
  • the laminate of the present invention has some of the functions of a polarizing plate, it does not necessarily have to have a polarizing plate.
  • the display device of the present invention may also be a foldable display.
  • a foldable display is preferably a single continuous display that can be folded in half when carried, reducing its size by half and improving portability. It is also preferable that the foldable display is thin and lightweight.
  • the laminate of the present invention has good impact resistance and is unlikely to leave creases even when folded repeatedly.
  • the contrast can be maintained even after repeated folding. Therefore, in a foldable display, the visibility after repeated folding is excellent, specifically, the suppression of image distortion at the folded portion.
  • the laminate of the present invention since the laminate of the present invention has good light resistance, the quality can be maintained for a long period of time even when applied to a mobile device used outdoors.
  • a cured layer was prepared on the resin layer to prepare a two-layer film.
  • a two-layer film in which a first cured layer was prepared on a first resin layer and a two-layer film in which a second cured layer was prepared on a second resin layer were prepared, respectively.
  • the two two-layer films were laminated together via an adhesive layer to prepare a laminate.
  • the layers were laminated together so that they were arranged in the order of the first cured layer, the first resin layer, the first adhesive layer, the second cured layer, and the second resin layer.
  • the content of silicon dioxide was 0.1% by mass based on the total mass of the acetyl cellulose.
  • the acetyl cellulose was prepared by a known method using triacetyl cellulose (TAC) with a degree of substitution of 3.0.
  • the residual solvent content was 20% when drying began.
  • the film was then dried for 15 minutes while being transported by multiple rolls through a drying device at 120°C, after which knurling was applied to both ends of the film to a width of 15 mm and a height of 10 ⁇ m.
  • the film was wound around a core to obtain resin layer 1.
  • the residual solvent content of resin layer 1 was 0.2%, the thickness was 40 ⁇ m, and the number of windings was 6,000 m.
  • Resin layers 2, 4, 6 to 13, and 15 to 18 were prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of Resin Layer 1, except that the type of resin, the type and content of the dye compound, and the thickness were changed as shown in Tables I and II.
  • Resin layer 3 was prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of resin layer 1 above, except that metal oxide particles were added so that the storage modulus was 6.7 GPa.
  • a resin layer 5 was prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of the resin layer 1, except that the amount of ethanol added in the dope 1 was changed from 7.04 parts by mass to 1.65 parts by mass, and the type of resin was changed.
  • thermoplastic (meth)acrylic resin a MMA (methyl methacrylate)/PMI (phenylmaleimide)/MA (methyl acrylate) copolymer (85/10/5 mass ratio, Mw: 2 million, Tg: 122° C.) was prepared.
  • solution I The following components were charged into an 8 L polymerization apparatus equipped with a stirrer to prepare solution I.
  • Deionized water 180.000 parts by weight Polyoxyethylene lauryl ether phosphate 0.002 parts by weight Boric acid 0.473 parts by weight Sodium carbonate 0.047 parts by weight Sodium hydroxide 0.008 parts by weight
  • a monomer mixture (c') consisting of the following components was prepared.
  • Methyl methacrylate (methyl methacrylate) 84.6% by mass
  • n-Butyl acrylate (n-butyl acrylate) 5.9% by mass
  • Styrene 7.9% by mass
  • Allyl methacrylate (allyl methacrylate) 0.5% by mass n-Octyl mercaptan 1.1% by mass
  • the following ingredients were then added: Potassium persulfate (added as a 2% by weight aqueous solution) 0.012 parts by weight
  • the polymerization reaction was continued for 120 minutes to obtain a soft layer (a layer made of acrylic rubber-like polymer (a)).
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the soft layer calculated by averaging the glass transition temperatures of the homopolymers of the monomers constituting the acrylic rubber-like polymer (a) according to the composition ratio, was -30°C.
  • a monomer mixture (b') consisting of the following components was prepared.
  • Methyl methacrylate (methyl methacrylate) 97.5% by mass
  • n-Butyl acrylate (n-butyl acrylate) 2.5% by mass
  • the obtained methacrylic polymer (b) was poured into a 3% by mass aqueous solution of sodium sulfate to cause salting out and coagulation. Then, after repeated dehydration and washing, the mixture was dried to obtain acrylic graft copolymer particles (rubber particles) R1 having a three-layer structure.
  • the average particle size of the obtained rubber particles R1 was measured by a zeta potential/particle size measuring system "ELSZ-2000ZS" (manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.) and found to be 200 nm.
  • the glass transition temperature (Tg) of the rubber particles was -30°C.
  • a PET film "TN100" manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd., thickness 50 ⁇ m, with a release layer containing a non-silicone release agent
  • the above dope was applied onto the release layer of this PET film using a die by a backcoat method, and then dried at 80° C. in an atmosphere with a solvent concentration of 0.18% by volume. Then, the substrate was peeled off to obtain a resin layer 14 with a thickness of 40 ⁇ m.
  • Resin layer 19 was prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of resin layer 14, except that no dye compound was added and the thickness was changed to 50 ⁇ m.
  • TAC triacetyl cellulose DAC: diacetyl cellulose COP: cycloolefin resin "ARTON G7810" (manufactured by JSR Corporation)
  • CPI a polymer (polyimide) having a structural unit derived from 4,4'-(hexafluoroisopropylidene)diphthalic anhydride and a structural unit derived from 2,2'-bis(trifluoromethyl)benzidine, Mw: 150,000, Tg: 350°C
  • Acrylic MMA (methyl methacrylate)/PMI (phenylmaleimide)/MA (methyl acrylate) copolymer (85/10/5 mass ratio, Mw: 2 million, Tg: 122° C.)
  • PET Polyethylene terephthalate "E5000" (manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd.)
  • the above polymer silane coupling agent-coated silica was prepared as follows. The following components were added to a container, and the atmosphere was replaced with N2 gas, and then the container was heated at 80°C for 3 hours to prepare a polymer silane coupling agent. The molecular weight of the obtained polymer silane coupling agent was 16000. The molecular weight was measured using a gel permeation chromatography device.
  • Methyl methacrylate "Light Ester M” (Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.) 30mL 3-Mercaptopropyltrimethoxysilane "KBM-803" (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.) 1 mL Solvent: tetrahydrofuran 100 mL Polymerization initiator: azoisobutyronitrile "AIBN” (manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.) 50mg
  • silica fine particle ethanol dispersion 100 g of this silica fine particle ethanol dispersion and 1.5 g of the above polymer silane coupling agent were dispersed in 20 g (25 mL) of acetone. 20 mg of ammonia water with a concentration of 29.8% by mass was added to this dispersion. The mixture was then stirred at room temperature for 30 hours to allow the polymer silane coupling agent to be adsorbed onto the silica fine particles.
  • silica particles with an average particle size of 5 ⁇ m were added and stirred for 2 hours to allow the unadsorbed polymer silane coupling agent in the solution to be adsorbed onto the silica particles.
  • the silica particles with an average particle size of 5 ⁇ m that had adsorbed the unadsorbed polymer silane coupling agent were removed by centrifugation. 1000 g of ethanol was added to the dispersion of silica particles with the adsorbed polymer silane coupling agent to allow the silica particles to settle.
  • the silica particles were separated, dried under reduced pressure, and dried at 25°C for 8 hours to obtain silica coated with a polymer silane coupling agent.
  • the average particle size of the obtained polymer silane coupling agent-coated silica was 57 nm. The average particle size was measured using a laser particle size measuring device.
  • Adhesive Layer 1 3.1.1
  • UV-Curable Acrylic Adhesive Composition (a-1) A monomer mixture consisting of the following components was prepared. 2-Ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA) 78.000 parts by weight N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone (NVP) 18.000 parts by weight 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate (HEA) 4.000 parts by weight
  • an ultraviolet-curable acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (a-1). 2,4-bis-[ ⁇ 4-(4-ethylhexyloxy)-4-hydroxy ⁇ -phenyl]-6-(4-methoxyphenyl)-1,3,5-triazine (dissolved in n-butyl acrylate to give a solids concentration of 15% by mass and added) 1.400 parts by mass Bis(2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl)-phenylphosphine oxide 0.200 parts by mass The following commercially available products were used.
  • Step 1 A thin film glass was prepared so that a first surface of the thin film glass was in contact with a carrier substrate having a bonding surface. Then, a contact film having adhesive force was attached to a second surface of the thin film glass opposite to the first surface. (Step 2) The thin glass was then peeled off from the carrier substrate by the highly adhesive contact film. (Step 3) The contact film was removed from the second surface of the thin glass peeled off from the carrier substrate by a weakening treatment (electromagnetic radiation exposure) that weakened the adhesive strength of the contact film.
  • a weakening treatment electromagagnetic radiation exposure
  • step 1 a thin glass film was prepared so as to be in contact with a carrier substrate having a thickness of 500 ⁇ m and to have a predetermined thickness, and then a contact film was attached to the thin glass film.
  • step 2 the thin glass film together with the contact film was peeled off from the carrier substrate in 30 seconds.
  • the contact film used was a commercially available product, "NDS4150-20.”
  • NDS4150-20 is a 150 ⁇ m thick film containing polyolefin (PO), and further has a 10 ⁇ m thick adhesive layer.
  • step 3 the exposed contact film was subjected to a weakening treatment to reduce the adhesive strength.
  • a weakening treatment ultraviolet light with a wavelength of 365 nm was irradiated onto the contact film for 10 seconds.
  • the illuminance of the ultraviolet light was 500 mW/ cm2
  • the cumulative amount of light was 500 mJ/ cm2 .
  • the adhesive strength before the weakening treatment was 11 N/25 mm, but after the weakening treatment, the adhesive strength was reduced to 0.4 N/25 mm. This allowed the contact film to be easily peeled off from the thin glass, and a glass layer with a thickness of 30 ⁇ m was obtained.
  • the structures of the resulting laminates are shown in Tables I to III below.
  • “-” indicates that the corresponding layer is not present or that the corresponding component is not contained.
  • the “wavelength” in the table indicates the maximum absorption wavelength in the ultraviolet-visible light absorption spectrum of the dye compound in the wavelength region of 300 to 460 nm.
  • “content” indicates the content of the dye compound relative to the total mass of the resin. Note that, for the resin layer 14, the total mass of the thermoplastic (meth)acrylic resin and the rubber particles was taken as the total mass of the resin.
  • Table IV shows the measurement results of the physical properties of the first resin layer and the second resin layer in each laminate.
  • Average light transmittance from 450 to 800 nm indicates the arithmetic mean value of the light transmittance in the wavelength region from 450 to 800 nm.
  • Elastic modulus 2/Elastic modulus 1 represents a value expressed by "storage modulus 2 of the second resin layer/storage modulus 1 of the first resin layer", i.e., the ratio of the storage modulus at 25°C of the second resin layer to that of the first resin layer.
  • AAA 1.5 or less. AA: greater than 1.5 and equal to or less than 1.6. A: More than 1.6 and 1.7 or less. B: More than 1.7 and 1.8 or less. C: greater than 1.8.
  • Pen drop test Impact resistance
  • An organic EL layer was laminated on the glass layer of each laminate obtained above, and the first cured layer was arranged to be the uppermost part, to obtain a display device.
  • an organic EL layer was laminated on the second resin layer, and the first cured layer was arranged to be the uppermost part, to obtain a display device.
  • a ballpoint pen with a pen tip radius (R) of 0.35 mm and a weight (m) of 12 g was dropped on the surface of the first cured layer of each display device while changing the drop height.
  • a black image was displayed on each display device after the pen drop test.
  • CM-2600d manufactured by Konica Minolta, Inc.
  • AAA to A it is practical.
  • AAA 1.5 or less. AA: greater than 1.5 and equal to or less than 1.6. A: More than 1.6 and 1.7 or less. B: More than 1.7 and 1.8 or less. C: greater than 1.8.
  • Examples 8 and 9 show that light resistance and impact resistance can be achieved together when the glass layer thickness is in the range of 10 to 30 ⁇ m.

Landscapes

  • Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
  • Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
  • Optics & Photonics (AREA)
  • Mechanical Engineering (AREA)
  • Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
  • Laminated Bodies (AREA)

Abstract

The present invention addresses the problem of providing a laminate and a display device which each have both light resistance and impact resistance. A laminate according to the present invention comprises resin layers, cured layers, and an adhesive layer, said laminate being characterized in that: a first cured layer, a first resin layer, a first adhesive layer, a second cured layer, and a second resin layer are laminated in this order; the first resin layer contains a dye compound that has a maximum absorption wavelength in the range of 360-379 nm in an ultraviolet visible light absorption spectrum of a wavelength region of 300-460 nm; the average light transmittance of the first resin layer in the wavelength region of 450-800 nm is not less than 87%; the storage modulus of the first resin layer is in the range of 4.0-8.0 GPa at 25°C; and the value of the ratio of the storage modulus of the second resin layer to the storage modulus of the first resin layer is in the range of 0.7-1.5 at 25°C.

Description

積層体及び表示装置Laminate and display device

 本発明は、積層体及び表示装置に関する。より詳しくは、耐光性と耐衝撃性を両立させた積層体及び表示装置に関する。 The present invention relates to a laminate and a display device. More specifically, the present invention relates to a laminate and a display device that combines light resistance and impact resistance.

 昨今、折り畳みや巻き取りが可能なフレキシブルディスプレイの開発が活発に行われている。フレキシブルディスプレイは、表示部材と、表示部材の保護を目的としたカバー部材から構成される。 Recently, there has been active development of flexible displays that can be folded or rolled up. Flexible displays consist of a display component and a cover component that protects the display component.

 フレキシブルディスプレイでは、カバー部材に用いられる基材に、柔軟性が求められる。そのため、従来使用されてきたガラス基材から樹脂基材へ変更したり、ガラス基材自体を薄膜化したりすることが検討されている。中でも、高級感があり、折癖が付きにくい(耐久性)観点から、基材は、薄膜ガラス(Ultra Thin Glass:「UTG」)が主流となってきている。
 ただし、薄膜ガラスは、衝撃に弱く割れやすいため、カバー部材に用いる際は、薄膜ガラスに保護フィルムを貼り合わせて、耐衝撃性を向上させる技術が知られている。
In flexible displays, the substrate used for the cover member is required to have flexibility. Therefore, it has been considered to change the conventionally used glass substrate to a resin substrate or to make the glass substrate itself thinner. Among them, thin-film glass (Ultra Thin Glass: UTG) has become mainstream as a substrate from the viewpoint of luxury and resistance to folding (durability).
However, since thin film glass is vulnerable to impact and easily breaks, a technique is known in which a protective film is attached to the thin film glass to improve impact resistance when used as a cover member.

 特許文献1では、カバー部材の耐衝撃性を向上させる技術として、保護フィルム上に硬化層が積層された積層体をカバー部材として用いる技術が開示されている。しかし、耐衝撃性への要求は高まる一方であり、改良の余地があった。 Patent Document 1 discloses a technology for improving the impact resistance of a cover member, in which a laminate in which a cured layer is laminated on a protective film is used as the cover member. However, the demand for impact resistance continues to increase, leaving room for improvement.

 耐衝撃性を向上させる目的で、カバー部材としての積層体の厚さを厚くする技術もある。しかし、積層体の厚さを厚くすると、積層体の屈曲性が低下するという問題があり、当該技術では、積層体の耐衝撃性と屈曲性との両立が難しい。また、当該技術では、フレキシブルディスプレイの薄膜化に対して逆行してしまう。 There is also technology to increase the thickness of the laminate used as a cover member in order to improve impact resistance. However, there is a problem in that increasing the thickness of the laminate reduces the flexibility of the laminate, and with this technology it is difficult to achieve both impact resistance and flexibility of the laminate. Furthermore, this technology goes against the trend toward thinner flexible displays.

 一方、フレキシブルディスプレイの多くは、モバイルデバイスとして使用されるため、屋外での使用耐性、中でも耐光性が求められる。 On the other hand, since many flexible displays are used in mobile devices, they need to be durable enough for outdoor use, especially light resistance.

 特許文献2では、表示装置の耐光性及び耐衝撃性を両立させる技術として、カバー部材に、特定の組成の(メタ)アクリル系ポリマー及び紫外線吸収剤を含有する粘着剤層を用いる技術が開示されている。 Patent Document 2 discloses a technology for achieving both light resistance and impact resistance in a display device, in which a cover member is made of an adhesive layer containing a (meth)acrylic polymer of a specific composition and an ultraviolet absorber.

 また、特許文献3では、表示装置の耐光性を向上させる技術として、カバー部材に、紫外線及び可視光の短波長領域の遮蔽性に優れた高透明な光学フィルムを用いる技術が開示されている。しかし、耐衝撃性への要求は高まる一方であり、耐光性と耐衝撃性の両立については、改良の余地があった。 Patent Document 3 also discloses a technology for improving the light resistance of display devices, in which a highly transparent optical film with excellent blocking properties for ultraviolet light and the short wavelength region of visible light is used as a cover member. However, the demand for impact resistance continues to increase, and there is room for improvement in achieving both light resistance and impact resistance.

韓国公開特許第10-2020-0072643号公報Korean Patent Publication No. 10-2020-0072643 特開2020-139108号公報JP 2020-139108 A 特開2017-187619号公報JP 2017-187619 A

 本発明は、上記問題・状況に鑑みてなされたものであり、その解決課題は、耐光性と耐衝撃性を両立させた積層体及び表示装置を提供することである。 The present invention was made in consideration of the above problems and circumstances, and the problem to be solved is to provide a laminate and a display device that combine light resistance and impact resistance.

 本発明者は、上記課題を解決すべく、上記問題の原因等について検討した結果、樹脂層、硬化層及び粘着層を有する積層体において、樹脂層が紫外線吸収能を有する色素化合物を含有し、樹脂層の可視光領域における光透過率が、それぞれ特定の範囲内であり、かつ樹脂層の貯蔵弾性率が特定の範囲内であることにより、耐光性と耐衝撃性を両立できることを見出し本発明に至った。
 すなわち、本発明に係る上記課題は、以下の手段により解決される。
In order to solve the above-mentioned problems, the present inventors have investigated the causes of the above-mentioned problems, and as a result, have discovered that in a laminate having a resin layer, a cured layer, and an adhesive layer, when the resin layer contains a dye compound having ultraviolet absorbing ability, and the light transmittance in the visible light region of the resin layer is each within a specific range, and the storage modulus of the resin layer is also within a specific range, both of which can achieve both light resistance and impact resistance, thereby arriving at the present invention.
That is, the above-mentioned problems of the present invention are solved by the following means.

 1.樹脂層、硬化層及び粘着層を有する積層体であって、
 第1硬化層、第1樹脂層、第1粘着層、第2硬化層、第2樹脂層の順で積層され、
 前記第1樹脂層が、300~460nmの波長領域の紫外可視光吸収スペクトルにおいて最大吸収波長が360~379nmの範囲内に存在する色素化合物を含有し、
 前記第1樹脂層の450~800nmの波長領域における平均光透過率が、87%以上であり、
 前記第1樹脂層の25℃における貯蔵弾性率が、4.0~8.0GPaの範囲内であり、
 前記第2樹脂層の前記第1樹脂層に対する25℃における貯蔵弾性率の比の値が、0.7~1.5の範囲内である
 ことを特徴とする積層体。
1. A laminate having a resin layer, a cured layer, and an adhesive layer,
A first cured layer, a first resin layer, a first adhesive layer, a second cured layer, and a second resin layer are laminated in this order,
the first resin layer contains a dye compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the range of 360 to 379 nm in an ultraviolet-visible light absorption spectrum in a wavelength region of 300 to 460 nm,
The first resin layer has an average light transmittance of 87% or more in a wavelength range of 450 to 800 nm;
The storage modulus of the first resin layer at 25° C. is within a range of 4.0 to 8.0 GPa,
a ratio of a storage modulus at 25° C. of the second resin layer to that of the first resin layer is within a range of 0.7 to 1.5.

 2.前記第1樹脂層が、セルロースエステルを含有する
 ことを特徴とする第1項に記載の積層体。
2. The laminate according to item 1, wherein the first resin layer contains a cellulose ester.

 3.前記色素化合物が、下記一般式(1)で表される構造を有する
 ことを特徴とする第1項に記載の積層体。
3. The laminate according to item 1, wherein the dye compound has a structure represented by the following general formula (1):

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000003

 (式中、R11は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、ヒドロキシ基、アミノ基、アルキル置換アミノ基、カルボキシ基、アルキルオキシカルボニル基、ヒドロキシアルキル基、アルキルカルボニルオキシアルキル基、カルボキシアルキル基、アルキルオキシカルボニルアルキル基、アリール基、アシル基、又はスルホ基を表す。R12は、水素原子又はヒドロキシ基を表す。) (In the formula, R 11 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a hydroxy group, an amino group, an alkyl-substituted amino group, a carboxy group, an alkyloxycarbonyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkylcarbonyloxyalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group, an alkyloxycarbonylalkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group, or a sulfo group. R 12 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydroxy group.)

 4.前記色素化合物が、下記一般式(2)で表される構造を有する
 ことを特徴とする第1項に記載の積層体。
4. The laminate according to item 1, wherein the dye compound has a structure represented by the following general formula (2):

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000004

 (式中、R21は、水素原子又はヒドロキシ基を表す。R22、R23、及びR24は、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アルキル置換アミノ基、カルボキシ基、アルキルオキシカルボニル基、ヒドロキシアルキル基、アルキルカルボニルオキシアルキル基、カルボキシアルキル基、アルキルオキシカルボニルアルキル基、アリール基、アシル基、又はスルホ基を表す。) (In the formula, R 21 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydroxy group. R 22 , R 23 , and R 24 represent an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkyl-substituted amino group, a carboxy group, an alkyloxycarbonyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkylcarbonyloxyalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group, an alkyloxycarbonylalkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group, or a sulfo group.)

 5.前記第1樹脂層の厚さが、15~50μmの範囲内である
 ことを特徴とする第1項に記載の積層体。
5. The laminate according to item 1, wherein the first resin layer has a thickness in the range of 15 to 50 μm.

 6.前記第2樹脂層の25℃における貯蔵弾性率が、4.0~8.0GPaの範囲内である
 ことを特徴とする第1項に記載の積層体。
6. The laminate according to item 1, wherein the second resin layer has a storage modulus at 25° C. in the range of 4.0 to 8.0 GPa.

 7.ガラス層を更に有し、
 前記第1硬化層、前記第1樹脂層、前記第1粘着層、前記第2硬化層、前記第2樹脂層、前記ガラス層の順で積層される
 ことを特徴とする第1項から第6項までのいずれか一項に記載の積層体。
7. Further comprising a glass layer,
7. The laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the first cured layer, the first resin layer, the first adhesive layer, the second cured layer, the second resin layer, and the glass layer are laminated in this order.

 8.第2粘着層を更に有し、
 前記第1硬化層、前記第1樹脂層、前記第1粘着層、前記第2硬化層、前記第2樹脂層、前記第2粘着層、前記ガラス層の順で積層される
 ことを特徴とする第7項に記載の積層体。
8. Further comprising a second adhesive layer;
The laminate described in claim 7, characterized in that the first cured layer, the first resin layer, the first adhesive layer, the second cured layer, the second resin layer, the second adhesive layer, and the glass layer are laminated in this order.

 9.前記ガラス層の厚さが、10~30μmの範囲内である
 ことを特徴とする第7項に記載の積層体。
9. The laminate according to item 7, wherein the thickness of the glass layer is within a range of 10 to 30 μm.

 10.第3粘着層を更に有し、
 前記第1硬化層、前記第1樹脂層、前記第1粘着層、前記第2硬化層、前記第2樹脂層、前記第2粘着層、前記ガラス層、前記第3粘着層の順で積層される
 ことを特徴とする第8項に記載の積層体。
10. Further comprising a third adhesive layer;
The laminate described in item 8, characterized in that the first cured layer, the first resin layer, the first adhesive layer, the second cured layer, the second resin layer, the second adhesive layer, the glass layer, and the third adhesive layer are laminated in this order.

 11.第10項に記載の積層体を具備する
 ことを特徴とする表示装置。
11. A display device comprising the laminate according to claim 10.

 12.前記積層体の前記第1樹脂層が、前記第2樹脂層よりも当該表示装置の視認側に配置される
 ことを特徴とする第11項に記載の表示装置。
12. The display device according to item 11, wherein the first resin layer of the laminate is disposed closer to a viewing side of the display device than the second resin layer.

 本発明の上記手段により、耐光性と耐衝撃性を両立させた積層体及び表示装置を提供することができる。 The above-mentioned means of the present invention make it possible to provide a laminate and a display device that combine light resistance and impact resistance.

 本発明の効果の発現機構又は作用機構については、明確にはなっていないが、以下のように推察している。 The mechanism by which the effects of this invention are expressed or acted upon is not clear, but is speculated as follows.

 カバー部材に薄膜ガラスを用いる際、カバー部材は、薄膜ガラスを保護する部材を有することが好ましい。そして、前述のとおり、薄膜ガラスと薄膜ガラスを保護部材とを含むカバー部材を、表示装置へ取り付けた際、表示装置には、耐光性と耐衝撃性の両立が求められる。また、表示装置の薄膜化の要求が高まっている観点から、薄膜ガラスを保護する部材は、屈曲性を有し、かつ薄膜であることが求められる。 When thin film glass is used as the cover member, it is preferable that the cover member has a member that protects the thin film glass. As described above, when a cover member that includes thin film glass and a member that protects the thin film glass is attached to a display device, the display device is required to have both light resistance and impact resistance. In addition, in view of the increasing demand for thinner display devices, the member that protects the thin film glass is required to be flexible and thin.

 薄膜ガラスを保護する部材、すなわち、ガラス用保護フィルムとしての本発明の積層体は、第1硬化層、第1樹脂層、第1粘着層、第2硬化層、第2樹脂層の順で積層される。
 積層体が硬化層を有することにより、積層体を取り付けた際の表示装置の耐衝撃性を向上できる。また、硬化層を二層に分けることにより、積層体を取り付けた際の表示装置の耐衝撃性を維持しつつ、加えて屈曲性を向上できると考えられる。
The laminate of the present invention as a member for protecting thin glass, i.e., a glass protection film, is formed by laminating a first cured layer, a first resin layer, a first adhesive layer, a second cured layer, and a second resin layer in this order.
By having the hardened layer in the laminate, the impact resistance of the display device when the laminate is attached can be improved. Also, by dividing the hardened layer into two layers, it is considered that the impact resistance of the display device when the laminate is attached can be maintained while also improving the flexibility.

 さらに、積層体が樹脂層を有することにより、積層体を取り付けた際の表示装置の耐光性及び屈曲性を向上できると考えられる。 Furthermore, it is believed that the laminate having a resin layer can improve the light resistance and flexibility of the display device when the laminate is attached.

 具体的には、第1樹脂層が、300~460nmの波長領域の吸収スペクトルにおいて最大吸収波長が360~379nmの範囲内に存在する色素化合物を含有する。つまり、第1樹脂層に、紫外線を吸収する特性を付与する。これにより、表示装置を紫外線から保護でき、積層体を取り付けた際の表示装置の耐光性を向上できる。 Specifically, the first resin layer contains a dye compound whose maximum absorption wavelength is in the range of 360 to 379 nm in the absorption spectrum of the wavelength region of 300 to 460 nm. In other words, the first resin layer is endowed with the property of absorbing ultraviolet rays. This makes it possible to protect the display device from ultraviolet rays and improve the light resistance of the display device when the laminate is attached.

 第1樹脂層の450~800nmの波長領域における平均光透過率を、87%以上とする、つまり、第1樹脂層に、可視光を透過する特性を付与する。これにより、表示装置内の発光素子又は発光装置からの発光が、樹脂層に吸収されるのを抑制でき、視認される発光量を増加できる。すなわち、発光ロスを低減できる。 The average light transmittance of the first resin layer in the wavelength range of 450 to 800 nm is set to 87% or more, that is, the first resin layer is given the property of transmitting visible light. This makes it possible to prevent the light emitted from the light-emitting element or light-emitting device in the display device from being absorbed by the resin layer, and to increase the amount of visible light emission. In other words, it is possible to reduce light emission loss.

 また、第1樹脂層の貯蔵弾性率を特定の範囲内とすることにより、つまり、硬化層よりも柔らかい樹脂層を配置することにより、積層体の耐衝撃性を向上できる。また、第2樹脂層の第1樹脂層に対する貯蔵弾性率の比の値を特定の範囲内とする。すなわち、第1樹脂層の貯蔵弾性率と第2樹脂層の貯蔵弾性率を、同程度にする。これにより、積層体の屈曲性を更に向上できる。 Furthermore, by setting the storage modulus of the first resin layer within a specific range, that is, by arranging a resin layer that is softer than the cured layer, the impact resistance of the laminate can be improved. Furthermore, the ratio of the storage modulus of the second resin layer to the first resin layer is set within a specific range. In other words, the storage modulus of the first resin layer and the storage modulus of the second resin layer are set to be approximately the same. This can further improve the flexibility of the laminate.

 さらに、屈曲性の高い樹脂層を硬化層付近に配置する、つまり、第1硬化層付近に第1樹脂層を配置し、第2硬化層付近に第2樹脂層を配置する。これにより、各硬化層が樹脂層に追随して屈曲し、積層体全体としての屈曲性を向上できると考えられる。 Furthermore, a resin layer with high flexibility is placed near the cured layer, that is, the first resin layer is placed near the first cured layer, and the second resin layer is placed near the second cured layer. This allows each cured layer to bend following the resin layer, which is thought to improve the flexibility of the entire laminate.

積層体の基本的な層構成の断面図Cross-sectional view of the basic layer structure of a laminate ガラス層を有する積層体の基本的な層構成の断面図Cross-sectional view of a basic layer structure of a laminate having a glass layer ガラス層を有する積層体の基本的な層構成の断面図Cross-sectional view of a basic layer structure of a laminate having a glass layer 薄膜ガラスの作製方法の一例を示す模式図Schematic diagram showing an example of a method for producing thin glass 表示装置の一例である有機ELディスプレイへの適用例Application example to an organic EL display, which is an example of a display device

 本発明の積層体は、樹脂層、硬化層及び粘着層を有する積層体である。本発明の積層体は、第1硬化層、第1樹脂層、第1粘着層、第2硬化層、第2樹脂層の順で積層される。前記第1樹脂層が、300~460nmの波長領域の紫外可視光吸収スペクトルにおいて最大吸収波長が360~379nmの範囲内に存在する色素化合物を含有する。前記第1樹脂層の450~800nmの波長領域における平均光透過率が、87%以上である。前記第1樹脂層の25℃における貯蔵弾性率が、4.0~8.0GPaの範囲内である。前記第2樹脂層の前記第1樹脂層に対する25℃における貯蔵弾性率の比の値が、0.7~1.5の範囲内である。以上を特徴とする。
 この特徴は、下記実施態様に共通する又は対応する技術的特徴である。
The laminate of the present invention is a laminate having a resin layer, a cured layer, and an adhesive layer. The laminate of the present invention is laminated in the order of a first cured layer, a first resin layer, a first adhesive layer, a second cured layer, and a second resin layer. The first resin layer contains a dye compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in a range of 360 to 379 nm in an ultraviolet-visible light absorption spectrum of a wavelength region of 300 to 460 nm. The average light transmittance of the first resin layer in a wavelength region of 450 to 800 nm is 87% or more. The storage modulus of the first resin layer at 25° C. is in the range of 4.0 to 8.0 GPa. The ratio of the storage modulus of the second resin layer at 25° C. to that of the first resin layer is in the range of 0.7 to 1.5. The laminate is characterized by the above.
This feature is a technical feature common to or corresponding to the following embodiments.

 本発明の実施形態としては、添加剤を樹脂中に添加しやすく、樹脂層の光透過率及び貯蔵弾性率を所望の値に調整できる観点から、前記第1樹脂層が、セルロースエステルを含有することが好ましい。 In one embodiment of the present invention, the first resin layer preferably contains a cellulose ester, from the viewpoints of making it easy to add additives to the resin and adjusting the light transmittance and storage modulus of the resin layer to desired values.

 本発明の実施形態としては、樹脂層の光透過率を所望の値に調整できる観点から、前記色素化合物が、上記一般式(1)で表される構造を有することが好ましい。 In one embodiment of the present invention, from the viewpoint of being able to adjust the light transmittance of the resin layer to a desired value, it is preferable that the dye compound has a structure represented by the above general formula (1).

 本発明の実施形態としては、樹脂層の光透過率を所望の値に調整できる観点から、前記色素化合物が、上記一般式(2)で表される構造を有することが好ましい。 In an embodiment of the present invention, from the viewpoint of being able to adjust the light transmittance of the resin layer to a desired value, it is preferable that the dye compound has a structure represented by the above general formula (2).

 本発明の実施形態としては、樹脂層の光透過率及び貯蔵弾性率を所望の値に調整でき、かつ屈曲性が得られる観点から、前記第1樹脂層の厚さが、15~50μmの範囲内であることが好ましい。 In one embodiment of the present invention, the thickness of the first resin layer is preferably within the range of 15 to 50 μm, from the viewpoint of being able to adjust the light transmittance and storage modulus of the resin layer to desired values and obtaining flexibility.

 本発明の実施形態としては、耐衝撃性が得られる観点から、前記第2樹脂層の25℃における貯蔵弾性率が、4.0~8.0GPaの範囲内であることが好ましい。 In one embodiment of the present invention, from the viewpoint of obtaining impact resistance, it is preferable that the storage modulus of the second resin layer at 25°C is within the range of 4.0 to 8.0 GPa.

 本発明の実施形態としては、ガラス層を有するカバー部材とする観点から、ガラス層を更に有し、前記第1硬化層、前記第1樹脂層、前記第1粘着層、前記第2硬化層、前記第2樹脂層、前記ガラス層の順で積層されることが好ましい。 In an embodiment of the present invention, from the viewpoint of having a cover member with a glass layer, it is preferable that the cover member further has a glass layer, and is laminated in the following order: the first hardened layer, the first resin layer, the first adhesive layer, the second hardened layer, the second resin layer, and the glass layer.

 本発明の実施形態としては、ガラス層を貼り付ける観点から、第2粘着層を更に有し、前記第1硬化層、前記第1樹脂層、前記第1粘着層、前記第2硬化層、前記第2樹脂層、前記第2粘着層、前記ガラス層の順で積層されることが好ましい。 In an embodiment of the present invention, from the viewpoint of attaching a glass layer, it is preferable that the second adhesive layer is further included, and the first hardened layer, the first resin layer, the first adhesive layer, the second hardened layer, the second resin layer, the second adhesive layer, and the glass layer are laminated in this order.

 本発明の実施形態としては、カバー部材をより薄くする観点から、前記ガラス層の厚さが、10~30μmの範囲内であることが好ましい。 In one embodiment of the present invention, from the viewpoint of making the cover member thinner, it is preferable that the thickness of the glass layer is within the range of 10 to 30 μm.

 本発明の実施形態としては、表示装置に取り付ける観点から、第3粘着層を更に有し、前記第1硬化層、前記第1樹脂層、前記第1粘着層、前記第2硬化層、前記第2樹脂層、前記第2粘着層、前記ガラス層、前記第3粘着層の順で積層されることが好ましい。 In an embodiment of the present invention, from the viewpoint of attachment to a display device, it is preferable that the laminate further includes a third adhesive layer, and is laminated in the following order: the first hardened layer, the first resin layer, the first adhesive layer, the second hardened layer, the second resin layer, the second adhesive layer, the glass layer, and the third adhesive layer.

 本発明の表示装置は、前記積層体を具備することを特徴とする。 The display device of the present invention is characterized by comprising the laminate.

 本発明の実施形態としては、効果が顕著である観点から、前記積層体の前記第1樹脂層が、前記第2樹脂層よりも当該表示装置の視認側に配置されることが好ましい。 In an embodiment of the present invention, from the viewpoint of achieving a significant effect, it is preferable that the first resin layer of the laminate is disposed closer to the viewing side of the display device than the second resin layer.

 以下、本発明とその構成要素、及び本発明を実施するための形態や態様について詳細な説明をする。なお、本願において、「~」は、その前後に記載される数値を下限値及び上限値として含む意味で使用する。 The present invention, its components, and the forms and modes for implementing the present invention are described in detail below. Note that in this application, "~" is used to mean that the numerical values before and after it are included as the lower and upper limits.

 1.積層体の概要
 本発明の積層体は、樹脂層、硬化層及び粘着層を有する積層体である。本発明の積層体は、第1硬化層、第1樹脂層、第1粘着層、第2硬化層、第2樹脂層の順で積層される。前記第1樹脂層が、300~460nmの波長領域の紫外可視光吸収スペクトルにおいて最大吸収波長が360~379nmの範囲内に存在する色素化合物を含有する。前記第1樹脂層の450~800nmの波長領域における平均光透過率が、87%以上である。前記第1樹脂層の25℃における貯蔵弾性率が、4.0~8.0GPaの範囲内である。前記第2樹脂層の前記第1樹脂層に対する25℃における貯蔵弾性率の比の値が、0.7~1.5の範囲内である。以上を特徴とする。
1. Overview of the Laminate The laminate of the present invention is a laminate having a resin layer, a cured layer, and an adhesive layer. The laminate of the present invention is a laminate in which a first cured layer, a first resin layer, a first adhesive layer, a second cured layer, and a second resin layer are laminated in this order. The first resin layer contains a dye compound whose maximum absorption wavelength is present in a range of 360 to 379 nm in an ultraviolet-visible light absorption spectrum of a wavelength region of 300 to 460 nm. The first resin layer has an average light transmittance of 87% or more in a wavelength region of 450 to 800 nm. The first resin layer has a storage modulus at 25° C. in a range of 4.0 to 8.0 GPa. The ratio of the storage modulus at 25° C. of the second resin layer to that of the first resin layer is in a range of 0.7 to 1.5. The laminate is characterized by the above.

 本発明の積層体は、薄膜ガラスの保護部材(ガラス用保護フィルム)として用いられる。そして、薄膜ガラスに本発明の積層体を貼り合わせ、表示装置のカバー部材として用いられることが好ましい。積層体は、樹脂層、硬化層及び粘着層の他に、必要に応じて、その他の層を有していてもよい。 The laminate of the present invention is used as a protective member for thin-film glass (protective film for glass). It is preferable that the laminate of the present invention is attached to thin-film glass and used as a cover member for a display device. In addition to the resin layer, cured layer, and adhesive layer, the laminate may have other layers as necessary.

 図1は、積層体の基本的な層構成の断面図である。積層体10は、第1硬化層1、第1樹脂層2、第1粘着層3、第2硬化層4、第2樹脂層5の順で積層されている。第1硬化層1と第2硬化層4は、同じ材質や物性であっても、異なる材質や物性であってもよい。また、第1樹脂層2と第2樹脂層5は、貯蔵弾性率の条件を満たしていれば、同じ材質や物性であっても、異なる材質や物性であってもよい。 FIG. 1 is a cross-sectional view of the basic layer structure of a laminate. The laminate 10 is formed by laminating a first cured layer 1, a first resin layer 2, a first adhesive layer 3, a second cured layer 4, and a second resin layer 5 in this order. The first cured layer 1 and the second cured layer 4 may be of the same material and physical properties, or may be of different materials and physical properties. Furthermore, the first resin layer 2 and the second resin layer 5 may be of the same material and physical properties, or may be of different materials and physical properties, as long as they satisfy the storage modulus conditions.

 積層体10は、第1樹脂層2と第2硬化層4との間に、第1粘着層3を有する。必要に応じて、第1硬化層1と第1樹脂層2との間や、第2硬化層4と第2樹脂層5との間に、更に粘着層を有していてもよい。 The laminate 10 has a first adhesive layer 3 between the first resin layer 2 and the second cured layer 4. If necessary, an adhesive layer may be further provided between the first cured layer 1 and the first resin layer 2, or between the second cured layer 4 and the second resin layer 5.

 図2及び3は、ガラス層を有する積層体の基本的な層構成の断面図である。図2に示すように、積層体11は、第2樹脂層5における、第2硬化層4とは反対側の面に、ガラス層6を更に有していてもよい。また、図3に示すように、積層体12は、第2樹脂層5とガラス層6との間に、第2粘着層を有していてもよい。第2粘着層は、第1粘着層と、同じ材質や物性であっても、異なる材質や物性であってもよい。 Figures 2 and 3 are cross-sectional views of the basic layer structure of a laminate having a glass layer. As shown in Figure 2, the laminate 11 may further have a glass layer 6 on the side of the second resin layer 5 opposite the second cured layer 4. Also, as shown in Figure 3, the laminate 12 may have a second adhesive layer between the second resin layer 5 and the glass layer 6. The second adhesive layer may be of the same material and physical properties as the first adhesive layer, or may be of a different material and physical properties.

 貯蔵弾性率の観点では、第1樹脂層と第2樹脂層は、同程度の特性を有していることが好ましい。一方、光透過率の観点では、第1樹脂層と第2樹脂層は、必ずしも同程度の特性を有する必要はない。つまり、第2樹脂層の光透過率については、特に制限されない。 From the viewpoint of storage modulus, it is preferable that the first resin layer and the second resin layer have similar characteristics. On the other hand, from the viewpoint of light transmittance, the first resin layer and the second resin layer do not necessarily have to have similar characteristics. In other words, there are no particular restrictions on the light transmittance of the second resin layer.

 2.積層体の構成
 本発明の積層体は、硬化層、樹脂層及び粘着層を有する。また、更にガラス層を有してもよい。以下、硬化層、樹脂層、粘着層及びガラス層について説明する。
2. Structure of the Laminate The laminate of the present invention has a cured layer, a resin layer, and an adhesive layer. It may further have a glass layer. The cured layer, the resin layer, the adhesive layer, and the glass layer will be described below.

 (1)硬化層
 本発明の積層体は、硬化層を有することにより、積層体を取り付けた際の表示装置の耐衝撃性を向上できる。また、硬化層を二層に分けることにより、積層体を取り付けた際の表示装置の耐衝撃性を維持しつつも屈曲性を向上できると考えられる。
(1) Hardened layer The laminate of the present invention has a hardened layer, which can improve the impact resistance of a display device when the laminate is attached. In addition, by dividing the hardened layer into two layers, it is considered that the flexibility of the display device when the laminate is attached can be improved while maintaining the impact resistance.

 本発明において、「硬化層」とは、加熱又は活性エネルギー線の照射により、樹脂を硬化させて形成される層のことをいう。なお、硬化層は、JIS K5600-2014に規定される鉛筆硬度試験で、「HB」以上の硬度を示すことが好ましい。 In the present invention, the term "cured layer" refers to a layer formed by curing a resin by heating or irradiating it with active energy rays. It is preferable that the cured layer exhibits a hardness of "HB" or higher in the pencil hardness test specified in JIS K5600-2014.

 前述のとおり、第1硬化層と第2硬化層は、同じ材質や物性であっても、異なる材質や物性であってもよい。 As mentioned above, the first and second hardened layers may be made of the same material and have the same physical properties, or may be made of different materials and have different physical properties.

 耐擦傷性、鉛筆硬度などの機械的強度の観点から、硬化層の厚さは、0.01~20μmの範囲内であることが好ましく、0.5~10μmの範囲内であることがより好ましい。 From the standpoint of mechanical strength such as scratch resistance and pencil hardness, the thickness of the cured layer is preferably within the range of 0.01 to 20 μm, and more preferably within the range of 0.5 to 10 μm.

 硬化層は、後述する粘着層と同じ材料を用いてもよい。ただし、硬化層は、上記の硬度の条件を満たしており、粘着性を有してはいない。具体的には、積層体を表示装置に取り付ける、又は積層体における各層を貼り合わせるのに十分な程度の粘着性を、硬化層は有してはいない。 The cured layer may be made of the same material as the adhesive layer described below. However, the cured layer satisfies the above hardness conditions and does not have adhesive properties. Specifically, the cured layer does not have sufficient adhesive properties to attach the laminate to a display device or to bond the layers in the laminate together.

 (1.1)硬化層の構成材料
 以下、硬化層に含有される、樹脂及びその他の添加剤について説明する。
(1.1) Constituent Materials of the Cured Layer The resin and other additives contained in the cured layer will be described below.

 (1.1.1)樹脂
 加熱又は活性エネルギー線の照射により硬化する硬化性樹脂であれば、特に制限されない。中でも、室温かつ短時間で硬化する観点から、活性エネルギー線硬化性樹脂であることが好ましい。また、活性エネルギー線硬化性樹脂は、エチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する単量体を含む樹脂であることが好ましい。
(1.1.1) Resin There are no particular limitations on the resin, so long as it is a curable resin that is cured by heating or irradiation with active energy rays. Among them, active energy ray curable resins are preferred from the viewpoint of curing at room temperature in a short time. In addition, the active energy ray curable resin is preferably a resin containing a monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond.

 活性エネルギー線としては、例えば、紫外線や電子線が挙げられる。中でも、耐擦傷性、耐衝撃性、鉛筆硬度等の機械的強度の観点から、活性エネルギー線は紫外線であることが好ましい。 Examples of active energy rays include ultraviolet rays and electron beams. Among them, from the viewpoint of mechanical strength such as scratch resistance, impact resistance, and pencil hardness, it is preferable that the active energy rays be ultraviolet rays.

 活性エネルギー線硬化性樹脂としては、アクリル系材料であることが好ましい。
 アクリル系材料としては、多価アルコールの(メタ)アクリル酸エステルのような単官能又は多官能の(メタ)アクリレート化合物、ジイソシアネートと多価アルコール及び(メタ)アクリル酸のヒドロキシエステル等から合成されるような多官能のウレタン(メタ)アクリレート化合物が挙げられる。また、これらの他にも、アクリレート系の官能基を有するポリエーテル、ポリエステル、エポキシ樹脂、アルキッド樹脂、スピロアセタール樹脂、ポリブタジエン、ポリエン-ポリチオール系樹脂等が挙げられる。
The active energy ray curable resin is preferably an acrylic material.
Examples of acrylic materials include monofunctional or polyfunctional (meth)acrylate compounds such as (meth)acrylic acid esters of polyhydric alcohols, and polyfunctional urethane (meth)acrylate compounds synthesized from diisocyanates, polyhydric alcohols, and hydroxy esters of (meth)acrylic acid, etc. In addition to these, examples of the material include polyethers, polyesters, epoxy resins, alkyd resins, spiroacetal resins, polybutadienes, and polyene-polythiol resins having acrylate functional groups.

 これらの樹脂のうち、紫外線により硬化するものがより好ましい。例えば、紫外線硬化性アクリレート系樹脂、紫外線硬化性ウレタンアクリレート系樹脂、紫外線硬化性ポリエステルアクリレート、紫外線硬化性エポキシアクリレート系樹脂、紫外線硬化性ポリオールアクリレート、又は紫外線硬化性エポキシ樹脂等であることが好ましい。中でも、紫外線硬化性アクリレート系樹脂であることが好ましい。 Among these resins, those that are cured by ultraviolet light are more preferable. For example, ultraviolet-curable acrylate resins, ultraviolet-curable urethane acrylate resins, ultraviolet-curable polyester acrylates, ultraviolet-curable epoxy acrylate resins, ultraviolet-curable polyol acrylates, ultraviolet-curable epoxy resins, etc. are preferable. Among these, ultraviolet-curable acrylate resins are preferable.

 硬化層は、例えば、活性エネルギー線硬化性樹脂、重合開始剤及び溶媒を含有する硬化層形成用組成物を用いて形成される。硬化層形成用組成物に含有する溶媒は、樹脂層を溶解又は膨潤させる溶媒であることが好ましい。溶媒が樹脂層を溶解又は膨潤させることにより、硬化層形成用組成物が樹脂層の表面から内部に浸透し易くなり、樹脂層と硬化層との密着性を向上できる。 The cured layer is formed, for example, using a composition for forming a cured layer that contains an active energy ray-curable resin, a polymerization initiator, and a solvent. The solvent contained in the composition for forming a cured layer is preferably a solvent that dissolves or swells the resin layer. By dissolving or swelling the resin layer with the solvent, the composition for forming a cured layer can easily penetrate from the surface of the resin layer to the inside, improving the adhesion between the resin layer and the cured layer.

 (1.1.2)その他の添加剤
 硬度を高くする、硬化収縮を抑える、ブロッキングを防止する、屈折率を制御する、防眩性を付与する、硬化層表面の性質を制御する等の観点から、硬化層は、従来公知の微粒子、分散剤、帯電防止剤、シランカップリング剤、増粘剤、着色防止剤、着色剤(顔料又は染料)、消泡剤、難燃剤、接着付与剤、重合禁止剤、酸化防止剤、表面改質剤等を含有していてもよい。また、硬化層は、光増感剤を含有していてもよい。光増感剤としては、例えば、n-ブチルアミン、トリエチルアミン、ポリ-n-ブチルホソフィン等が挙げられる。
(1.1.2) Other Additives From the viewpoint of increasing hardness, suppressing curing shrinkage, preventing blocking, controlling the refractive index, imparting anti-glare properties, controlling the properties of the cured layer surface, etc., the cured layer may contain conventionally known fine particles, dispersants, antistatic agents, silane coupling agents, thickeners, coloring inhibitors, colorants (pigments or dyes), defoamers, flame retardants, adhesion promoters, polymerization inhibitors, antioxidants, surface modifiers, etc. In addition, the cured layer may contain a photosensitizer. Examples of photosensitizers include n-butylamine, triethylamine, and poly-n-butylphosphine.

 寸法変動の抑制の観点から、硬化層は微粒子を含有することが好ましい。微粒子の含有量は、活性エネルギー線硬化性樹脂の全質量に対して、100~400%の範囲内であることが好ましい。微粒子は、特に制限されないが、金属酸化物によって構成された微粒子であることが好ましい。以下、金属酸化物によって構成された微粒子を、「金属酸化物粒子」ともいう。 From the viewpoint of suppressing dimensional fluctuation, it is preferable that the cured layer contains fine particles. The content of the fine particles is preferably within the range of 100 to 400% based on the total mass of the active energy ray curable resin. Although there are no particular limitations, the fine particles are preferably fine particles composed of a metal oxide. Hereinafter, fine particles composed of a metal oxide are also referred to as "metal oxide particles".

 金属酸化物としては、シリカ、アルミナ、ジルコニア、酸化チタン、五酸化アンチモン等が挙げられる。中でも、金属酸化物粒子は、シリカで構成されていることが好ましい。シリカ微粒子は、内部に空洞が形成された中空粒子であってもよい。 Examples of metal oxides include silica, alumina, zirconia, titanium oxide, and antimony pentoxide. Of these, it is preferable that the metal oxide particles are composed of silica. The silica microparticles may be hollow particles with cavities formed inside.

 微粒子は、ポリマー型シランカップリング剤によって被覆されていることが好ましい。微粒子の表面をポリマー型シランカップリング剤で被覆することにより、硬化層形成用組成物中で微粒子を均一に分散させることができる。ポリマー型シランカップリング剤で被覆した微粒子の平均粒子径は、5~500nmの範囲内であることが好ましく、10~200nmの範囲内であることが好ましい。上記範囲内であることにより、硬化層の光学特性を高めることができる。 The fine particles are preferably coated with a polymeric silane coupling agent. By coating the surfaces of the fine particles with a polymeric silane coupling agent, the fine particles can be uniformly dispersed in the composition for forming the cured layer. The average particle size of the fine particles coated with the polymeric silane coupling agent is preferably within the range of 5 to 500 nm, and more preferably within the range of 10 to 200 nm. By being within the above range, the optical properties of the cured layer can be improved.

 ポリマー型シランカップリング剤は、重合性単量体とシランカップリング剤(反応性シラン化合物)とを反応することによって調製される。重合性単量体としては、エチレン性不飽和二重結合を有する単量体が挙げられ、中でも、(メタ)アクリル酸及びその誘導体から選ばれる単量体であることが好ましい。反応性シラン化合物としては、ケイ素原子に3個のアルコキシ基と1個の官能基が結合した加水分解性シラン化合物であることが好ましい。ケイ素原子に結合する官能基としては、(メタ)アクリロキシ基、エポキシ基(グリシド基)、ウレタン基、アミノ基、フルオロ基、メルカプト基等が挙げられる。 The polymeric silane coupling agent is prepared by reacting a polymerizable monomer with a silane coupling agent (reactive silane compound). The polymerizable monomer may be a monomer having an ethylenically unsaturated double bond, and among these, a monomer selected from (meth)acrylic acid and its derivatives is preferable. The reactive silane compound is preferably a hydrolyzable silane compound in which three alkoxy groups and one functional group are bonded to a silicon atom. Examples of functional groups bonded to silicon atoms include (meth)acryloxy groups, epoxy groups (glycidyl groups), urethane groups, amino groups, fluoro groups, and mercapto groups.

 ポリマー型シランカップリング剤は、例えば、特開平11-116240号公報に開示された重合性単量体と反応性シラン化合物との反応物の製法に準じて合成できる。ポリマー型シランカップリング剤の数平均分子量は、ポリスチレン換算で2,500~150,000の範囲内であることが好ましく、2,000~100,000の範囲内であることがより好ましい。 The polymeric silane coupling agent can be synthesized, for example, in accordance with the method for producing a reaction product of a polymerizable monomer and a reactive silane compound disclosed in JP-A-11-116240. The number average molecular weight of the polymeric silane coupling agent is preferably in the range of 2,500 to 150,000, and more preferably in the range of 2,000 to 100,000, calculated as polystyrene.

 微粒子の表面をポリマー型シランカップリング剤で被覆する方法について、シリカ微粒子を例に説明する。まず、シリカ微粒子とポリマー型シランカップリング剤とを有機溶媒に分散させた分散液を調製する。この分散液にアルカリを添加して、シリカ微粒子の表面にOH基を生成させる。該OH基に、ポリマー型シランカップリング剤を吸着させる。または、該OH基とポリマー型シランカップリング剤のOH基とを、脱水反応によって結合させる。最後に、ポリマー型シランカップリング剤が吸着又は結合したシリカ微粒子を、分散液から分離して乾燥する。これにより、ポリマー型シランカップリング剤で被覆したシリカ微粒子が得られる。 The method of coating the surface of fine particles with a polymeric silane coupling agent will be explained using silica fine particles as an example. First, a dispersion liquid is prepared by dispersing silica fine particles and a polymeric silane coupling agent in an organic solvent. An alkali is added to this dispersion liquid to generate OH groups on the surface of the silica fine particles. The polymeric silane coupling agent is adsorbed to the OH groups. Alternatively, the OH groups are bonded to the OH groups of the polymeric silane coupling agent by a dehydration reaction. Finally, the silica fine particles to which the polymeric silane coupling agent is adsorbed or bonded are separated from the dispersion liquid and dried. This results in silica fine particles coated with the polymeric silane coupling agent.

 (1.2)硬化層の作製方法
 硬化層形成用組成物の調製方法としては、硬化層が含有する固形成分を、溶媒に均一に混合できる方法であれば、特に制限されない。例えば、ペイントシェーカー、ビーズミル、ニーダー、ミキサー等の公知の装置を用いて、上記各固形成分と溶媒を混合又は溶解して、硬化層形成用組成物を調製できる。
(1.2) Method for Producing Cured Layer The method for preparing the composition for forming the cured layer is not particularly limited as long as it is a method that can uniformly mix the solid components contained in the cured layer with the solvent. For example, the composition for forming the cured layer can be prepared by mixing or dissolving each of the solid components and the solvent using a known device such as a paint shaker, a bead mill, a kneader, or a mixer.

 硬化層は、例えば、硬化層形成用組成物を樹脂層の表面に塗布し、塗膜中の活性エネルギー線硬化性樹脂を硬化することで形成できる。硬化層形成用組成物の塗布方法は、特に制限されず、従来公知の方法を適用できる。 The cured layer can be formed, for example, by applying a composition for forming a cured layer to the surface of a resin layer and curing the active energy ray-curable resin in the coating. There are no particular limitations on the method for applying the composition for forming a cured layer, and any conventionally known method can be used.

 塗布方法は、例えば、均一な薄膜層を形成する観点では、マイクログラビアコーティング法であることが好ましい。また、厚膜層を形成する観点では、ダイコーティング法であることが好ましい。必要に応じて塗膜から溶媒を除去した後、塗膜に活性エネルギー線を照射し、活性エネルギー線硬化性樹脂を硬化することで、硬化層が得られる。 The coating method is preferably, for example, a microgravure coating method from the viewpoint of forming a uniform thin layer. Also, from the viewpoint of forming a thick layer, a die coating method is preferable. After removing the solvent from the coating film as necessary, the coating film is irradiated with active energy rays to cure the active energy ray curable resin, thereby obtaining a cured layer.

 硬化層は、必ずしも樹脂層の表面に直接形成する必要はない。硬化層を支持体上に形成し、硬化層を支持体から剥離した後、粘着層を介して、樹脂層と硬化層を貼り合わせてもよい。 The cured layer does not necessarily have to be formed directly on the surface of the resin layer. The cured layer may be formed on a support, and after peeling the cured layer from the support, the resin layer and the cured layer may be bonded together via an adhesive layer.

 (2)樹脂層
 本発明に係る第1樹脂層は、300~460nmの波長領域の紫外可視光吸収スペクトルにおいて最大吸収波長が360~379nmの範囲内に存在する色素化合物を含有する。本発明に係る第1樹脂層の450~800nmの波長領域(可視光領域)における平均光透過率は、87%以上である。また、本発明に係る第1樹脂層は、25℃における貯蔵弾性率が、4.0~8.0GPaの範囲内である。さらに、本発明に係る第2樹脂層の第1樹脂層に対する、25℃における貯蔵弾性率の比の値が、0.7~1.5の範囲内である。
(2) Resin Layer The first resin layer according to the present invention contains a dye compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the range of 360 to 379 nm in the ultraviolet-visible light absorption spectrum in the wavelength region of 300 to 460 nm. The average light transmittance of the first resin layer according to the present invention in the wavelength region of 450 to 800 nm (visible light region) is 87% or more. The first resin layer according to the present invention also has a storage modulus at 25° C. in the range of 4.0 to 8.0 GPa. Furthermore, the ratio of the storage modulus at 25° C. of the second resin layer according to the present invention to that of the first resin layer is in the range of 0.7 to 1.5.

 本発明の積層体は、樹脂層を有することにより、積層体を取り付けた際の表示装置の耐光性及び屈曲性を向上できると考えられる。また、第1硬化層付近に第1樹脂層を配置し、第2硬化層付近に第2樹脂層を配置する。これにより、各硬化層が樹脂層に追随して屈曲し、積層体全体としての屈曲性を向上できると考えられる。 The laminate of the present invention has a resin layer, which is believed to improve the light resistance and flexibility of the display device when the laminate is attached. In addition, the first resin layer is disposed near the first cured layer, and the second resin layer is disposed near the second cured layer. This allows each cured layer to bend following the resin layer, which is believed to improve the flexibility of the laminate as a whole.

 本発明において、「樹脂層」とは、樹脂を主成分として含有する層であり、かつ上記硬化層及び後述する粘着層に該当しない層のことをいう。
 第1樹脂層と第2樹脂層は、光透過率及び貯蔵弾性率の条件を満たしていれば、同じ材質や物性であっても、異なる材質や物性であってもよい。
In the present invention, the "resin layer" refers to a layer that contains a resin as a main component and does not correspond to the above-mentioned cured layer or the adhesive layer described below.
The first resin layer and the second resin layer may be made of the same material and have the same physical properties, or may be made of different materials and have different physical properties, so long as they satisfy the conditions of light transmittance and storage modulus.

 樹脂層の光透過率は、樹脂層に色素等を含有させることにより調整できる。樹脂層の貯蔵弾性率は、樹脂層に、可塑剤、粒子(ゴム粒子、金属酸化物粒子等)、繊維(針状粒子、セルロースナノファイバー等)等を含有させることにより調整できる。可塑剤、粒子及び繊維は、従来公知のものを使用できる。また、樹脂層の貯蔵弾性率は、樹脂層の作製条件によっても調整できる。 The light transmittance of the resin layer can be adjusted by incorporating dyes or the like into the resin layer. The storage modulus of the resin layer can be adjusted by incorporating plasticizers, particles (rubber particles, metal oxide particles, etc.), fibers (acicular particles, cellulose nanofibers, etc.) into the resin layer. Conventional plasticizers, particles, and fibers can be used. The storage modulus of the resin layer can also be adjusted by the production conditions of the resin layer.

 (2.1)樹脂層の構成材料
 以下、樹脂層に含有される、成膜成分としての樹脂、色素化合物、可塑剤、ゴム粒子、紫外線吸収剤、酸化防止剤、微粒子、及びその他添加剤について説明する。
(2.1) Constituent Materials of Resin Layer Hereinafter, the film-forming components contained in the resin layer, such as the resin, dye compound, plasticizer, rubber particles, UV absorber, antioxidant, fine particles, and other additives, will be described.

 (2.1.1)樹脂
 樹脂層に含有される成膜成分としての樹脂は、熱可塑性樹脂材料であることが好ましく、製膜後フィルムとして扱えるものであれば、制限されない。例えば、熱可塑性樹脂としては、トリアセチルセルロース(TAC)、セルロースアセテートプロピオネート(CAP)、ジアセチルセルロース(DAC)などのセルロースエステル;ポリメチルメタクリレート(PMMA)、スチレン-(メタ)アクリレート共重合体などの(メタ)アクリル系樹脂;シクロオレフィン系樹脂(COP)などの環状オレフィン系樹脂;ポリエチレンテレフターレート(PET)などのポリエステル等が挙げられる。
(2.1.1) Resin The resin contained in the resin layer as a film-forming component is preferably a thermoplastic resin material, and is not limited as long as it can be handled as a film after film formation. For example, examples of thermoplastic resins include cellulose esters such as triacetyl cellulose (TAC), cellulose acetate propionate (CAP), and diacetyl cellulose (DAC); (meth)acrylic resins such as polymethyl methacrylate (PMMA) and styrene-(meth)acrylate copolymers; cyclic olefin resins such as cycloolefin resins (COP); and polyesters such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET).

 中でも、樹脂は、分子間においてネットワークが形成されやすく、樹脂層に剛直性を付与できる観点から、セルロースエステルであることが好ましい。また、セルロースエステルでは、色素、可塑剤、粒子、繊維等を添加できる。 Among them, the resin is preferably a cellulose ester, since it is easy for a network to form between molecules and it can impart rigidity to the resin layer. In addition, pigments, plasticizers, particles, fibers, etc. can be added to the cellulose ester.

 (2.1.1.1)セルロースエステル
 セルロースは、β-グルコースが、β-1,4-グリコシド結合により直鎖状につながった高分子である。そして、セルロースエステルは、1グルコース単位中の2位、3位及び6位のヒドロキシ基(-OH)のうち一部又は全部の水素原子が、アシル基で置換されたセルロースである。
(2.1.1.1) Cellulose ester Cellulose is a polymer in which β-glucose units are linked in a linear chain via β-1,4-glycosidic bonds. Cellulose ester is cellulose in which some or all of the hydrogen atoms in the hydroxyl groups (-OH) at the 2-, 3-, and 6-positions in one glucose unit are substituted with acyl groups.

 セルロースエステルは、特に制限されないが、炭素数2~22程度の直鎖又は分岐のカルボン酸のエステルであることが好ましい。
 エステルを構成するカルボン酸としては、脂肪族カルボン酸、脂環式カルボン酸、芳香族カルボン酸が挙げられる。
The cellulose ester is not particularly limited, but is preferably an ester of a linear or branched carboxylic acid having about 2 to 22 carbon atoms.
Examples of the carboxylic acid constituting the ester include an aliphatic carboxylic acid, an alicyclic carboxylic acid, and an aromatic carboxylic acid.

 セルロースエステルの置換されたアシル基としては、アセチル基、プロピオニル基、ブチリル基、イソブチリル基、バレリル基、ピバロイル基、ヘキサノイル基、オクタノイル基、ラウロイル基、ステアロイル等の炭素数2~22のアシル基が挙げられる。 Examples of the substituted acyl groups of cellulose esters include acyl groups having 2 to 22 carbon atoms, such as acetyl, propionyl, butyryl, isobutyryl, valeryl, pivaloyl, hexanoyl, octanoyl, lauroyl, and stearoyl.

 エステルを構成するカルボン酸(アシル基)は、置換基を有してもよい。
 エステルを構成するカルボン酸は、特に炭素数が6以下の低級脂肪酸であることが好ましく、炭素数が3以下の低級脂肪酸であることがより好ましい。
The carboxylic acid (acyl group) constituting the ester may have a substituent.
The carboxylic acid constituting the ester is preferably a lower fatty acid having 6 or less carbon atoms, and more preferably a lower fatty acid having 3 or less carbon atoms.

 なお、セルロースエステル中のアシル基は単一種であってもよいし、複数のアシル基の組み合わせであってもよい。 The acyl group in the cellulose ester may be of a single type or a combination of multiple acyl groups.

 セルロースエステルの具体例としては、ジアセチルセルロース(DAC)、トリアセチルセルロース(TAC)等のセルロースアセテートが挙げられる。また、セルロースアセテートプロピオネート(CAP)、セルロースアセテートブチレート、セルロースアセテートプロピオネートブチレート等のアセチル基の他にプロピオネート基又はブチレート基が結合したセルロースの混合脂肪酸エステルが挙げられる。
 セルロースエステルは、一種単独で含有しても、二種以上含有してもよい。
Specific examples of cellulose esters include cellulose acetates such as diacetyl cellulose (DAC) and triacetyl cellulose (TAC), as well as mixed fatty acid esters of cellulose to which a propionate group or a butyrate group is bonded in addition to an acetyl group, such as cellulose acetate propionate (CAP), cellulose acetate butyrate, and cellulose acetate propionate butyrate.
The cellulose ester may be contained alone or in combination of two or more kinds.

 <アシル基の種類及び置換度>
 セルロースエステルのアシル基の種類及び置換度を適宜選択することによって、樹脂層における位相差の湿度変動を、所望の範囲内に制御することができる。その結果、樹脂層の厚さの均一性を向上できる。
<Type and Substitution Degree of Acyl Group>
By appropriately selecting the type and substitution degree of the acyl group of the cellulose ester, the humidity change of the retardation in the resin layer can be controlled within a desired range, and as a result, the uniformity of the thickness of the resin layer can be improved.

 アシル基の置換度は、1グルコース単位あたりのアシル基の平均数を表す。つまり、1グルコース単位中の2位、3位及び6位のヒドロキシ基における水素原子のうち、いくつの水素原子がアシル基に置換されているかを表す。
 したがって、アシル基の置換度の最大値は3.0であり、この場合、2位、3位及び6位のヒドロキシ基の水素原子全てが、アシル基で置換されていることを意味する。
The degree of acyl substitution represents the average number of acyl groups per glucose unit, i.e., how many of the hydrogen atoms in the hydroxyl groups at the 2-, 3-, and 6-positions in one glucose unit are substituted with acyl groups.
Therefore, the maximum degree of substitution of the acyl group is 3.0, which means that all of the hydrogen atoms of the hydroxy groups at the 2-, 3- and 6-positions are substituted with acyl groups.

 アシル基は、1グルコース単位中の2位、3位及び6位に平均的に置換していてもよいし、分布をもって置換していてもよい。
 アシル基の置換度は、ASTM-D817-96に規定の方法により求められる。
The acyl groups may be substituted evenly at the 2-, 3- and 6-positions of one glucose unit, or may be substituted with a distribution.
The degree of acyl substitution can be determined by the method specified in ASTM-D817-96.

 セルロースエステルのアシル基の置換度が大きすぎると、位相差が発現しにくくなるため、樹脂層を作製する際に延伸倍率を増加させる必要がある。ただし、高延伸倍率で均一に延伸させることは難しく、樹脂層の厚さのバラつきが大きくなりやすい。一方、セルロースエステルのアシル基の置換度を小さくするほど、位相差が発現しやすくなるため、樹脂層の厚さを薄く、均一にできる。
 しかしながら、セルロースエステルのアシル基の置換度が小さすぎると、樹脂層の耐久性が低下するため、耐久性の観点からは、置換度を小さくしすぎないことが好ましい。
If the substitution degree of the acyl group of the cellulose ester is too large, the retardation is difficult to be expressed, so it is necessary to increase the stretching ratio when preparing the resin layer. However, it is difficult to uniformly stretch at a high stretching ratio, and the thickness of the resin layer is likely to vary greatly. On the other hand, the smaller the substitution degree of the acyl group of the cellulose ester, the easier it is to express the retardation, so the thickness of the resin layer can be made thin and uniform.
However, if the degree of substitution of the acyl group in the cellulose ester is too small, the durability of the resin layer decreases, and therefore, from the viewpoint of durability, it is preferable not to make the degree of substitution too small.

 厚さ方向のリターデーション(Rt、位相差)の湿度による変動は、セルロースのカルボニル基に水分子が配位することで生じる。このため、アシル基の置換度を小さく、すなわち、セルロース中のカルボニル基を少なくするほど、Rtの湿度による変動を生じにくくできる。 The humidity-dependent change in retardation (Rt, phase difference) in the thickness direction occurs when water molecules coordinate with the carbonyl groups of cellulose. Therefore, the smaller the degree of acyl group substitution, i.e., the fewer the carbonyl groups in the cellulose, the less humidity-dependent change in Rt occurs.

 セルロースエステルのアシル基の置換度は、2.1~3.0の範囲内であることが好ましい。
 上記範囲内であることにより、環境変動(特に、Rtの湿度による変動)を抑制するとともに、樹脂層の厚さの均一性を向上できる。また、樹脂層の作製時の流延性及び延伸性を向上できる。
The degree of substitution of the acyl group in the cellulose ester is preferably within the range of 2.1 to 3.0.
By being in the above range, environmental fluctuations (particularly fluctuations in Rt due to humidity) can be suppressed, and the uniformity of the thickness of the resin layer can be improved. In addition, the flowability and stretchability during the production of the resin layer can be improved.

 また、セルロースエステルのアシル基の置換度は、下記式(a)及び(b)を共に満たすことが好ましい。ただし、下記式(a)及び(b)中、Xはアセチル基の置換度、Yはプロピオニル基又はブチリル基の置換度、若しくはその混合物の置換度である。 In addition, it is preferable that the degree of substitution of the acyl group of the cellulose ester satisfies both of the following formulas (a) and (b). In the following formulas (a) and (b), X is the degree of substitution of the acetyl group, and Y is the degree of substitution of the propionyl group or the butyryl group, or the degree of substitution of a mixture thereof.

 式(a): 2.1≦X+Y≦2.5
 式(b): 0≦Y≦1.5
Formula (a): 2.1≦X+Y≦2.5
Formula (b): 0≦Y≦1.5

 セルロースエステルは、セルロースアセテート(Y=0)、又はセルロースアセテートプロピオネート(CAP)(Y;プロピオニル基、Y>0)であることが好ましい。中でも、樹脂層の厚さの均一性の観点から、Y=0であるセルロースアセテートであることが好ましい。 The cellulose ester is preferably cellulose acetate (Y=0) or cellulose acetate propionate (CAP) (Y: propionyl group, Y>0). Of these, cellulose acetate with Y=0 is preferred from the viewpoint of uniformity of the thickness of the resin layer.

 セルロースアセテートのアセチル基の置換度Xは、位相差の発現性、Rtの湿度による変動、樹脂層の均一性の観点から、2.1≦X≦3.0、を満たすことが好ましい。上記範囲内を満たすセルロースアセテートとしては、セルロースジアセテート(DAC)、及びセルローストリアセテート(TAC)が挙げられる。 From the viewpoints of retardation expression, variation in Rt due to humidity, and uniformity of the resin layer, it is preferable that the degree of substitution X of the acetyl group of cellulose acetate satisfies 2.1≦X≦3.0. Examples of cellulose acetate that satisfies the above range include cellulose diacetate (DAC) and cellulose triacetate (TAC).

 また、Y>0の場合、セルロースエステルは、セルロースアセテートプロピオネート(CAP)であることが好ましい。このとき、X及びYは、0.95≦X≦2.25、0.1≦Y≦1.2、2.15≦X+Y≦2.45、のいずれも満たすことが好ましい。 In addition, when Y>0, the cellulose ester is preferably cellulose acetate propionate (CAP). In this case, it is preferable that X and Y satisfy any of the following: 0.95≦X≦2.25, 0.1≦Y≦1.2, 2.15≦X+Y≦2.45.

 これらの条件を満たすセルロースアセテート又はセルロースアセテートプロピオネートを用いることにより、リターデーション、機械的強度、環境変動に優れた樹脂層が得られる。 By using cellulose acetate or cellulose acetate propionate that meets these conditions, a resin layer with excellent retardation, mechanical strength, and resistance to environmental changes can be obtained.

 また、所望の光学特性を得るために、置換度の異なるセルロースアセテートを混合して用いてもよい。異なるセルロースアセテートの混合比率は、特に制限されない。 Also, to obtain the desired optical properties, cellulose acetates with different degrees of substitution may be mixed. There are no particular limitations on the mixing ratio of the different cellulose acetates.

 機械的強度の観点から、セルロースエステルの数平均分子量(Mn)は、2×10~3×10の範囲内であることが好ましく、2×10~1.2×10の範囲内であることがより好ましく、4×10~8×10の範囲内であることが更に好ましい。 From the viewpoint of mechanical strength, the number average molecular weight (Mn) of the cellulose ester is preferably within the range of 2×10 4 to 3×10 5 , more preferably within the range of 2×10 4 to 1.2×10 5 , and even more preferably within the range of 4×10 4 to 8×10 4 .

 セルロースエステルの数平均分子量(Mn)は、後述の(メタ)アクリル系樹脂と同様の方法で測定できる。 The number average molecular weight (Mn) of cellulose ester can be measured in the same manner as for (meth)acrylic resins described below.

 機械的強度の観点から、セルロースエステルの重量平均分子量(Mw)は、2×10~1×10の範囲内であることが好ましく、2×10~1.2×10の範囲内であることがより好ましく、4×10~8×10の範囲内であることが更に好ましい。 From the viewpoint of mechanical strength, the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the cellulose ester is preferably within the range of 2×10 4 to 1×10 6 , more preferably within the range of 2×10 4 to 1.2×10 5 , and even more preferably within the range of 4×10 4 to 8×10 4 .

 セルロースエステルの原料セルロースとしては、特に制限されないが、綿花リンター、木材パルプ、ケナフ等が挙げられる。また、これらから得られたセルロースエステルは、それぞれ任意の割合で混合して用いてもよい。 The raw cellulose for cellulose ester is not particularly limited, but examples include cotton linters, wood pulp, kenaf, etc. Furthermore, the cellulose esters obtained from these may be mixed in any desired ratio.

 セルロースアセテート、セルロースアセテートプロピオネート等のセルロースエステルは、公知の方法により合成できる。 Cellulose esters such as cellulose acetate and cellulose acetate propionate can be synthesized by known methods.

 一般的には、原料のセルロース、有機酸(酢酸、プロピオン酸等)、酸無水物(無水酢酸、無水プロピオン酸等)及び触媒(硫酸等)を混合する。そして、セルロースをエステル化し、セルロースのトリエステルができるまで反応を進める。 Generally, the raw material cellulose, organic acid (acetic acid, propionic acid, etc.), acid anhydride (acetic anhydride, propionic anhydride, etc.) and catalyst (sulfuric acid, etc.) are mixed together. The cellulose is then esterified and the reaction is allowed to proceed until a cellulose triester is produced.

 トリエステルにおいては、1グルコース単位中の3個のヒドロキシ基は、有機酸のアシル酸で置換されている。 In triesters, the three hydroxy groups in one glucose unit are replaced with an organic acyl acid.

 同時に二種類の有機酸を用いることにより、混合エステル型のセルロースエステル、例えばセルロースアセテートプロピオネートやセルロースアセテートブチレートを合成できる。 By using two types of organic acids at the same time, it is possible to synthesize mixed ester type cellulose esters, such as cellulose acetate propionate and cellulose acetate butyrate.

 次いで、セルロースのトリエステルを加水分解することで、所望のアシル置換度を有するセルロースエステルが得られる。
 その後、ろ過、沈殿、水洗、脱水、乾燥等の工程を経て、最終的にセルロースエステルが得られる。具体的には、特開平10-45804号に記載の方法を参考にして合成できる。
The cellulose triester is then hydrolyzed to give a cellulose ester having the desired degree of acyl substitution.
Thereafter, the cellulose ester is finally obtained through steps such as filtration, precipitation, washing, dehydration, drying, etc. Specifically, the cellulose ester can be synthesized by referring to the method described in JP-A-10-45804.

 (2.1.1.2)シクロオレフィン系樹脂
 シクロオレフィン系樹脂は、シクロオレフィン単量体の重合体、又はシクロオレフィン単量体と共重合可能な他の単量体との共重合体であることが好ましい。
(2.1.1.2) Cycloolefin Resin The cycloolefin resin is preferably a polymer of a cycloolefin monomer, or a copolymer of a cycloolefin monomer and another monomer copolymerizable with the cycloolefin monomer.

 シクロオレフィン単量体としては、ノルボルネン骨格を有するシクロオレフィン単量体であることが好ましい。中でも、下記一般式(A-1)又は(A-2)で表される構造を有するシクロオレフィン単量体であることがより好ましい。 The cycloolefin monomer is preferably a cycloolefin monomer having a norbornene skeleton. Among them, a cycloolefin monomer having a structure represented by the following general formula (A-1) or (A-2) is more preferable.

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000005

 上記一般式(A-1)中、R~Rは、それぞれ独立して、水素原子、炭素数1~30の炭化水素基、又は極性基を表す。pは、0~2の整数を表す。ただし、R~Rの全てが同時に水素原子を表すことはなく、RとRが同時に水素原子を表すことはなく、RとRが同時に水素原子を表すことはないものとする。 In the above general formula (A-1), R 1 to R 4 each independently represent a hydrogen atom, a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms, or a polar group. p represents an integer of 0 to 2. However, R 1 to R 4 do not all represent hydrogen atoms at the same time, R 1 and R 2 do not both represent hydrogen atoms, and R 3 and R 4 do not both represent hydrogen atoms.

 上記一般式(A-1)において、R~Rで表される炭素数1~30の炭化水素基としては、例えば、炭素数1~10の炭化水素基であることが好ましく、炭素数1~5の炭化水素基であることがより好ましい。炭素数1~30の炭化水素基は、例えば、ハロゲン原子、酸素原子、窒素原子、硫黄原子、又はケイ素原子を含む連結基を、更に有していてもよい。そのような連結基としては、例えば、カルボニル基、イミノ基、エーテル結合、シリルエーテル結合、チオエーテル結合等の2価の極性基が挙げられる。炭素数1~30の炭化水素基としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、ブチル基等が挙げられる。 In the above general formula (A-1), the hydrocarbon group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms represented by R 1 to R 4 is, for example, preferably a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, and more preferably a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. The hydrocarbon group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms may further have a linking group containing, for example, a halogen atom, an oxygen atom, a nitrogen atom, a sulfur atom, or a silicon atom. Examples of such linking groups include divalent polar groups such as a carbonyl group, an imino group, an ether bond, a silyl ether bond, and a thioether bond. Examples of the hydrocarbon group having 1 to 30 carbon atoms include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, and a butyl group.

 上記一般式(A-1)において、R~Rで表される極性基としては、例えば、カルボキシ基、ヒドロキシ基、アルコキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、アミノ基、アミド基、シアノ基等が挙げられる。中でも、カルボキシ基、ヒドロキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、又はアリールオキシカルボニル基であることが好ましい。特に、溶液製膜時の溶解性の観点から、アルコキシカルボニル基又はアリールオキシカルボニル基であることが好ましい。 In the above general formula (A-1), examples of the polar group represented by R 1 to R 4 include a carboxy group, a hydroxy group, an alkoxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an amino group, an amide group, and a cyano group. Among them, a carboxy group, a hydroxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, or an aryloxycarbonyl group is preferable. In particular, an alkoxycarbonyl group or an aryloxycarbonyl group is preferable from the viewpoint of solubility during solution casting.

 上記一般式(A-1)におけるpは、耐熱性を高める観点から、1又は2であることが好ましい。pが1又は2であることにより、得られる重合体が嵩高く、ガラス転移温度が向上しやすい。また、湿度に対して若干応答できるようになり、樹脂層を有する積層体のカールバランスを制御しやすい。 In the above general formula (A-1), p is preferably 1 or 2 from the viewpoint of increasing heat resistance. When p is 1 or 2, the resulting polymer is bulky and the glass transition temperature is easily improved. In addition, it becomes somewhat responsive to humidity, making it easier to control the curl balance of the laminate having a resin layer.

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000006

 上記一般式(A-2)中、Rは、水素原子、炭素数1~5の炭化水素基、又は炭素数1~5のアルキル基を有するアルキルシリル基を表す。Rは、カルボキシ基、ヒドロキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、アリールオキシカルボニル基、アミノ基、アミド基、シアノ基、又はハロゲン原子(フッ素原子、塩素原子、臭素原子、又はヨウ素原子)を表す。pは、0~2の整数を表す。 In the above general formula (A-2), R5 represents a hydrogen atom, a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or an alkylsilyl group having an alkyl group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms. R6 represents a carboxy group, a hydroxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, an amino group, an amido group, a cyano group, or a halogen atom (a fluorine atom, a chlorine atom, a bromine atom, or an iodine atom). p represents an integer of 0 to 2.

 上記一般式(A-2)におけるRは、炭素数1~5の炭化水素基であることが好ましく、炭素数1~3の炭化水素基であることがより好ましい。 R 5 in the above general formula (A-2) is preferably a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, and more preferably a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms.

 上記一般式(A-2)におけるRは、カルボキシ基、ヒドロキシ基、アルコキシカルボニル基、又はアリールオキシカルボニル基であることが好ましい。中でも、溶液製膜時の溶解性の観点から、アルコキシカルボニル基又はアリールオキシカルボニル基であることがより好ましい。 In the above general formula (A-2), R6 is preferably a carboxy group, a hydroxy group, an alkoxycarbonyl group, or an aryloxycarbonyl group, and more preferably an alkoxycarbonyl group or an aryloxycarbonyl group from the viewpoint of solubility during solution casting.

 上記一般式(A-2)におけるpは、耐熱性を高める観点から、1又は2であることが好ましい。pが1又は2であることにより、得られる重合体が嵩高く、ガラス転移温度が向上しやすい。 In the above general formula (A-2), p is preferably 1 or 2 from the viewpoint of improving heat resistance. When p is 1 or 2, the resulting polymer is bulky and the glass transition temperature is easily improved.

 シクロオレフィン単量体としては、有機溶媒への溶解性が向上する観点から、上記一般式(A-2)で表される構造を有するシクロオレフィン単量体であることが好ましい。一般的に、有機化合物は対称性を崩すことによって結晶性が低下し、有機溶媒への溶解性が向上する。一般式(A-2)におけるR及びRは、分子の対称軸に対して、環を構成する炭素原子の片側のみに置換されているため、分子の対称性が低い。すなわち、一般式(A-2)で表される構造を有するシクロオレフィン単量体は、溶解性が高いため、樹脂層を溶液流延法によって作製する場合に適している。 From the viewpoint of improving the solubility in an organic solvent, the cycloolefin monomer is preferably a cycloolefin monomer having the structure represented by the above general formula (A-2). In general, by breaking the symmetry of an organic compound, the crystallinity is reduced and the solubility in an organic solvent is improved. R 5 and R 6 in the general formula (A-2) are substituted on only one side of the carbon atoms constituting the ring with respect to the symmetric axis of the molecule, so that the symmetry of the molecule is low. That is, the cycloolefin monomer having the structure represented by the general formula (A-2) is suitable for producing a resin layer by a solution casting method because of its high solubility.

 シクロオレフィン系樹脂における一般式(A-2)で表される構造を有するシクロオレフィン単量体の含有割合は、シクロオレフィン系樹脂を構成する全シクロオレフィン単量体の全モル数に対して、70モル%以上であることが好ましい。また、80モル%以上であることがより好ましく、100モル%であることが更に好ましい。一般式(A-2)で表される構造を有するシクロオレフィン単量体の含有割合が70モル%以上であることにより、シクロオレフィン系樹脂の配向性が高まるため、位相差(リターデーション)値が上昇しやすい。 The content of the cycloolefin monomer having the structure represented by general formula (A-2) in the cycloolefin resin is preferably 70 mol% or more relative to the total number of moles of all cycloolefin monomers constituting the cycloolefin resin. Also, it is more preferable that it is 80 mol% or more, and even more preferable that it is 100 mol%. When the content of the cycloolefin monomer having the structure represented by general formula (A-2) is 70 mol% or more, the orientation of the cycloolefin resin is increased, and the phase difference (retardation) value is likely to increase.

 以下、一般式(A-1)で表される構造を有するシクロオレフィン単量体の具体例を例示化合物1~14に示す。また、一般式(A-2)で表される構造を有するシクロオレフィン単量体の具体例を例示化合物15~34に示す。 Specific examples of cycloolefin monomers having a structure represented by general formula (A-1) are shown below as exemplary compounds 1 to 14. Specific examples of cycloolefin monomers having a structure represented by general formula (A-2) are shown below as exemplary compounds 15 to 34.

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000007

 シクロオレフィン単量体と共重合可能な共重合性単量体としては、例えば、シクロオレフィン単量体と開環共重合可能な共重合性単量体、シクロオレフィン単量体と付加共重合可能な共重合性単量体等が挙げられる。 Examples of copolymerizable monomers that can be copolymerized with cycloolefin monomers include copolymerizable monomers that can be ring-opening copolymerized with cycloolefin monomers, and copolymerizable monomers that can be addition copolymerized with cycloolefin monomers.

 開環共重合可能な共重合性単量体としては、例えば、シクロブテン、シクロペンテン、シクロヘプテン、シクロオクテン、ジシクロペンタジエン等のシクロオレフィンが挙げられる。 Examples of copolymerizable monomers capable of ring-opening copolymerization include cycloolefins such as cyclobutene, cyclopentene, cycloheptene, cyclooctene, and dicyclopentadiene.

 付加共重合可能な共重合性単量体としては、例えば、不飽和二重結合含有化合物、ビニル系環状炭化水素単量体、(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。不飽和二重結合含有化合物としては、炭素数2~12(好ましくは2~8)のオレフィン系化合物が挙げられ、例えば、エチレン、プロピレン、ブテン等が挙げられる。ビニル系環状炭化水素単量体としては、4-ビニルシクロペンテン、2-メチル-4-イソプロペニルシクロペンテン等のビニルシクロペンテン系単量体が挙げられる。(メタ)アクリレートとしては、例えば、メチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート等の炭素数1~20のアルキル(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。 Examples of copolymerizable monomers capable of addition copolymerization include unsaturated double bond-containing compounds, vinyl cyclic hydrocarbon monomers, (meth)acrylates, etc. Examples of unsaturated double bond-containing compounds include olefin compounds having 2 to 12 carbon atoms (preferably 2 to 8), such as ethylene, propylene, and butene. Examples of vinyl cyclic hydrocarbon monomers include vinylcyclopentene monomers such as 4-vinylcyclopentene and 2-methyl-4-isopropenylcyclopentene. Examples of (meth)acrylates include alkyl (meth)acrylates having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, such as methyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, and cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate.

 シクロオレフィン単量体と共重合性単量体との共重合体におけるシクロオレフィン単量体の含有割合は、共重合体を構成する全単量体の合計に対して、20~80モル%の範囲内であることが好ましく、30~70モル%の範囲内であることが好ましい。 The content of the cycloolefin monomer in a copolymer of a cycloolefin monomer and a copolymerizable monomer is preferably within the range of 20 to 80 mol %, and more preferably within the range of 30 to 70 mol %, based on the total of all monomers constituting the copolymer.

 シクロオレフィン系樹脂は、前述のとおり、ノルボルネン骨格を有するシクロオレフィン単量体、好ましくは上記一般式(A-1)又は(A-2)で表される構造を有するシクロオレフィン単量体を、単独重合又は共重合して得られる重合体である。このような重合体としては、以下のものが挙げられる。
 1)シクロオレフィン単量体の開環重合体
 2)シクロオレフィン単量体と、それと開環共重合可能な共重合性単量体との開環共重合体
 3)上記1)又は2)の開環(共)重合体の水素添加物
 4)上記1)又は2)の開環(共)重合体をフリーデルクラフツ反応により環化した後、水素添加した(共)重合体
 5)シクロオレフィン単量体と、不飽和二重結合含有化合物との飽和共重合体
 6)シクロオレフィン単量体のビニル系環状炭化水素単量体との付加共重合体及びその水素添加物
 7)シクロオレフィン単量体と、(メタ)アクリレートとの交互共重合体
As described above, the cycloolefin resin is a polymer obtained by homopolymerizing or copolymerizing a cycloolefin monomer having a norbornene skeleton, preferably a cycloolefin monomer having a structure represented by the above general formula (A-1) or (A-2). Examples of such polymers include the following.
1) Ring-opening polymer of cycloolefin monomer; 2) Ring-opening copolymer of cycloolefin monomer and a copolymerizable monomer capable of ring-opening copolymerization therewith; 3) Hydrogenated product of ring-opening (co)polymer of 1) or 2) above; 4) (co)polymer obtained by cyclizing ring-opening (co)polymer of 1) or 2) above by Friedel-Crafts reaction and then hydrogenating it; 5) Saturated copolymer of cycloolefin monomer and unsaturated double bond-containing compound; 6) Addition copolymer of cycloolefin monomer and vinyl cyclic hydrocarbon monomer and hydrogenated product thereof; 7) Alternating copolymer of cycloolefin monomer and (meth)acrylate.

 上記1)~7)の重合体は、いずれも公知の方法、例えば、特開2008-107534号公報や特開2005-227606号公報に記載の方法で得ることができる。例えば、上記2)の開環共重合に用いられる触媒や溶媒は、例えば、特開2008-107534号公報の段落0019~0024に記載のものを使用できる。上記3)及び6)の水素添加に用いられる触媒は、例えば、特開2008-107534号公報の段落0025~0028に記載のものを使用できる。上記4)のフリーデルクラフツ反応に用いられる酸性化合物は、例えば、特開2008-107534号公報の段落0029に記載のものを使用できる。上記5)~7)の付加重合に用いられる触媒は、例えば、特開2005-227606号公報の段落0058~0063に記載のものを使用できる。上記7)の交互共重合反応は、例えば、特開2005-227606号公報の段落0071~0072に記載の方法で行うことができる。 The polymers 1) to 7) above can all be obtained by known methods, for example, the methods described in JP-A-2008-107534 and JP-A-2005-227606. For example, the catalyst and solvent used in the ring-opening copolymerization 2) above can be, for example, those described in paragraphs 0019 to 0024 of JP-A-2008-107534. The catalyst used in the hydrogenation 3) and 6) above can be, for example, those described in paragraphs 0025 to 0028 of JP-A-2008-107534. The acidic compound used in the Friedel-Crafts reaction 4) above can be, for example, those described in paragraph 0029 of JP-A-2008-107534. The catalyst used in the addition polymerization 5) to 7) above can be, for example, those described in paragraphs 0058 to 0063 of JP-A-2005-227606. The alternating copolymerization reaction of 7) above can be carried out, for example, by the method described in paragraphs 0071 to 0072 of JP 2005-227606 A.

 中でも、上記1)~3)又は5)の重合体であることが好ましく、上記3)又は5)の重合体であることがより好ましい。すなわち、得られる樹脂のガラス転移温度を高くし、かつ光透過率を高くできる観点から、当該シクロオレフィン系樹脂は、下記一般式(B-1)で表される構造単位と下記一般式(B-2)で表される構造単位の少なくとも一方を含むことが好ましい。そして、一般式(B-2)で表される構造単位のみを含む、又は一般式(B-1)で表される構造単位と一般式(B-2)で表される構造単位の両方を含むことがより好ましい。一般式(B-1)で表される構造単位は、前述の一般式(A-1)で表されるシクロオレフィン単量体由来の構造単位であり、一般式(B-2)で表される構造単位は、前述の一般式(A-2)で表されるシクロオレフィン単量体由来の構造単位である。 Among them, the polymers of 1) to 3) or 5) above are preferred, and the polymers of 3) or 5) above are more preferred. That is, from the viewpoint of increasing the glass transition temperature and light transmittance of the resulting resin, the cycloolefin resin preferably contains at least one of a structural unit represented by the following general formula (B-1) and a structural unit represented by the following general formula (B-2). It is more preferred that the cycloolefin resin contains only a structural unit represented by general formula (B-2), or contains both a structural unit represented by general formula (B-1) and a structural unit represented by general formula (B-2). The structural unit represented by general formula (B-1) is a structural unit derived from the cycloolefin monomer represented by the aforementioned general formula (A-1), and the structural unit represented by general formula (B-2) is a structural unit derived from the cycloolefin monomer represented by the aforementioned general formula (A-2).

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000008

 上記一般式(B-1)中、Xは、-CH=CH-又は-CHCH-を表す。R~R及びpは、それぞれ上記一般式(A-1)のR~R及びpと同義である。 In the above general formula (B-1), X represents -CH=CH- or -CH 2 CH 2 -, and R 1 to R 4 and p have the same meanings as R 1 to R 4 and p in the above general formula (A-1), respectively.

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000009

 上記一般式(B-2)中、Xは、-CH=CH-又は-CHCH-を表す。R~R及びpは、それぞれ一般式(A-2)のR~R及びpと同義である。 In the above general formula (B-2), X represents -CH=CH- or -CH 2 CH 2 -, and R 5 to R 6 and p have the same meanings as R 5 to R 6 and p in general formula (A-2), respectively.

 本発明に用いられるシクロオレフィン系樹脂は、市販品であってもよい。シクロオレフィン系樹脂の市販品としては、例えば、「ARTON(登録商標)G780」、「ARTON(登録商標)F」、「ARTON(登録商標)R4500、R4900、R5000」、「ARTON(登録商標)RX4500」(以上、JSR株式会社製)が挙げられる。 The cycloolefin resin used in the present invention may be a commercially available product. Examples of commercially available cycloolefin resins include "ARTON (registered trademark) G780", "ARTON (registered trademark) F", "ARTON (registered trademark) R4500, R4900, R5000", and "ARTON (registered trademark) RX4500" (all manufactured by JSR Corporation).

 シクロオレフィン系樹脂の30℃における固有粘度〔η〕inhは、0.2~5cm/gの範囲内であることが好ましく、0.3~3cm/gの範囲内であることがより好ましく、0.4~1.5cm/gの範囲内であることが更に好ましい。 The intrinsic viscosity [η]inh of the cycloolefin resin at 30° C. is preferably within the range of 0.2 to 5 cm 3 /g, more preferably within the range of 0.3 to 3 cm 3 /g, and even more preferably within the range of 0.4 to 1.5 cm 3 /g.

 シクロオレフィン系樹脂の数平均分子量(Mn)は、8,000~10万の範囲内であることが好ましく、10000~80000の範囲内であることがより好ましく、12000~50000の範囲内であることが更に好ましい。
 シクロオレフィン系樹脂の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、20000~300000の範囲内であることが好ましく、30000~250000の範囲内であることがより好ましく、40000~200000の範囲内であることが更に好ましい。重量平均分子量(Mw)は、前述の(メタ)アクリル系樹脂と同様の方法で測定できる。
The number average molecular weight (Mn) of the cycloolefin resin is preferably within the range of 8,000 to 100,000, more preferably within the range of 10,000 to 80,000, and even more preferably within the range of 12,000 to 50,000.
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the cycloolefin resin is preferably within a range of 20,000 to 300,000, more preferably within a range of 30,000 to 250,000, and further preferably within a range of 40,000 to 200,000. The weight average molecular weight (Mw) can be measured by the same method as that for the (meth)acrylic resin described above.

 固有粘度〔η〕inh、数平均分子量及び重量平均分子量(Mw)が、上記範囲内であることにより、シクロオレフィン系樹脂の耐熱性、耐水性、耐薬品性、機械的特性、及び樹脂層としての成形加工性が良好となる。 By having the intrinsic viscosity [η]inh, number average molecular weight, and weight average molecular weight (Mw) within the above ranges, the cycloolefin resin has good heat resistance, water resistance, chemical resistance, mechanical properties, and moldability as a resin layer.

 シクロオレフィン系樹脂のガラス転移温度(Tg)は、通常、110℃以上であり、110~350℃の範囲内であることが好ましく、120~250℃の範囲内であることがより好ましく、120~220℃の範囲内であることが更に好ましい。Tgが、110℃以上であることにより、高温条件下での変形を抑制できる。一方、Tgが、350℃以下であることにより、成形加工が容易となり、成形加工時の熱による樹脂の劣化を抑制できる。 The glass transition temperature (Tg) of cycloolefin resins is usually 110°C or higher, preferably in the range of 110 to 350°C, more preferably in the range of 120 to 250°C, and even more preferably in the range of 120 to 220°C. Having a Tg of 110°C or higher makes it possible to suppress deformation under high temperature conditions. On the other hand, having a Tg of 350°C or lower makes molding easier and suppresses deterioration of the resin due to heat during molding processing.

 シクロオレフィン系樹脂の含有量は、樹脂層の全質量に対して、70質量%以上であることが好ましく、80質量%以上であることがより好ましい。 The content of the cycloolefin resin is preferably 70% by mass or more, and more preferably 80% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the resin layer.

 (2.1.1.3)ポリイミド
 ポリイミドは、テトラカルボン酸二無水物とジアミンとの重合反応により合成される。
(2.1.1.3) Polyimide Polyimide is synthesized by a polymerization reaction between a tetracarboxylic dianhydride and a diamine.

 テトラカルボン酸二無水物としては、芳香族テトラカルボン酸二無水物、脂肪族テトラカルボン酸二無水物及び脂環式テトラカルボン酸二無水物が挙げられる。中でも、芳香族テトラカルボン酸二無水物であることが好ましい。
 ジアミンとしては、芳香族ジアミン、脂肪族ジアミン及び脂環式ジアミンが挙げられ、中でも、芳香族ジアミンであることが好ましい。
Examples of the tetracarboxylic dianhydride include aromatic tetracarboxylic dianhydrides, aliphatic tetracarboxylic dianhydrides, and alicyclic tetracarboxylic dianhydrides. Among these, aromatic tetracarboxylic dianhydrides are preferred.
The diamine may be an aromatic diamine, an aliphatic diamine, or an alicyclic diamine, and among these, an aromatic diamine is preferred.

 ポリイミドの重量平均分子量(Mw)は、10万~30万の範囲内であることが好ましく、13万~25万の範囲内であることがより好ましい。上記範囲内であることにより、樹脂層の搬送時における搬送張力によって、樹脂層が破断するのを抑制できる。重量平均分子量(Mw)は、前述の(メタ)アクリル系樹脂と同様の方法で測定できる。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the polyimide is preferably within the range of 100,000 to 300,000, and more preferably within the range of 130,000 to 250,000. By being within the above range, it is possible to prevent the resin layer from breaking due to the transport tension during transport. The weight average molecular weight (Mw) can be measured in the same manner as for the (meth)acrylic resin described above.

 ポリイミドの含有量は、樹脂層の全質量に対して、60質量%以上であることが好ましく、70質量%以上であることがより好ましい。 The polyimide content is preferably 60% by mass or more, and more preferably 70% by mass or more, relative to the total mass of the resin layer.

 (2.1.2)色素化合物
 第1樹脂層は、色素化合物を含有する。当該色素化合物は、300~460nmの波長領域の紫外可視光吸収スペクトルにおいて、360~379nmの範囲内に最大吸収波長を有する。当該色素化合物を含有することにより、ある波長領域における光透過率を特定の範囲内に調整できる。以下、特に断りのない限り、各種色素化合物の最大吸収波長は、300~460nmの波長領域の吸収スペクトルにおける最大吸収波長をいう。
(2.1.2) Dye Compound The first resin layer contains a dye compound. The dye compound has a maximum absorption wavelength in the range of 360 to 379 nm in an ultraviolet-visible light absorption spectrum in a wavelength range of 300 to 460 nm. By containing the dye compound, the light transmittance in a certain wavelength range can be adjusted to within a specific range. Hereinafter, unless otherwise specified, the maximum absorption wavelength of each dye compound refers to the maximum absorption wavelength in the absorption spectrum in the wavelength range of 300 to 460 nm.

 色素化合物は、上記吸光特性を有することで、発光素子(特に有機EL素子)又は発光装置を、外光から保護し劣化を抑制できる。色素化合物は、上記吸光特性を有するものであれば、特に制限されない。ただし、色素化合物は、有機EL素子の表示性を阻害する、蛍光及び燐光性能(フォトルミネセンス)を有しないことが好ましい。 The dye compound has the above-mentioned light absorption properties, and thus can protect the light emitting element (particularly the organic EL element) or the light emitting device from external light and suppress deterioration. There are no particular limitations on the dye compound, so long as it has the above-mentioned light absorption properties. However, it is preferable that the dye compound does not have fluorescence or phosphorescence properties (photoluminescence), which would impair the display properties of the organic EL element.

 色素化合物は、上記吸光特性を有するものであれば、その構造等は特に制限されない。色素化合物としては、有機系化合物又は無機系化合物が挙げられる。樹脂成分への分散性、及び第1樹脂層の透明性の観点から、色素化合物は、有機系化合物であることが好ましい。 The dye compound is not particularly limited in structure, etc., as long as it has the above-mentioned light absorption characteristics. Examples of the dye compound include organic compounds and inorganic compounds. From the viewpoint of dispersibility in the resin component and transparency of the first resin layer, it is preferable that the dye compound is an organic compound.

 上記有機系化合物としては、例えば、アゾメチン系化合物、インドール系化合物、けい皮酸系化合物、ピリミジン系化合物、メチン系化合物、ポルフィリン系化合物、ジシアノメチン系化合物、ベンゾトリアゾール系化合物等が挙げられる。中でも、ベンゾトリアゾール系化合物であることが好ましい。 Examples of the organic compounds include azomethine compounds, indole compounds, cinnamic acid compounds, pyrimidine compounds, methine compounds, porphyrin compounds, dicyanomethine compounds, and benzotriazole compounds. Among these, benzotriazole compounds are preferred.

 ベンゾトリアゾール系化合物は、下記一般式(1)又は(2)で表される構造を有することが好ましい。これらの構造を有する色素化合物は、紫外線吸収能が極めて高く、かつ450~800nmの波長領域における光の吸収率が低い。そのため、第1樹脂層の、紫外線領域における平均光透過率を極めて低くでき、かつ450~800nmの波長領域における平均光透過率を、87%以上に調整できる。 The benzotriazole-based compound preferably has a structure represented by the following general formula (1) or (2). Dye compounds having these structures have extremely high ultraviolet absorption ability and low light absorptance in the wavelength range of 450 to 800 nm. Therefore, the average light transmittance of the first resin layer in the ultraviolet range can be made extremely low, and the average light transmittance in the wavelength range of 450 to 800 nm can be adjusted to 87% or more.

 第1樹脂層の成膜成分である樹脂への分散性、及び第1樹脂層の透明性の観点からも、色素化合物は、下記一般式(1)又は(2)で表される構造を有する化合物であることが好ましい。当該化合物は、ベンゾトリアゾール骨格に特定の構造の置換基を有しているため、疎水性が高い。これにより、当該化合物と樹脂と他の添加剤との間での相互作用が強まり、当該化合物の光による分解が抑制され、当該化合物の耐光性が向上すると考えられる。また、樹脂と当該化合物とのsp値の関係から、樹脂と当該化合物は相溶性が高い。そのため、所望の吸収スペクトルを形成するのに必要な量の当該化合物を、樹脂中に含有させても、ブリードアウトや白化現象が生じにくいと考えられる。 From the viewpoints of dispersibility in the resin, which is a film-forming component of the first resin layer, and transparency of the first resin layer, it is preferable that the dye compound is a compound having a structure represented by the following general formula (1) or (2). The compound has a substituent of a specific structure on the benzotriazole skeleton, and is therefore highly hydrophobic. This strengthens the interaction between the compound, the resin, and other additives, suppresses decomposition of the compound by light, and is thought to improve the light resistance of the compound. In addition, due to the relationship between the sp values of the resin and the compound, the resin and the compound are highly compatible. Therefore, even if the compound is contained in the resin in an amount necessary to form a desired absorption spectrum, it is thought that bleeding out or whitening is unlikely to occur.

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000010

 (式中、R11は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、ヒドロキシ基、アミノ基、アルキル置換アミノ基、カルボキシ基、アルキルオキシカルボニル基、ヒドロキシアルキル基、アルキルカルボニルオキシアルキル基、カルボキシアルキル基、アルキルオキシカルボニルアルキル基、アリール基、アシル基、又はスルホ基を表す。R12は、水素原子又はヒドロキシ基を表す。) (In the formula, R 11 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a hydroxy group, an amino group, an alkyl-substituted amino group, a carboxy group, an alkyloxycarbonyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkylcarbonyloxyalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group, an alkyloxycarbonylalkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group, or a sulfo group. R 12 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydroxy group.)

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000011

 (式中、R21は、水素原子又はヒドロキシ基を表す。R22、R23、及びR24は、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アルキル置換アミノ基、カルボキシ基、アルキルオキシカルボニル基、ヒドロキシアルキル基、アルキルカルボニルオキシアルキル基、カルボキシアルキル基、アルキルオキシカルボニルアルキル基、アリール基、アシル基、又はスルホ基を表す。) (In the formula, R 21 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydroxy group. R 22 , R 23 , and R 24 represent an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkyl-substituted amino group, a carboxy group, an alkyloxycarbonyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkylcarbonyloxyalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group, an alkyloxycarbonylalkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group, or a sulfo group.)

 上記R11、R22、R23及びR24で表される置換基の、アルキル基部分における炭素数は、1~20の範囲内であることが好ましく、1~10の範囲内であることがより好ましい。アルキル基部分は、直鎖状、分岐状、環状及びこれらの組み合わせの形態であってもよい。上記アリール基における炭素数は、5~30の範囲内であることが好ましい。アリール基は、ヘテロ原子を有してもよい。アリール基が有する芳香環は、単環であっても縮合環であってもよい。 The number of carbon atoms in the alkyl group portion of the substituents represented by R 11 , R 22 , R 23 and R 24 is preferably within the range of 1 to 20, more preferably within the range of 1 to 10. The alkyl group portion may be linear, branched, cyclic or a combination thereof. The number of carbon atoms in the aryl group is preferably within the range of 5 to 30. The aryl group may have a heteroatom. The aromatic ring in the aryl group may be a monocyclic or condensed ring.

 アルキル基又はアルキル基部分としては、例えば、メチル基、エチル基、プロピル基、イソプロピル基、n-ブチル基、イソブチル基、sec-ブチル基、tert-ブチル基、n-ヘキシル基、n-オクチル基、2-エチルヘキシル基等が挙げられる。
 アリール基としては、例えば、フェノキシ基、ナフチルオキシ基、2-メチルフェノキシ基等が挙げられる。
 上記R11、R22、R23及びR24で表される置換基は、更に置換基を有してもよい。
Examples of the alkyl group or alkyl group moiety include a methyl group, an ethyl group, a propyl group, an isopropyl group, an n-butyl group, an isobutyl group, a sec-butyl group, a tert-butyl group, an n-hexyl group, an n-octyl group, and a 2-ethylhexyl group.
Examples of the aryl group include a phenoxy group, a naphthyloxy group, and a 2-methylphenoxy group.
The substituents represented by R 11 , R 22 , R 23 and R 24 may further have a substituent.

 一般式(1)及び一般式(2)で表される構造を有する化合物を、下記に例示する。ただし、色素化合物は、これに制限されるものではない。 Examples of compounds having structures represented by general formula (1) and general formula (2) are given below. However, the dye compounds are not limited to these.

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000012

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000013

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000014

 本発明に係る一般式(1)及び(2)で表される構造を有する化合物は、従来公知の方法で合成できる。合成方法の一例を下記に示す。まず、ニトロアニリン類をジアゾ化する。得られるジアゾ化合物とセサモールとを、常法によりカップリングする。得られるニトロフェニルアゾ化合物を還元し、目的のベンゾトリアゾール誘導体を合成する。 The compounds having the structures represented by the general formulas (1) and (2) according to the present invention can be synthesized by conventionally known methods. An example of the synthesis method is shown below. First, nitroanilines are diazotized. The resulting diazo compound is coupled with sesamol by a conventional method. The resulting nitrophenylazo compound is reduced to synthesize the desired benzotriazole derivative.

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000015

 [6-(5-メトキシカルボニル-2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)ベンゾ[1,3]ジオキソール-5-オールの合成]  [Synthesis of 6-(5-methoxycarbonyl-2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)benzo[1,3]dioxol-5-ol]

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000016

 300mLの4つ口フラスコに、玉付きコンデンサー、温度計及び撹拌装置を取り付ける。4つ口フラスコに、下記成分を入れ、65~70℃の範囲内で3時間撹拌する。 Equip a 300 mL four-neck flask with a ball condenser, thermometer, and stirring device. Add the following ingredients to the four-neck flask and stir for 3 hours at 65-70°C.

 6-(5-カルボキシ-2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)ベンゾ[1,3]ジオキソール-5-オール
                  1.10g(0.0037モル)
 塩化チオニル           0.90g(0.0076モル)
 トルエン           173.38g(200.0mL)
 N,N-ジメチルホルムアミド   0.18g(0.2mL)
6-(5-carboxy-2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)benzo[1,3]dioxol-5-ol 1.10 g (0.0037 mol)
Thionyl chloride 0.90 g (0.0076 mol)
Toluene 173.38g (200.0mL)
N,N-Dimethylformamide 0.18g (0.2mL)

 4つ口フラスコから溶媒を留去した後、4つ口フラスコに下記成分を加え、70~75℃の範囲内で2時間撹拌する。
 メタノール             0.5g(0.0156モル)
 ピリジン             0.80g(0.0101モル)
 トルエン           130.04g(150.0mL)
After the solvent is distilled off from the four-neck flask, the following components are added to the four-neck flask and stirred at 70 to 75° C. for 2 hours.
Methanol 0.5g (0.0156 mol)
Pyridine 0.80g (0.0101 mol)
Toluene 130.04g (150.0mL)

 反応物を、温水100mLで2回洗浄する。反応物に活性炭0.1gを加え、還流撹拌して脱色させる。その後、反応物を熱時ろ過し、ろ液を5℃まで冷却する。析出する結晶をろ過し、トルエンで洗浄した後、60℃で乾燥し、化合物(1-8)を0.5g得る。なお、収率は43%である。
 得られる化合物(1-8)は、6-(5-メトキシカルボニル-2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)ベンゾ[1,3]ジオキソール-5-オールであり、最大吸収波長は、377nmである。
The reaction product is washed twice with 100 mL of warm water. 0.1 g of activated carbon is added to the reaction product, and the mixture is stirred under reflux to decolorize. The reaction product is then filtered while hot, and the filtrate is cooled to 5°C. The precipitated crystals are filtered, washed with toluene, and dried at 60°C to obtain 0.5 g of compound (1-8). The yield is 43%.
The resulting compound (1-8) is 6-(5-methoxycarbonyl-2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)benzo[1,3]dioxol-5-ol, and has a maximum absorption wavelength of 377 nm.

 (最大吸収波長の測定)
 色素化合物の最大吸収波長は、例えば、紫外可視分光光度計「UV-2450」(株式会社島津製作所製)を用いて、色素化合物のクロロホルム中での吸収スペクトルを測定することによって求められる。
(Measurement of maximum absorption wavelength)
The maximum absorption wavelength of a dye compound can be determined by measuring the absorption spectrum of the dye compound in chloroform using, for example, an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer "UV-2450" (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation).

 なお、本発明における「最大吸収波長」とは、測定して得られる色素化合物の紫外可視光吸収スペクトルにおいて、最大かつ極大の吸光度(吸収強度)を示す波長(nm)のことをいう。 In the present invention, the "maximum absorption wavelength" refers to the wavelength (nm) that shows the maximum and maximal absorbance (absorption intensity) in the ultraviolet-visible light absorption spectrum of the dye compound obtained by measurement.

 色素化合物は、単独で使用してもよく、二種以上を組み合わせて使用してもよい。また、第2樹脂層は、色素化合物を含有しても、しなくてもよい。
 色素化合物の含有量は、成膜成分としての上記樹脂の全質量に対して、0.01~10質量%の範囲内であることが好ましく、0.02~8質量%の範囲内であることがより好ましい。上記範囲内であることにより、樹脂層が、発光素子又は発光装置の発光に影響しない波長領域の光を十分に吸収でき、外光による発光素子又は発光装置の劣化を抑制できる。
The dye compounds may be used alone or in combination of two or more. The second resin layer may or may not contain a dye compound.
The content of the dye compound is preferably within a range of 0.01 to 10% by mass, and more preferably within a range of 0.02 to 8% by mass, based on the total mass of the resin as a film-forming component. By being within the above range, the resin layer can sufficiently absorb light in a wavelength range that does not affect the light emission of the light-emitting element or light-emitting device, and deterioration of the light-emitting element or light-emitting device due to external light can be suppressed.

 (2.1.3)可塑剤
 樹脂層は、可塑剤を含有することが好ましい。可塑剤を含有することにより、樹脂層の柔軟性や加工性を向上できる。可塑剤としては、例えば、ポリエステルが挙げられる。ポリエステルは、ジカルボン酸とジオールを重合することにより得られる。また、ジカルボン酸構成単位(ジカルボン酸に由来する構成単位)の70%以上が、芳香族ジカルボン酸に由来し、かつジオール構成単位(ジオールに由来する構成単位)の70%以上が、脂肪族ジオールに由来することが好ましい。
(2.1.3) Plasticizer The resin layer preferably contains a plasticizer. By containing a plasticizer, the flexibility and processability of the resin layer can be improved. Examples of the plasticizer include polyester. The polyester is obtained by polymerizing a dicarboxylic acid and a diol. In addition, it is preferable that 70% or more of the dicarboxylic acid constitutional units (constituent units derived from a dicarboxylic acid) are derived from an aromatic dicarboxylic acid, and 70% or more of the diol constitutional units (constituent units derived from a diol) are derived from an aliphatic diol.

 芳香族ジカルボン酸に由来する構成単位の割合は、70%以上であることが好ましく、80%以上であることが好ましく、90%以上であることが更に好ましい。脂肪族ジオールに由来する構成単位の割合は、70%以上であることが好ましく、80%以上であることがより好ましく、90%以上であることが更に好ましい。ポリエステルは、一種単独で含有しても、二種以上を含有してもよい。 The proportion of structural units derived from aromatic dicarboxylic acids is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, and even more preferably 90% or more. The proportion of structural units derived from aliphatic diols is preferably 70% or more, more preferably 80% or more, and even more preferably 90% or more. The polyester may be contained alone or in combination of two or more types.

 芳香族ジカルボン酸としては、例えば、テレフタル酸;イソフタル酸;2,6-ナフタレンジカルボン酸、1,5-ナフタレンジカルボン酸、2,7-ナフタレンジカルボン酸等のナフタレンジカルボン酸;4,4′-ビフェニルジカルボン酸;3,4′-ビフェニルジカルボン酸等;及びこれらのエステル形成性誘導体が挙げられる。 Examples of aromatic dicarboxylic acids include terephthalic acid; isophthalic acid; naphthalenedicarboxylic acids such as 2,6-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, 1,5-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid, and 2,7-naphthalenedicarboxylic acid; 4,4'-biphenyldicarboxylic acid; 3,4'-biphenyldicarboxylic acid; and ester-forming derivatives thereof.

 ポリエステルには、本発明の目的を損なわない範囲で、アジピン酸、アゼライン酸、セバシン酸等の脂肪族ジカルボン酸や、安息香酸、プロピオン酸、酪酸等のモノカルボン酸を用いてもよい。  Aliphatic dicarboxylic acids such as adipic acid, azelaic acid, and sebacic acid, and monocarboxylic acids such as benzoic acid, propionic acid, and butyric acid may be used for the polyester, as long as the object of the present invention is not impaired.

 脂肪族ジオールとしては、例えば、エチレングリコール、1,3-プロピレンジオール、1,4-ブタンジオール、1,4-シクロヘキサンジメタノール、1,6-ヘキサンジオール等及びこれらのエステル形成性誘導体が挙げられる。 Examples of aliphatic diols include ethylene glycol, 1,3-propylene diol, 1,4-butanediol, 1,4-cyclohexanedimethanol, 1,6-hexanediol, and ester-forming derivatives thereof.

 ポリエステルには、本発明の目的を損なわない範囲で、ブチルアルコール、ヘキシルアルコール、オクチルアルコール等のモノアルコール類や、トリメチロールプロパン、グリセリン、ペンタエリスリトール等の多価アルコール類を用いてもよい。  For the polyester, monoalcohols such as butyl alcohol, hexyl alcohol, octyl alcohol, etc., and polyhydric alcohols such as trimethylolpropane, glycerin, pentaerythritol, etc. may be used as long as the object of the present invention is not impaired.

 ポリエステルの合成は、公知の方法である直接エステル化法や、エステル交換法を適用できる。ポリエステルの合成時に使用する重縮合触媒としては、公知の三酸化アンチモン、五酸化アンチモン等のアンチモン化合物;酸化ゲルマニウム等のゲルマニウム化合物;酢酸チタン等のチタン化合物;塩化アルミニウム等のアルミニウム化合物等が挙げられる。ただし、重縮合触媒は、これらに限定されない。  Polyesters can be synthesized by known methods such as direct esterification and transesterification. Polycondensation catalysts used in polyester synthesis include known antimony compounds such as antimony trioxide and antimony pentoxide; germanium compounds such as germanium oxide; titanium compounds such as titanium acetate; and aluminum compounds such as aluminum chloride. However, polycondensation catalysts are not limited to these.

 好ましいポリエステルとしては、ポリエチレンテレフタレート、ポリエチレンテレフタレート-イソフタレート共重合体、ポリエチレン-1,4-シクロヘキサンジメチレン-テレフタレート共重合体、ポリエチレン-2,6-ナフタレンジカルボキレート、ポリエチレン-2,6-ナフタレンジカルボキシレート-テレフタレート共重合体、ポリエチレン-テレフタレート-4,4′-ビフェニルジカルボキシレート、ポリ-1,3-プロピレン-テレフタレート、ポリブチレンテレフタレート、ポリブチレン-2,6-ナフタレンジカルボキシレート等が挙げられる。 Preferred polyesters include polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene terephthalate-isophthalate copolymer, polyethylene-1,4-cyclohexanedimethylene-terephthalate copolymer, polyethylene-2,6-naphthalene dicarboxylate, polyethylene-2,6-naphthalene dicarboxylate-terephthalate copolymer, polyethylene-terephthalate-4,4'-biphenyl dicarboxylate, poly-1,3-propylene terephthalate, polybutylene terephthalate, polybutylene-2,6-naphthalene dicarboxylate, etc.

 より好ましいポリエステルとしては、ポリエチレンテレフタレート、ポリエチレンテレフタレート-イソフタレート共重合体、ポリエチレン-1,4-シクロヘキサンジメチレン-テレフタレート共重合体、ポリブチレンテレフタレート及びポリエチレン-2,6-ナフタレンジカルボキシレートが挙げられる。 More preferred polyesters include polyethylene terephthalate, polyethylene terephthalate-isophthalate copolymer, polyethylene-1,4-cyclohexanedimethylene-terephthalate copolymer, polybutylene terephthalate, and polyethylene-2,6-naphthalenedicarboxylate.

 可塑剤の含有量は、成膜成分としての上記樹脂の全質量に対して、0~35質量%の範囲内であることが好ましく、5~30質量%の範囲内であることがより好ましい。 The plasticizer content is preferably within the range of 0 to 35% by mass, and more preferably within the range of 5 to 30% by mass, relative to the total mass of the resin as a film-forming component.

 (2.1.4)紫外線吸収剤
 樹脂層は、必要に応じて、紫外線吸収剤を含有してもよい。紫外線吸収剤を含有することにより、樹脂層の紫外線領域における光の吸収率を更に向上できる。
(2.1.4) Ultraviolet Absorber The resin layer may contain an ultraviolet absorber, if necessary. By containing an ultraviolet absorber, the light absorptance of the resin layer in the ultraviolet region can be further improved.

 本発明において、「紫外線吸収剤」とは、少なくとも光波長400nm以下の紫外線を吸収する機能を有する化合物をいう。上記吸収特性を有するものであれば、紫外線吸収剤は、特に制限されない。中でも、本発明において使用する紫外線吸収剤は、300~460nmの波長領域の紫外可視光吸収スペクトルにおいて、最大吸収波長が、300~359nmの範囲内に存在する化合物であることが好ましい。 In the present invention, the term "ultraviolet light absorber" refers to a compound that has the function of absorbing ultraviolet light with a wavelength of at least 400 nm or less. There are no particular limitations on the ultraviolet light absorber as long as it has the above absorption characteristics. In particular, the ultraviolet light absorber used in the present invention is preferably a compound whose maximum absorption wavelength is in the range of 300 to 359 nm in the ultraviolet-visible light absorption spectrum in the wavelength region of 300 to 460 nm.

 紫外線吸収剤としては、例えば、トリアジン系紫外線吸収剤、ベンゾトリアゾール系紫外線吸収剤、ベンゾフェノン系紫外線吸収剤、オキシベンゾフェノン系紫外線吸収剤、サリチル酸エステル系紫外線吸収剤、シアノアクリレート系紫外線吸収剤等が挙げられる。これらを、一種単独で含有しても、二種以上を含有してもよい。 Examples of ultraviolet absorbents include triazine-based ultraviolet absorbents, benzotriazole-based ultraviolet absorbents, benzophenone-based ultraviolet absorbents, oxybenzophenone-based ultraviolet absorbents, salicylic acid ester-based ultraviolet absorbents, and cyanoacrylate-based ultraviolet absorbents. These may be contained alone or in combination of two or more.

 中でも、トリアジン系紫外線吸収剤、又はベンゾトリアゾール系紫外線吸収剤であることが好ましい。また、1分子中にヒドロキシ基を2個以下有するトリアジン系紫外線吸収剤、又は1分子中にベンゾトリアゾール骨格を1個有するベンゾトリアゾール系紫外線吸収剤であることが好ましい。 Among them, triazine-based UV absorbers or benzotriazole-based UV absorbers are preferable. Also, triazine-based UV absorbers having two or less hydroxyl groups per molecule or benzotriazole-based UV absorbers having one benzotriazole skeleton per molecule are preferable.

 これらの紫外線吸収剤は、上記樹脂との溶解性が良好である。また、これらの紫外線吸収剤は、波長380nm付近での紫外線吸収能力が高い。 These UV absorbents have good solubility with the above resins. In addition, these UV absorbents have high UV absorption capabilities at wavelengths around 380 nm.

 1分子中にヒドロキシ基を2個以下有するトリアジン系紫外線吸収剤としては、例えば、2,4-ビス-[{4-(4-エチルヘキシルオキシ)-4-ヒドロキシ}-フェニル]-6-(4-メトキシフェニル)-1,3,5-トリアジン(「Tinosorb(登録商標)S」(BASF社製))、2,4-ビス[2-ヒドロキシ-4-ブトキシフェニル]-6-(2,4-ジブトキシフェニル)-1,3,5-トリアジン(「TINUVIN(登録商標)460」(BASF社製))、2-(4,6-ビス(2,4-ジメチルフェニル)-1,3,5-トリアジン-2-イル)-5-ヒドロキシフェニルと[(C10-C16(主としてC12-C13)アルキルオキシ)メチル]オキシランとの反応生成物(「TINUVIN(登録商標)400」(BASF社製))、2-[4,6-ビス(2,4-ジメチルフェニル)-1,3,5-トリアジン-2-イル]-5-[3-(ドデシルオキシ)-2-ヒドロキシプロポキシ]フェノール)、2-(2,4-ジヒドロキシフェニル)-4,6-ビス-(2,4-ジメチルフェニル)-1,3,5-トリアジンと(2-エチルヘキシル)-グリシド酸エステルの反応生成物(「TINUVIN(登録商標)405」(BASF社製))、2-(4,6-ジフェニル-1,3,5-トリアジン-2-イル)-5-[(ヘキシル)オキシ]-フェノール(「TINUVIN(登録商標)1577」(BASF社製))、2-(4,6-ジフェニル-1,3,5-トリアジン-2-イル)-5-[2-(2-エチルヘキサノイルオキシ)エトキシ]-フェノール(「ADK STAB LA46」(株式会社ADEKA製))、2-(2-ヒドロキシ-4-[1-オクチルオキシカルボニルエトキシ]フェニル)-4,6-ビス(4-フェニルフェニル)-1,3,5-トリアジン(「TINUVIN(登録商標)479」(BASF社製))、6,6′,6′′-(1,3,5-トリアジン-2,4,6-トリイル)トリス(3-ヘキシルオキシ-2-メチルフェノール)(「LA-F70」(株式会社ADEKA製))等が挙げられる。 Examples of triazine-based UV absorbers having two or less hydroxy groups in one molecule include 2,4-bis-[{4-(4-ethylhexyloxy)-4-hydroxy}-phenyl]-6-(4-methoxyphenyl)-1,3,5-triazine ("Tinosorb (registered trademark) S" (BASF Corporation)), 2,4-bis[2-hydroxy-4-butoxyphenyl]-6-(2,4-dibutoxyphenyl)-1,3,5-triazine ("TINUVIN (registered trademark) 460" (BASF Corporation)), 2- (4,6-bis(2,4-dimethylphenyl)-1,3,5-triazin-2-yl)-5-hydroxyphenyl and [(C10-C16 (mainly C12-C13) alkyloxy)methyl]oxirane reaction products ("TINUVIN (registered trademark) 400" (BASF Corporation)), 2-[4,6-bis(2,4-dimethylphenyl)-1,3,5-triazin-2-yl]-5-[3-(dodecyloxy)-2-hydroxypropoxy]phenol), 2-(2,4-dihydroxyphenyl)-4 Reaction products of 2-(4,6-diphenyl-1,3,5-triazine and (2-ethylhexyl)-glycidic acid ester ("TINUVIN (registered trademark) 405" (BASF Corporation)), 2-(4,6-diphenyl-1,3,5-triazine-2-yl)-5-[(hexyl)oxy]-phenol ("TINUVIN (registered trademark) 1577" (BASF Corporation)), 2-(4,6-diphenyl-1,3,5-triazine-2-yl)-5-[2-(2-ethylhexanoyloxy)ethoxy] Examples include 6,6',6''-(1,3,5-triazine-2,4,6-triyl)tris(3-hexyloxy-2-methylphenol) (LA-F70, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation), 2-(2-hydroxy-4-[1-octyloxycarbonylethoxy]phenyl)-4,6-bis(4-phenylphenyl)-1,3,5-triazine (TINUVIN (registered trademark) 479, manufactured by BASF Corporation), and 6,6',6''-(1,3,5-triazine-2,4,6-triyl)tris(3-hexyloxy-2-methylphenol) (LA-F70, manufactured by ADEKA Corporation).

 また、1分子中にベンゾトリアゾール骨格を1個有するベンゾトリアゾール系紫外線吸収剤としては、例えば、2-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-6-(1-メチル-1-フェニルエチル)-4-(1,1,3,3-テトラメチルブチル)フェノール(「TINUVIN(登録商標)928」(BASF社製))、2-(2-ヒドロキシ-5-tert-ブチルフェニル)-2H-ベンゾトリアゾール(「TINUVIN(登録商標)PS」(BASF社製))、ベンゼンプロパン酸及び3-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-5-(1,1-ジメチルエチル)-4-ヒドロキシ(C7-9側鎖及び直鎖アルキル)のエステル化合物(「TINUVIN(登録商標)384-2」(BASF社製))、2-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-4,6-ビス(1-メチル-1-フェニルエチル)フェノール(「TINUVIN(登録商標)900」(BASF社製))、メチル-3-(3-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-5-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオネート/ポリエチレングリコール300の反応生成物(「TINUVIN(登録商標)1130」(BASF社製))、2-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-p-クレゾール(「TINUVIN(登録商標)P」(BASF社製))、2(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-4-6-ビス(1-メチル-1-フェニルエチル)フェノール(「TINUVIN(登録商標)234」(BASF社製))、2-〔5-クロロ(2H)-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル〕-4-メチル-6-(tert-ブチル)フェノール(「TINUVIN(登録商標)326」(BASF社製))、2-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-4,6-ジ-tert-ペンチルフェノール(「TINUVIN(登録商標)328」(BASF社製))、2-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-4-(1,1,3,3-テトラメチルブチル)フェノール(「TINUVIN(登録商標)329」(BASF社製))、メチル3-(3-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-5-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオネートとポリエチレングリコール300との反応生成物(「TINUVIN(登録商標)213」(BASF社製))、2-(2H-ベンゾトリアゾール-2-イル)-6-ドデシル-4-メチルフェノール(「TINUVIN(登録商標)571」(BASF社製))、2-[2-ヒドロキシ-3-(3、4、5,6-テトラヒドロフタルイミドーメチル)-5-メチルフェニル]ベンゾトリアゾール(「Sumisorb(登録商標)250」(住友化学工業株式会社製))、2-(2-ヒドロキシ-3-tert-ブチル-5-メチルフェニル)-5-クロロベンゾトリアゾール(「SeeSorb(登録商標)703」(シプロ化成株式会社製)、又は「KEMISORB(登録商標)73」(シプロ化成株式会社製))等が挙げられる。 Furthermore, examples of benzotriazole-based ultraviolet absorbers having one benzotriazole skeleton per molecule include 2-(2H-benzotriazole-2-yl)-6-(1-methyl-1-phenylethyl)-4-(1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl)phenol ("TINUVIN (registered trademark) 928" (BASF Corporation)), 2-(2-hydroxy-5-tert-butylphenyl)-2H-benzotriazole ("TINUVIN (registered trademark) PS" (BASF Corporation)), and an ester compound of benzenepropanoic acid and 3-(2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)-5-(1,1-dimethylethyl)-4-hydroxy (C7-9 side chain and linear alkyl) ("TINUVIN (registered trademark) 384-2"). (manufactured by BASF)), 2-(2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)-4,6-bis(1-methyl-1-phenylethyl)phenol ("TINUVIN (registered trademark) 900" (manufactured by BASF)), reaction product of methyl-3-(3-(2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)-5-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propionate/polyethylene glycol 300 ("TINUVIN (registered trademark) 1130" (manufactured by BASF)), 2-(2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)-p-cresol ("TINUVIN (registered trademark) P" (manufactured by BASF)), 2(2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)-4,6-bis(1-methyl-1-phenylethyl)phenol ("TINUVIN (registered trademark) 34" (manufactured by BASF Corporation), 2-[5-chloro(2H)-benzotriazol-2-yl]-4-methyl-6-(tert-butyl)phenol ("TINUVIN (registered trademark) 326" (manufactured by BASF Corporation)), 2-(2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)-4,6-di-tert-pentylphenol ("TINUVIN (registered trademark) 328" (manufactured by BASF Corporation)), 2-(2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)-4-(1,1,3,3-tetramethylbutyl)phenol ("TINUVIN (registered trademark) 329" (manufactured by BASF Corporation)), methyl 3-(3-(2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)-5-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propionate and polyethylene glycol 300 and reaction product ("TINUVIN (registered trademark) 213" (manufactured by BASF)), 2-(2H-benzotriazol-2-yl)-6-dodecyl-4-methylphenol ("TINUVIN (registered trademark) 571" (manufactured by BASF)), 2-[2-hydroxy-3-(3,4,5,6-tetrahydrophthalimido-methyl)-5-methylphenyl]benzotriazole ("Sumisorb (registered trademark) 250" (manufactured by Sumitomo Chemical Co., Ltd.)), 2-(2-hydroxy-3-tert-butyl-5-methylphenyl)-5-chlorobenzotriazole ("SeeSorb (registered trademark) 703" (manufactured by Shipro Chemical Co., Ltd.), or "KEMISORB (registered trademark) 73" (manufactured by Shipro Chemical Co., Ltd.)).

 また、上記ベンゾフェノン系紫外線吸収剤(ベンゾフェノン系化合物)、オキシベンゾフェノン系紫外線吸収剤(オキシベンゾフェノン系化合物)としては、例えば、2,4-ジヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、2-ヒドロキシ-4-メトキシベンゾフェノン、2-ヒドロキシ-4-メトキシベンゾフェノン-5-スルホン酸(無水及び三水塩)、2-ヒドロキシ-4-オクチルオキシベンゾフェノン、4-ドデシルオキシ-2-ヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、4-ベンジルオキシ-2-ヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、2,2′,4,4′-テトラヒドロキシベンゾフェノン、2,2′-ジヒドロキシ-4,4-ジメトキシベンゾフェノン、2,2′,4,4′-テトラヒドロキシベンゾフェノン(「SeeSorb(登録商標)106」(シプロ化成株式会社製))、2,2′-ジヒドロキシ-4-メトキシベンゾフェノン(「KEMISORB(登録商標)111」(ケミプロ化成株式会社製))等が挙げられる。 Furthermore, examples of the benzophenone-based ultraviolet absorbers (benzophenone-based compounds) and oxybenzophenone-based ultraviolet absorbers (oxybenzophenone-based compounds) include 2,4-dihydroxybenzophenone, 2-hydroxy-4-methoxybenzophenone, 2-hydroxy-4-methoxybenzophenone-5-sulfonic acid (anhydrous and trihydrate), 2-hydroxy-4-octyloxybenzophenone, 4-dodecyloxy-2-hydroxybenzophenone, 4-benzyloxy-2-hydroxybenzophenone, 2,2',4,4'-tetrahydroxybenzophenone, 2,2'-dihydroxy-4,4-dimethoxybenzophenone, 2,2',4,4'-tetrahydroxybenzophenone ("SeeSorb (registered trademark) 106" (manufactured by Shipro Chemical Co., Ltd.)), 2,2'-dihydroxy-4-methoxybenzophenone ("KEMISORB (registered trademark) 111" (manufactured by Chemipro Chemical Co., Ltd.)), and the like.

 また、上記サリチル酸エステル系紫外線吸収剤(サリチル酸エステル系化合物)としては、例えば、フェニル-2-アクリロイルオキシベンゾエ-ト、フェニル-2-アクロリイルオキシ-3-メチルベンゾエ-ト、フェニル-2-アクリロイルオキシ-4-メチルベンゾエ-ト、フェニル-2-アクリロイルオキシ-5-メチルベンゾエ-ト、フェニル-2-アクリロイルオキシ-3-メトキシベンゾエ-ト、フェニル-2-ヒドロキシベンゾエ-ト、フェニル-2-ヒドロキシ-3-メチルベンゾエ-ト、フェニル-2-ヒドロキシ-4メチルベンゾエ-ト、フェニル-2-ヒドロキシ-5-メチルベンゾエ-ト、フェニル2-ヒドロキシ-3-メトキシベンゾエ-ト、2,4-ジ-tert-ブチルフェニル-3,5-ジ-tert-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシベンゾエート(「TINUVIN(登録商標)120」(BASF社製))等が挙げられる。 Furthermore, examples of the salicylic acid ester-based ultraviolet absorbers (salicylic acid ester-based compounds) include phenyl-2-acryloyloxybenzoate, phenyl-2-acryloyloxy-3-methylbenzoate, phenyl-2-acryloyloxy-4-methylbenzoate, phenyl-2-acryloyloxy-5-methylbenzoate, phenyl-2-acryloyloxy-3-methoxybenzoate, phenyl-2-hydroxybenzoate, phenyl-2-hydroxy-3-methylbenzoate, phenyl-2-hydroxy-4-methylbenzoate, phenyl-2-hydroxy-5-methylbenzoate, phenyl-2-hydroxy-3-methoxybenzoate, 2,4-di-tert-butylphenyl-3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxybenzoate ("TINUVIN (registered trademark) 120" (manufactured by BASF Corporation)), and the like.

 上記シアノアクリレート系紫外線吸収剤(シアノアクリレート系化合物)としては、例えば、アルキル-2-シアノアクリレート、シクロアルキル-2-シアノアクリレート、アルコキシアルキル-2-シアノアクリレート、アルケニル-2-シアノアクリレート、アルキニル-2-シアノアクリレート等が挙げられる。 Examples of the cyanoacrylate-based ultraviolet absorbers (cyanoacrylate-based compounds) include alkyl-2-cyanoacrylate, cycloalkyl-2-cyanoacrylate, alkoxyalkyl-2-cyanoacrylate, alkenyl-2-cyanoacrylate, and alkynyl-2-cyanoacrylate.

 紫外線吸収剤は、一種単独で含有しても、二種以上含有してもよい。
 紫外線吸収剤の含有量は、成膜成分としての上記樹脂の全質量に対して、0.1~8質量%の範囲内であることが好ましく、0.5~5質量%の範囲内であることがより好ましい。
The ultraviolet absorbing agent may be contained alone or in combination of two or more kinds.
The content of the ultraviolet absorber is preferably within a range of 0.1 to 8 mass %, and more preferably within a range of 0.5 to 5 mass %, based on the total mass of the resin as the film-forming component.

 上記範囲内であることにより、樹脂層の紫外線領域における光の吸収率を向上できる。その結果、積層体が、表示装置内の発光素子又は発光装置を外光(紫外線)から保護し、積層体を取り付けた際の表示装置の耐光性を向上できる。そして、長期に亘って表示装置の品質を保持できる。 By being within the above range, the light absorptance of the resin layer in the ultraviolet region can be improved. As a result, the laminate protects the light-emitting element or light-emitting device in the display device from external light (ultraviolet rays), and improves the light resistance of the display device when the laminate is attached. In addition, the quality of the display device can be maintained for a long period of time.

 (2.1.5)酸化防止剤
 樹脂層は、酸化防止剤を含有することが好ましい。酸化防止剤を含有することにより、樹脂層の劣化を抑制できる。具体的には、残留溶媒によるハロゲン、リン酸系可塑剤によるリン酸等により、樹脂層が分解するのを遅らせたり、防いだりすることができる。また、本発明においては、上記色素化合物と酸化防止剤とを併用することにより、樹脂層における光吸収波形を、よりシャープにできる。
(2.1.5) Antioxidant The resin layer preferably contains an antioxidant. By containing an antioxidant, deterioration of the resin layer can be suppressed. Specifically, decomposition of the resin layer due to halogens from residual solvents, phosphoric acid from phosphoric acid-based plasticizers, etc. can be delayed or prevented. In addition, in the present invention, the light absorption waveform in the resin layer can be made sharper by using the above-mentioned dye compound and an antioxidant in combination.

 酸化防止剤は、特に制限されないが、ヒンダートフェノール系化合物であることが好ましい。ヒンダートフェノール系化合物と上記色素化合物とは親和性が高い。そして、その相互作用によって、光吸収波形がよりシャープになり、長波長側の光吸収が抑えられ、発光素子又は発光装置の発光ロスを低減できる。 The antioxidant is not particularly limited, but is preferably a hindered phenol compound. Hindered phenol compounds have a high affinity with the dye compound. Their interaction makes the light absorption waveform sharper, suppresses light absorption on the long wavelength side, and reduces the light emission loss of the light emitting element or light emitting device.

 ヒンダードフェノール系の酸化防止剤としては、例えば、2,6-ジ-t-ブチル-p-クレゾール、ペンタエリスリチル-テトラキス〔3-(3,5-ジ-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオネート〕、トリエチレングリコール-ビス〔3-(3-t-ブチル-5-メチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオネート〕、1,6-ヘキサンジオール-ビス〔3-(3,5-ジ-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオネート〕、2,4-ビス-(n-オクチルチオ)-6-(4-ヒドロキシ-3,5-ジ-t-ブチルアニリノ)-1,3,5-トリアジン、2,2-チオ-ジエチレンビス〔3-(3,5-ジ-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオネート〕、オクタデシル-3-(3,5-ジ-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオネート、N,N′-ヘキサメチレンビス(3,5-ジ-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシ-ヒドロシンナマミド)、1,3,5-トリメチル-2,4,6-トリス(3,5-ジ-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシベンジル)ベンゼン、トリス-(3,5-ジ-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシベンジル)-イソシアヌレイト等が挙げられる。 Hindered phenol antioxidants include, for example, 2,6-di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pentaerythrityl-tetrakis[3-(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propionate], triethylene glycol-bis[3-(3-t-butyl-5-methyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propionate], 1,6-hexanediol-bis[3-(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propionate], 2,4-bis-(n-octylthio)-6-(4-hydroxy-3,5-di-t-butylanilino) -1,3,5-triazine, 2,2-thio-diethylenebis[3-(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propionate], octadecyl-3-(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propionate, N,N'-hexamethylenebis(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxy-hydrocinnamamide), 1,3,5-trimethyl-2,4,6-tris(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl)benzene, tris-(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxybenzyl)-isocyanurate, etc.

 中でも、2,6-ジ-t-ブチル-p-クレゾール、ペンタエリスリチル-テトラキス〔3-(3,5-ジ-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオネート〕、又はトリエチレングリコール-ビス〔3-(3-t-ブチル-5-メチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオネート〕であることが好ましい。また、例えば、N,N′-ビス〔3-(3,5-ジ-t-ブチル-4-ヒドロキシフェニル)プロピオニル〕ヒドラジン等のヒドラジン系の金属不活性剤や、トリス(2,4-ジ-t-ブチルフェニル)フォスファイト等のリン系加工安定剤を併用してもよい。 Among these, 2,6-di-t-butyl-p-cresol, pentaerythrityl-tetrakis[3-(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propionate], or triethylene glycol-bis[3-(3-t-butyl-5-methyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propionate] are preferred. In addition, for example, hydrazine-based metal deactivators such as N,N'-bis[3-(3,5-di-t-butyl-4-hydroxyphenyl)propionyl]hydrazine, or phosphorus-based processing stabilizers such as tris(2,4-di-t-butylphenyl)phosphite may be used in combination.

 ヒンダードフェノール系酸化防止剤としては、市販品を用いてもよい。市販品としては、例えば、「Irganox(登録商標)1076」及び「Irganox(登録商標)1010」(以上、BASFジャパン株式会社製)が挙げられる。 As the hindered phenol-based antioxidant, commercially available products may be used. Examples of commercially available products include "Irganox (registered trademark) 1076" and "Irganox (registered trademark) 1010" (both manufactured by BASF Japan Ltd.).

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000017

 酸化防止剤の含有量は、成膜成分としての上記樹脂の全質量に対して、5質量%以下であることが好ましく、2質量%以下であることがより好ましく、0.5~1質量%の範囲内であることが更に好ましい。 The content of the antioxidant is preferably 5% by mass or less, more preferably 2% by mass or less, and even more preferably within the range of 0.5 to 1% by mass, based on the total mass of the resin as a film-forming component.

 (2.1.6)微粒子
 樹脂層は、微粒子を含有することが好ましい。微粒子を含有することにより、発光素子又は発光装置の発光ロスを低減できる。また、樹脂層に滑り性を付与できる。
(2.1.6) Fine particles The resin layer preferably contains fine particles. By containing fine particles, the light emission loss of the light emitting element or the light emitting device can be reduced. In addition, slipperiness can be imparted to the resin layer.

 微粒子は、無機化合物であっても、有機化合物であってもよい。
 無機化合物の例としては、二酸化ケイ素、二酸化チタン、酸化アルミニウム、酸化ジルコニウム、炭酸カルシウム、タルク、クレイ、焼成カオリン、焼成ケイ酸カルシウム、水和ケイ酸カルシウム、ケイ酸アルミニウム、ケイ酸マグネシウム及びリン酸カルシウム等が挙げられる。
The fine particles may be of an inorganic compound or an organic compound.
Examples of inorganic compounds include silicon dioxide, titanium dioxide, aluminum oxide, zirconium oxide, calcium carbonate, talc, clay, calcined kaolin, calcined calcium silicate, hydrated calcium silicate, aluminum silicate, magnesium silicate, and calcium phosphate.

 有機化合物の例としては、ポリテトラフルオロエチレン、セルロースアセテート、ポリスチレン、ポリメチルメタクリレート、ポリプロピルメタクリレート、ポリメチルアクリレート、ポリエチレンカーボネート、スチレン-アクリル系樹脂、シリコーン系樹脂、ポリカーボネート、ベンゾグアナミン系樹脂、メラミン系樹脂、ポリオレフィン、ポリエステル、ポリアミド、ポリイミド、ポリフッ化エチレン等が挙げられる。また、澱粉等の有機高分子化合物の粉砕分級物が挙げられる。 Examples of organic compounds include polytetrafluoroethylene, cellulose acetate, polystyrene, polymethyl methacrylate, polypropyl methacrylate, polymethyl acrylate, polyethylene carbonate, styrene-acrylic resins, silicone resins, polycarbonate, benzoguanamine resins, melamine resins, polyolefins, polyesters, polyamides, polyimides, and polyethylene fluoride. Other examples include crushed fractions of organic polymer compounds such as starch.

 その他、微粒子としては、懸濁重合法で合成した高分子化合物、スプレードライ法、分散法等により球型にした高分子化合物や無機化合物が挙げられる。 Other examples of fine particles include polymer compounds synthesized by suspension polymerization, polymer compounds made spherical by spray drying or dispersion methods, and inorganic compounds.

 微粒子の一次粒子の平均粒径は、5~400nmの範囲内であることが好ましく、10~300nmの範囲内であることがより好ましい。 The average particle size of the primary particles of the microparticles is preferably within the range of 5 to 400 nm, and more preferably within the range of 10 to 300 nm.

 微粒子は、主に、粒径0.05~0.3μmの範囲内の二次凝集体として、樹脂層に含有されていてもよい。微粒子の一次粒子の平均粒径が、100~400nmの範囲内であれば、微粒子は、凝集せずに一次粒子として含有されていてもよい。 The fine particles may be contained in the resin layer mainly as secondary aggregates with a particle size in the range of 0.05 to 0.3 μm. If the average particle size of the primary particles of the fine particles is in the range of 100 to 400 nm, the fine particles may be contained as primary particles without agglomeration.

 樹脂層の濁度を低下させる観点から、微粒子はケイ素を含有することが好ましく、特に二酸化ケイ素を含有することが好ましい。二酸化ケイ素の微粒子の市販品は、例えば、「アエロジル(登録商標)R972、R972V、R974、R812、200、200V、300、R202、OX50、TT600」(以上、日本アエロジル(株)製)が挙げられる。 From the viewpoint of reducing the turbidity of the resin layer, it is preferable that the fine particles contain silicon, and it is particularly preferable that they contain silicon dioxide. Examples of commercially available silicon dioxide fine particles include "Aerosil (registered trademark) R972, R972V, R974, R812, 200, 200V, 300, R202, OX50, and TT600" (all manufactured by Nippon Aerosil Co., Ltd.).

 ケイ素を含有する微粒子は、上記色素化合物との親和性が高い。ケイ素を含有する微粒子と上記色素化合物を併用することにより、樹脂層における光吸収波形をよりシャープにできる。そして、長波長側の光吸収が抑えられ、発光素子又は発光装置の発光ロスを低減できる。ケイ素を含有する微粒子としては、中でも、上記「アエロジル(登録商標)R812又はR972」であることが好ましい。これらの疎水性の高い微粒子と上記色素化合物とは親和性が高く、その相互作用によって、発光素子又は発光装置の発光ロスをより低減できる。 Silicon-containing microparticles have a high affinity with the dye compound. By using silicon-containing microparticles in combination with the dye compound, the light absorption waveform in the resin layer can be made sharper. Furthermore, light absorption on the long wavelength side is suppressed, and the luminescence loss of the light-emitting element or light-emitting device can be reduced. As the silicon-containing microparticles, the above-mentioned "Aerosil (registered trademark) R812 or R972" is particularly preferable. These highly hydrophobic microparticles have a high affinity with the dye compound, and the interaction between them can further reduce the luminescence loss of the light-emitting element or light-emitting device.

 これらの微粒子は、一種単独で含有しても、二種以上を含有してもよい。
 微粒子の含有量は、成膜成分としての上記樹脂の全質量に対して、10質量%以下であることが好ましく、5質量%以下であることがより好ましく、0.5~2質量%の範囲内であることが更に好ましい。
These fine particles may be contained alone or in combination of two or more kinds.
The content of the fine particles is preferably 10% by mass or less, more preferably 5% by mass or less, and further preferably within the range of 0.5 to 2% by mass, based on the total mass of the resin as the film-forming component.

 微粒子の添加は、インライン添加による混合を行うことが好ましい。インラインミキサーとしては、スタチックミキサーが挙げられる。また、スタチックミキサーとしては、例えば、静止型管内混合器「Hi-Mixer SWJ型」(東レエンジニアリング株式会社製)が挙げられる。 The addition of fine particles is preferably performed by in-line addition and mixing. An example of an in-line mixer is a static mixer. Another example of a static mixer is the static in-pipe mixer "Hi-Mixer SWJ type" (manufactured by Toray Engineering Co., Ltd.).

 (2.1.7)その他の添加剤
 樹脂層は、必要に応じて、粒子(ゴム粒子、金属酸化物粒子等)、繊維(針状粒子、セルロースナノファイバー等)、帯電防止剤、剥離剤、増粘剤等のその他の添加剤を、更に含有してもよい。
(2.1.7) Other Additives The resin layer may further contain other additives, such as particles (rubber particles, metal oxide particles, etc.), fibers (acicular particles, cellulose nanofibers, etc.), antistatic agents, release agents, thickeners, etc., as necessary.

 (2.2)樹脂層の作製方法
 樹脂層の作製方法は、特に制限されないが、着色抑制、異物欠点の抑制、ダイラインなどの光学欠点を抑制する観点から、溶液流延法又は溶融流延法であることが好ましい。中でも、加工工程での温度が低く、種々の添加剤を添加できる観点から、溶液流延法であることが好ましい。
(2.2) Method for Producing Resin Layer The method for producing the resin layer is not particularly limited, but is preferably a solution casting method or a melt casting method from the viewpoints of suppressing coloration, foreign matter defects, and optical defects such as die lines, etc. Among these, the solution casting method is preferred from the viewpoints of low temperature in the processing step and the ability to add various additives.

 溶液流延法では、樹脂、溶媒、及び任意の他の成分を含有するドープを調製した後、当該ドープを基材に流延し、その後乾燥し、樹脂層を得る。 In the solution casting method, a dope containing resin, solvent, and any other ingredients is prepared, and then the dope is cast onto a substrate and then dried to obtain a resin layer.

 溶液流延法による樹脂層の作製方法について説明する。特に、成膜成分としての樹脂がセルロースエステルである場合、下記の作製方法を用いることが好ましい。その他の樹脂については、従来公知の方法を用いることができる。 The method for producing a resin layer using the solution casting method is described below. In particular, when the resin used as the film-forming component is cellulose ester, it is preferable to use the following production method. For other resins, conventionally known methods can be used.

 本明細書において、樹脂層の作製方法の説明において、流延膜のことを「ウェブ」ともいう。また、ウェブを乾燥し、溶媒をある程度除去したものを「フィルム」ともいう。 In this specification, when explaining the method for producing the resin layer, the cast membrane is also called a "web." In addition, the web that has been dried and has had some of the solvent removed is also called a "film."

 (2.2.1)ドープを調製する工程
 ドープを調製する工程について述べる。ドープ中の樹脂の濃度は、濃い方が金属支持体に流延した後の乾燥負荷が低減できて好ましい。ただし、セルロースエステルの濃度が濃過ぎると濾過時の負荷が増えて、濾過精度が悪くなる。これらを両立する濃度としては、10~35質量%の範囲内であることが好ましく、15~25質量%の範囲内であることが好ましい。
(2.2.1) Dope Preparation Process The dope preparation process will be described. The higher the concentration of the resin in the dope, the lower the drying load after casting on the metal support, which is preferable. However, if the concentration of the cellulose ester is too high, the load during filtration increases, and the filtration accuracy deteriorates. The concentration that satisfies both of these conditions is preferably within the range of 10 to 35% by mass, and more preferably within the range of 15 to 25% by mass.

 ドープに含有される溶剤は、一種単独であっても、二種以上であってもよい。セルロースエステルの良溶剤と貧溶剤を混合して使用することが、生産効率の観点で好ましい。良溶剤としては、例えば、メチレンクロライド又は酢酸メチルが挙げられる。貧溶剤としては、例えば、メタノール、エタノール、n-ブタノール、シクロヘキサン、シクロヘキサノン等が挙げられる。 The solvent contained in the dope may be one type alone or two or more types. It is preferable to use a mixture of a good solvent and a poor solvent for cellulose ester from the viewpoint of production efficiency. Examples of good solvents include methylene chloride and methyl acetate. Examples of poor solvents include methanol, ethanol, n-butanol, cyclohexane, cyclohexanone, etc.

 ドープ中には、水が、0.01~2質量%の範囲内で含有していることが好ましい。後述する製膜の工程で、乾燥により流延膜から除去された溶媒を回収し、これを再利用して、セルロースエステルの溶解に用いてもよい。 The dope preferably contains water in the range of 0.01 to 2% by mass. In the film-forming process described below, the solvent removed from the casting film by drying may be recovered and reused to dissolve the cellulose ester.

 ドープを調製する際のセルロースエステルの溶解方法としては、一般的な方法を用いることができる。加熱と加圧を組み合わせると、常圧における沸点以上に加熱できる。
 また、ドープを調製する際の色素化合物等の溶解又は分散方法としては、一般的な方法を用いることができる。
The cellulose ester can be dissolved in a dope by any of the conventional methods. By combining heating and pressure, the cellulose ester can be heated to a temperature equal to or higher than the boiling point at normal pressure.
In preparing the dope, the dye compound and the like can be dissolved or dispersed by a general method.

 次に、セルロースエステル溶液を、濾紙等の適当な濾過材を用いて濾過する。濾過材としては、絶対濾過精度が、0.008mm以下であることが好ましく、0.001~0.008mmの範囲内であることがより好ましく、0.003~0.006mmの範囲内であることが更に好ましい。 Then, the cellulose ester solution is filtered using a suitable filter material such as filter paper. The filter material preferably has an absolute filtration accuracy of 0.008 mm or less, more preferably within the range of 0.001 to 0.008 mm, and even more preferably within the range of 0.003 to 0.006 mm.

 濾過材は、特に制限はなく、通常の濾過材を使用することができる。濾過材は、例えば、ポリプロピレン、テフロン(登録商標)等のプラスチック製や、ステンレススティール等の金属製であることが、繊維の脱落等がなく好ましい。 There are no particular limitations on the filter material, and any ordinary filter material can be used. Filter materials made of plastics such as polypropylene and Teflon (registered trademark), or metals such as stainless steel, are preferred as they are less susceptible to fiber shedding.

 ドープの濾過は、通常の方法で行うことができる。例えば、濾過の温度は、溶剤の常圧での沸点以上であり、且つ加圧下で溶剤が沸騰しない範囲であることが好ましい。加熱しながら濾過することにより、濾過前後における濾圧の差(差圧)の上昇を小さくできる。濾過の温度は、45~120℃の範囲内であることが好ましく、45~70℃の範囲内であることがより好ましく、45~55℃の範囲内であることが更に好ましい。 The dope can be filtered by a normal method. For example, the filtration temperature is preferably equal to or higher than the boiling point of the solvent at normal pressure, and is in a range in which the solvent does not boil under pressure. By filtering while heating, the increase in the difference in filtration pressure (differential pressure) before and after filtration can be reduced. The filtration temperature is preferably within the range of 45 to 120°C, more preferably within the range of 45 to 70°C, and even more preferably within the range of 45 to 55°C.

 濾圧は小さい方が好ましい。濾圧は、1.6MPa以下であることが好ましく、1.2MPa以下であることがより好ましく、1.0MPa以下であることが更に好ましい。 The smaller the filtration pressure, the better. The filtration pressure is preferably 1.6 MPa or less, more preferably 1.2 MPa or less, and even more preferably 1.0 MPa or less.

 (2.2.2)ドープを支持体上に流延し、流延膜を形成する工程
 次いで、ドープの流延について説明する。
(2.2.2) Step of casting the dope onto the support to form a casting film Next, the casting of the dope will be described.

 流延(キャスト)工程における金属支持体は、表面を鏡面仕上げしたものであることが好ましい。金属支持体としては、例えば、ステンレススティールベルト、又は鋳物で表面をメッキ仕上げしたドラムであることが好ましい。キャストの幅は、1~4mの範囲内であることが好ましい。 The metal support used in the casting process is preferably one with a mirror-finished surface. The metal support is preferably, for example, a stainless steel belt or a cast drum with a plated surface. The casting width is preferably within the range of 1 to 4 m.

 流延工程の金属支持体の表面温度は、-50℃以上、溶剤の沸点未満であることが好ましく、0~40℃の範囲内であることがより好ましく、5~30℃の範囲内であることが更に好ましい。 The surface temperature of the metal support during the casting process is preferably -50°C or higher and lower than the boiling point of the solvent, more preferably within the range of 0 to 40°C, and even more preferably within the range of 5 to 30°C.

 樹脂層が良好な平面性を示す観点から、金属支持体から流延膜(ウェブ)を剥離する際の残留溶媒量は、10~150質量%の範囲内であることが好ましい。また、20~40質量%の範囲内又は60~130質量%の範囲内であることがより好ましい。そして、20~30質量%の範囲内又は70~120質量%の範囲内であることが更に好ましい。 In order for the resin layer to have good planarity, the amount of residual solvent when the casting film (web) is peeled off from the metal support is preferably within the range of 10 to 150% by mass. It is more preferably within the range of 20 to 40% by mass or within the range of 60 to 130% by mass. And it is even more preferably within the range of 20 to 30% by mass or within the range of 70 to 120% by mass.

 本発明において、残留溶媒量は下記式で定義される。 In the present invention, the amount of residual solvent is defined by the following formula:

 残留溶媒量(質量%)={(M-N)/N}×100
 なお、Mは、ウェブ又はフィルムを製造中、若しくは製造後の、任意の時点で採取した試料の質量である。Nは、Mを115℃で1時間の加熱後の質量である。
Residual Solvent Amount (% by mass)={(M−N)/N}×100
Here, M is the mass of a sample taken at any time during or after the production of the web or film, and N is the mass of M after heating at 115° C. for 1 hour.

 (2.2.3)流延膜を支持体上から剥離する工程
 流延膜(ウェブ)を金属支持体より剥離する。ウェブを金属支持体から剥離する方法は、公知の方法を用いることができる。
(2.2.3) Step of peeling off the cast film from the support The cast film (web) is peeled off from the metal support. As a method for peeling off the web from the metal support, a known method can be used.

 (2.2.4)流延膜を乾燥させる工程
 樹脂層の乾燥工程においては、金属支持体より剥離した流延膜(ウェブ)を、更に乾燥させる。残留溶媒量は、1質量%以下であることが好ましく、0.1質量%以下であることがより好ましく、0~0.01質量%の範囲内であることが更に好ましい。
(2.2.4) Step of drying the cast film In the step of drying the resin layer, the cast film (web) peeled off from the metal support is further dried. The residual solvent content is preferably 1% by mass or less, more preferably 0.1% by mass or less, and further preferably in the range of 0 to 0.01% by mass.

 ウェブの乾燥工程では、一般にロール乾燥方式や、テンター方式でウェブを搬送させながら乾燥する方式が用いられる。ロール乾燥方式では、上下に配置した多数のロールに、ウェブを交互に通し、乾燥させる。 The web drying process generally involves the roll drying method or the tenter method, which dries the web while transporting it. With the roll drying method, the web is dried by passing it alternately through multiple rolls arranged above and below.

 ウェブは、金属支持体より剥離した直後の、ウェブ中の残留溶媒量の多いところで、長手方向(MD方向)に延伸することが好ましい。また、ウェブの両端をクリップ等で把持するテンター方式で、幅手方向(TD方向)に延伸することが好ましい。 The web is preferably stretched in the longitudinal direction (MD) immediately after peeling from the metal support, where the amount of residual solvent in the web is large. It is also preferable to stretch the web in the transverse direction (TD) using a tenter method in which both ends of the web are held by clips or the like.

 ウェブを乾燥させる手段は、特に制限されず、一般的に、熱風、赤外線、加熱ロール、マイクロ波等が挙げられる。簡便さの観点から、熱風で行うことが好ましい。 There are no particular limitations on the means for drying the web, and typical methods include hot air, infrared rays, heated rolls, microwaves, etc. From the standpoint of simplicity, it is preferable to use hot air.

 ウェブの乾燥工程における乾燥温度は、90~200℃の範囲内であることが好ましく、110~190℃の範囲内であることがより好ましい。乾燥温度は、段階的に高くしていくことが好ましい。 The drying temperature in the web drying process is preferably in the range of 90 to 200°C, and more preferably in the range of 110 to 190°C. It is preferable to increase the drying temperature in stages.

 好ましい乾燥時間は、乾燥温度にもよるが、5~60分の範囲内であることが好ましく、10~30分の範囲内であることがより好ましい。 The preferred drying time depends on the drying temperature, but is preferably within the range of 5 to 60 minutes, and more preferably within the range of 10 to 30 minutes.

 フィルムの厚さは、特に限定されず、10~200μmの範囲内であることが好ましく、10~100μmの範囲内であることがより好ましく、20~60μmの範囲内であることが好ましい。 The thickness of the film is not particularly limited, but is preferably within the range of 10 to 200 μm, more preferably within the range of 10 to 100 μm, and more preferably within the range of 20 to 60 μm.

 フィルムの幅は、1~4mの範囲内であることが好ましい。生産性の観点から、幅は、1.6~4mの範囲内であることが好ましく、1.8~3.6mの範囲内であることがより好ましい。 The width of the film is preferably within the range of 1 to 4 m. From the viewpoint of productivity, the width is preferably within the range of 1.6 to 4 m, and more preferably within the range of 1.8 to 3.6 m.

 (2.2.5)フィルムを延伸する工程
 延伸操作は、フィルムの長手方向(MD方向)、及び幅手方向(TD方向)に対して、逐次又は同時に行うことができる。互いに直交する2軸方向の延伸倍率は、それぞれ最終的にはMD方向に1.0~2.0倍、TD方向に1.07~2.0倍の範囲内であることが好ましい。また、MD方向に1.0~1.5倍、TD方向に1.07~2.0倍の範囲内であることが好ましい。
(2.2.5) Step of Stretching the Film The stretching operation can be performed sequentially or simultaneously in the longitudinal direction (MD) and transverse direction (TD) of the film. The final stretching ratios in the two mutually perpendicular axial directions are preferably within the ranges of 1.0 to 2.0 times in the MD direction and 1.07 to 2.0 times in the TD direction. Also, it is preferably within the ranges of 1.0 to 1.5 times in the MD direction and 1.07 to 2.0 times in the TD direction.

 例えば、複数のロールに周速差をつけ、その間でロール周速差を利用してMD方向に延伸する方法が挙げられる。ウェブの両端をクリップやピンで固定し、クリップやピンの間隔を進行方向に広げてMD方向に延伸する方法、同様に横方向に広げてTD方向に延伸する方法が挙げられる。また、MD及びTD方向に同時に広げて、MD及びTD両方向に延伸する方法などが挙げられる。 For example, there is a method in which a difference in peripheral speed is applied to multiple rolls and the difference in roll peripheral speed is used to stretch in the MD direction. There is a method in which both ends of the web are fixed with clips or pins, and the spacing between the clips or pins is widened in the direction of travel to stretch in the MD direction, and a method in which the web is similarly widened in the lateral direction to stretch in the TD direction. Another method is to simultaneously widen the web in both the MD and TD directions to stretch in both the MD and TD directions.

 製膜工程における、これらの幅の保持又は幅手方向の延伸は、テンターによって行うことが好ましく、ピンテンターでもクリップテンターでもよい。 During the film-making process, the width is preferably maintained or the film is stretched in the width direction using a tenter, which may be a pin tenter or a clip tenter.

 テンター内などの製膜工程でのフィルム搬送張力は、温度にもよるが、120~200N/mの範囲内であることが好ましく、140~200N/mの範囲内であることがより好ましく、140~160N/mの範囲内であることが更に好ましい。 The film transport tension during the film-forming process, such as in a tenter, depends on the temperature, but is preferably within the range of 120 to 200 N/m, more preferably within the range of 140 to 200 N/m, and even more preferably within the range of 140 to 160 N/m.

 フィルムのガラス転移温度をTgとすると、延伸する際のフィルムの温度は、(Tg-30)~(Tg+100)℃の範囲内であることが好ましく、(Tg-20)~(Tg+80)℃の範囲内であることがより好ましく、(Tg-5)~(Tg+20)℃の範囲内であることが更に好ましい。 If the glass transition temperature of the film is Tg, the temperature of the film during stretching is preferably within the range of (Tg-30) to (Tg+100)°C, more preferably within the range of (Tg-20) to (Tg+80)°C, and even more preferably within the range of (Tg-5) to (Tg+20)°C.

 フィルムのTgは、フィルムを構成する材料種及び構成する材料の比率によって制御できる。フィルムの乾燥時のTgは、110℃以上であることが好ましく、120℃以上であることがより好ましい。 The Tg of the film can be controlled by the type of materials that make up the film and the ratio of those materials. The Tg of the film when dry is preferably 110°C or higher, and more preferably 120°C or higher.

 また、フィルムの乾燥時のTgは、190℃以下であることが好ましく、170℃以下であることがより好ましい。フィルムのTgは、JIS K7121に記載の方法などによって求めることができる。 Furthermore, the Tg of the film when dry is preferably 190°C or less, and more preferably 170°C or less. The Tg of the film can be determined by the method described in JIS K7121, etc.

 延伸する際の温度を150℃以上、延伸倍率を1.15倍以上にすることにより、フィルムの表面に、適度に粗さを付与できる。フィルムの表面に適度な粗さを付与することにより、滑り性を向上させるのみでなく、表面加工性、隣接する層との密着性を向上できる。フィルムの平均表面粗さRaは、2.0~4.0nmの範囲内であることが好ましく、2.5~3.5nmの範囲内であることがより好ましい。 By setting the temperature during stretching to 150°C or higher and the stretch ratio to 1.15 or higher, it is possible to impart an appropriate degree of roughness to the film surface. By imparting an appropriate degree of roughness to the film surface, not only can the slipperiness be improved, but also the surface processability and adhesion to adjacent layers can be improved. The average surface roughness Ra of the film is preferably within the range of 2.0 to 4.0 nm, and more preferably within the range of 2.5 to 3.5 nm.

 フィルムの平均表面粗さRa(nm)と、フィルム自体の溶媒に対する極性は、以下の関係式を満たすことが好ましい。 It is preferable that the average surface roughness Ra (nm) of the film and the polarity of the film itself with respect to the solvent satisfy the following relationship.

 (式) Ra≧3.5×logP-25.4
 フィルムは延伸後、熱固定されることが好ましい。熱固定時の温度は、最後にTD方向に延伸した際の温度より高温であることが好ましい。熱固定は、(Tg-20℃)以下の温度で、通常0.5~300秒間行うことが好ましい。この際、2つ以上に分割された領域で、温度差が1~100℃となる範囲で、順次昇温しながら熱固定することが好ましい。
(Formula) Ra≧3.5×logP-25.4
After stretching, the film is preferably heat-set. The temperature during heat-setting is preferably higher than the temperature during the final stretching in the TD direction. Heat-setting is preferably performed at a temperature of (Tg-20°C) or lower, usually for 0.5 to 300 seconds. In this case, it is preferable to heat-set the film while sequentially increasing the temperature in two or more divided regions so that the temperature difference is in the range of 1 to 100°C.

 熱固定されたフィルムは通常Tg以下まで冷却され、フィルム両端のクリップ把持部分をカットし巻き取られる。この際、最終熱固定温度以下、Tg以上の温度範囲内で、TD方向又はMD方向に0.1~10%弛緩処理することが好ましい。 The heat-set film is usually cooled to below Tg, and the clipped portions at both ends of the film are cut and wound up. At this time, it is preferable to relax the film by 0.1 to 10% in the TD or MD directions within a temperature range below the final heat-setting temperature and above Tg.

 冷却は、最終の熱固定温度からTgまでを、毎秒100℃以下の冷却速度で、徐冷することが好ましい。冷却及び弛緩処理する方法は、特に制限されず、従来公知の方法を用いることができる。フィルムにおける寸法安定性の向上の観点から、複数の温度領域で、順次冷却しながら、これらの処理を行うことが好ましい。 The film is preferably cooled slowly from the final heat setting temperature to Tg at a cooling rate of 100°C per second or less. There are no particular limitations on the method of cooling and relaxation treatment, and any conventionally known method can be used. From the viewpoint of improving the dimensional stability of the film, it is preferable to carry out these treatments while sequentially cooling in multiple temperature ranges.

 なお、冷却速度は、最終の熱固定温度をT1、フィルムが最終の熱固定温度からTgに達するまでの時間をtとするとき、(T1-Tg)/tで求めた値である。 The cooling rate is calculated by (T1-Tg)/t, where T1 is the final heat setting temperature and t is the time it takes for the film to reach Tg from the final heat setting temperature.

 これらの熱固定条件や、冷却及び弛緩処理条件の、より最適な条件は、フィルム(樹脂層)を構成するセルロースエステル、色素化合物等の添加剤の種類により異なる。得られる二軸延伸フィルムの物性を測定し、光学フィルムが好ましい特性を有するよう、光学フィルムの構成材料を適宜選択すればよい。 The optimal conditions for these heat fixing conditions and cooling and relaxation treatment conditions vary depending on the types of additives, such as cellulose ester and dye compounds, that make up the film (resin layer). The physical properties of the resulting biaxially stretched film can be measured, and the constituent materials of the optical film can be appropriately selected so that the optical film has the desired characteristics.

 (2.3)樹脂層の物性
 (2.3.1)平均光透過率
 第1樹脂層は、450~800nmの波長領域における平均光透過率が、87%以上である。上記範囲内であることにより、表示装置内の発光素子からの発光が、樹脂層に吸収されるのを抑制でき、視認される発光量を増加できる。すなわち、発光ロスを低減できる。
(2.3) Physical properties of resin layer (2.3.1) Average light transmittance The first resin layer has an average light transmittance of 87% or more in the wavelength region of 450 to 800 nm. By being within the above range, it is possible to suppress the light emitted from the light emitting element in the display device from being absorbed by the resin layer, and to increase the amount of light emission that is visually recognized. In other words, it is possible to reduce the light emission loss.

 第1樹脂は、紫外線をより吸収し、かつ可視光をより透過することが好ましい。すなわち、紫外線領域における平均光透過率は、より低いことが好ましく、450~800nmの波長領域における平均光透過率は、より高いことが好ましい。 The first resin preferably absorbs more ultraviolet light and transmits more visible light. In other words, it is preferable that the average light transmittance in the ultraviolet region is lower, and that the average light transmittance in the wavelength region of 450 to 800 nm is higher.

 なお、第2樹脂層における吸光特性は、特に制限されない。ただし、発光ロスをより低減できる観点から、可視光の透過率が高いことが好ましい。 The light absorption characteristics of the second resin layer are not particularly limited. However, from the viewpoint of further reducing the light emission loss, it is preferable that the visible light transmittance is high.

 樹脂層の光透過率は、上記色素化合物を含有することにより、調整できる。 The light transmittance of the resin layer can be adjusted by including the above-mentioned dye compound.

 450~800nmの波長領域(可視光領域)における平均光透過率は、下記の方法で測定できる。
 樹脂層を、気温23℃、相対湿度55RHの空調室で24時間調湿する。そして、JIS K-7375:2008に準拠して、紫外可視分光光度計(例えば、「UV-2450」(株式会社島津製作所製))を用いて、光透過率を測定し、450~800nmの波長領域において、その算術平均値を求める。
The average light transmittance in the wavelength region of 450 to 800 nm (visible light region) can be measured by the following method.
The resin layer is conditioned for 24 hours in an air-conditioned room at a temperature of 23° C. and a relative humidity of 55 RH. Then, in accordance with JIS K-7375:2008, the light transmittance is measured using an ultraviolet-visible spectrophotometer (for example, “UV-2450” (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation)) to determine the arithmetic average value in the wavelength region of 450 to 800 nm.

 (2.3.2)貯蔵弾性率
 第1樹脂層は、25℃における貯蔵弾性率が、4.0~8.0GPaの範囲内である。これにより、第1樹脂層は比較的柔らかく、積層体の屈曲性を向上できる。
 また、第2樹脂層の第1樹脂層に対する25℃における貯蔵弾性率の比の値が、0.7~1.5の範囲内である。すなわち、第1樹脂層の貯蔵弾性率と第2樹脂層の貯蔵弾性率が、同程度であることにより、積層体の屈曲性を更に向上できる。
(2.3.2) Storage Modulus The first resin layer has a storage modulus in the range of 4.0 to 8.0 GPa at 25° C. This makes the first resin layer relatively soft, and can improve the flexibility of the laminate.
In addition, the ratio of the storage modulus of the second resin layer to that of the first resin layer at 25° C. is within the range of 0.7 to 1.5. That is, the storage modulus of the first resin layer and the storage modulus of the second resin layer are approximately the same, so that the flexibility of the laminate can be further improved.

 樹脂層の25℃における貯蔵弾性率は、材料(樹脂、ゴム粒子、可塑剤等)の種類、含有量等を適宜選択することにより、調整できる。また、樹脂層の作製条件によっても調整できる。 The storage modulus of the resin layer at 25°C can be adjusted by appropriately selecting the type and content of materials (resin, rubber particles, plasticizer, etc.). It can also be adjusted by the manufacturing conditions of the resin layer.

 樹脂層の25℃における貯蔵弾性率は、レオメーター装置「RSA-3」(ティー・エイ・インスツルメント・ジャパン株式会社製)を用い、下記の試験条件にて測定できる。
 試験条件(動的粘弾性試験)
 試験機:動的粘弾性測定装置「RSA-3」(ティー・エイ・インスツルメント・ジャパン株式会社製)
 変形方法:引張
 プレロード荷重:55g
 温度範囲:-70~200℃
 周波数:1.0Hz
 変位:±0.1%
 サンプル:幅5mm
 チャック間距離:20mm
The storage modulus of the resin layer at 25° C. can be measured using a rheometer device “RSA-3” (manufactured by TA Instruments Japan, Inc.) under the following test conditions.
Test conditions (dynamic viscoelasticity test)
Testing machine: Dynamic viscoelasticity measuring device "RSA-3" (manufactured by TA Instruments Japan, Inc.)
Deformation method: tension Preload load: 55g
Temperature range: -70 to 200°C
Frequency: 1.0Hz
Displacement: ±0.1%
Sample: Width 5mm
Chuck distance: 20 mm

 (2.3.3)厚さ
 樹脂層の厚さは、本発明の積層体における薄膜化の観点から、10~60μmの範囲内であることが好ましく、15~50μmの範囲内であることがより好ましく、20~40μmの範囲内であることが更に好ましい。積層体を薄膜化することにより、屈曲性を向上できる。
(2.3.3) Thickness From the viewpoint of thinning the laminate of the present invention, the thickness of the resin layer is preferably in the range of 10 to 60 μm, more preferably in the range of 15 to 50 μm, and further preferably in the range of 20 to 40 μm. By thinning the laminate, the flexibility can be improved.

 樹脂層のガラス転移温度は、耐衝撃性の観点から、-30~180℃の範囲内であることが好ましい。なお、樹脂層のガラス転移温度を測定した際に複数のガラス転移温度が観測される場合には、観測される最も低いガラス転移温度を樹脂層のガラス転移温度とする。 From the viewpoint of impact resistance, the glass transition temperature of the resin layer is preferably within the range of -30 to 180°C. If multiple glass transition temperatures are observed when measuring the glass transition temperature of the resin layer, the lowest glass transition temperature observed shall be regarded as the glass transition temperature of the resin layer.

 ガラス転移温度(Tg)は、DSC(Differential Scanning Colorimetry:示差走査熱量装置)を用いて、JIS K 7121(2012)に準拠して測定できる。 The glass transition temperature (Tg) can be measured in accordance with JIS K 7121 (2012) using a DSC (Differential Scanning Colorimetry) device.

 (3)粘着層
 本発明の積層体は、粘着層を有することにより、各層間を接着させ、積層体にすることができる。
(3) Adhesive Layer The laminate of the present invention has an adhesive layer, which allows the layers to be bonded together to form a laminate.

 本発明において、「粘着層」とは、積層体を表示装置に取り付ける、又は積層体における各層を貼り合わせるのに十分な程度の粘着性を有した層のことをいう。粘着層は、粘着剤で作製されることが好ましい。 In the present invention, the "adhesive layer" refers to a layer having sufficient adhesiveness to attach the laminate to a display device or to bond the layers in the laminate together. The adhesive layer is preferably made of an adhesive.

 以下、好適に用いられる粘着剤について説明する。
 なお、第1粘着層と、必要に応じて設けられる第2粘着層及び第3粘着層は、同じ材質や物性であっても、異なる材質や物性であってもよい。
The adhesive that is preferably used will be described below.
The first adhesive layer and the second and third adhesive layers that are provided as necessary may be made of the same material and have the same physical properties, or may be made of different materials and have different physical properties.

 粘着層は、フィルムのように巻き取れる形状であっても、塗布層の形状であってもよい。塗布層は、隣接する層上に、粘着剤を塗布した後、硬化することにより形成される。 The adhesive layer may be in the form of a film that can be rolled up, or in the form of a coating layer. A coating layer is formed by applying an adhesive onto an adjacent layer and then curing the applied layer.

 粘着剤は、特に制限されず、例えば、ゴム系粘着剤、アクリル系粘着剤、シリコーン系粘着剤、ウレタン系粘着剤、ビニルアルキルエーテル系粘着剤、ポリビニルアルコール系粘着剤、ポリビニルピロリドン系粘着剤、ポリアクリルアミド系粘着剤、セルロース系粘着剤等が挙げられる。中でも、アクリル系粘着剤であることが好ましい。アクリル系粘着剤は、透明性に優れ、粘着特性(密着性、凝集性及び接着性)に優れる。また、耐候性、耐熱性等にも優れる。
 なお、ここでの、「アクリル系粘着剤」とは、アクリル系樹脂を主成分として含有する粘着剤のことをいう。
The adhesive is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include rubber-based adhesives, acrylic-based adhesives, silicone-based adhesives, urethane-based adhesives, vinyl alkyl ether-based adhesives, polyvinyl alcohol-based adhesives, polyvinylpyrrolidone-based adhesives, polyacrylamide-based adhesives, and cellulose-based adhesives. Among these, acrylic-based adhesives are preferred. Acrylic-based adhesives are excellent in transparency and adhesive properties (adhesion, cohesion, and adhesion). They are also excellent in weather resistance, heat resistance, and the like.
Here, the "acrylic adhesive" refers to an adhesive containing an acrylic resin as a main component.

 (3.1)粘着層(紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤)の構成材料
 アクリル系粘着剤で作製される粘着層としては、例えば、紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤を、紫外線硬化(紫外線重合)することにより形成される層であることが好ましい。なお、紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤を紫外線硬化(紫外線重合)することにより、(メタ)アクリル系樹脂が生成する。
(3.1) Constituent material of adhesive layer (ultraviolet-curable acrylic adhesive) The adhesive layer made of an acrylic adhesive is preferably a layer formed by, for example, ultraviolet curing (ultraviolet polymerization) of an ultraviolet-curable acrylic adhesive. Note that, by ultraviolet curing (ultraviolet polymerization) of an ultraviolet-curable acrylic adhesive, a (meth)acrylic resin is generated.

 「紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤」とは、アルキル(メタ)アクリレートを含有する単量体成分又は当該単量体成分の部分重合物、光重合開始剤等を含有することが好ましい。 The "ultraviolet-curable acrylic adhesive" preferably contains a monomer component containing alkyl (meth)acrylate or a partial polymer of the monomer component, a photopolymerization initiator, etc.

 (3.1.1)単量体成分
 紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤は、アクリレートを含有する単量体成分又は当該単量体成分の部分重合物を、紫外線硬化(紫外線重合)することにより得られる(メタ)アクリル系樹脂を主成分とする。
 以下、単量体成分に含有されるアルキル(メタ)アクリレートと、その他含有してもよい単量体について説明する。その他含有してもよい単量体としては、単官能性単量体であることが好ましいが、多官能性単量体であってもよい。
(3.1.1) Monomer Component The ultraviolet-curable acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive contains, as its main component, a (meth)acrylic resin obtained by ultraviolet curing (ultraviolet polymerization) an acrylate-containing monomer component or a partial polymer of the monomer component.
The alkyl (meth)acrylate contained in the monomer component and other monomers that may be contained will be described below. The other monomers that may be contained are preferably monofunctional monomers, but may also be polyfunctional monomers.

 (3.1.1.1)アルキル(メタ)アクリレート
 本明細書において、「(メタ)アクリル」とは、アクリル及びメタクリルのことをいい、その総称である。また、「アルキル(メタ)アクリレート」とは、アルキルアクリレート及びアルキルメタクリレートのことをいい、その総称である。
 粘着層におけるアルキル(メタ)アクリレートは、直鎖状又は分枝鎖状の炭素数1~24のアルキル基を、エステル末端に有するアルキル(メタ)アクリレートであることが好ましい。
 これらを、一種単独で含有しても、二種以上含有してもよい。
(3.1.1.1) Alkyl (meth)acrylate In this specification, "(meth)acrylic" refers to acrylic and methacrylic, and is a general term for both. Furthermore, "alkyl (meth)acrylate" refers to alkyl acrylate and alkyl methacrylate, and is a general term for both.
The alkyl (meth)acrylate in the adhesive layer is preferably an alkyl (meth)acrylate having a linear or branched alkyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms at the ester terminal.
These may be contained alone or in combination of two or more.

 アルキル(メタ)アクリレートとしては、例えば、炭素数4~9の分枝鎖状のアルキル基を有するアルキル(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。アルキル(メタ)アクリレートとしては、n-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、sec-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、tert-ブチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソブチル(メタ)アクリレート、n-ペンチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソペンチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、イソヘプチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-エチルヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、イソオクチル(メタ)アクリレート、イソノニル(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。
 これらを、一種単独で含有しても、二種以上含有してもよい。
Examples of the alkyl (meth)acrylate include alkyl (meth)acrylates having a branched alkyl group having 4 to 9 carbon atoms. Examples of the alkyl (meth)acrylate include n-butyl (meth)acrylate, sec-butyl (meth)acrylate, tert-butyl (meth)acrylate, isobutyl (meth)acrylate, n-pentyl (meth)acrylate, isopentyl (meth)acrylate, isohexyl (meth)acrylate, isoheptyl (meth)acrylate, 2-ethylhexyl (meth)acrylate, isooctyl (meth)acrylate, and isononyl (meth)acrylate.
These may be contained alone or in combination of two or more.

 炭素数1~24のアルキル基をエステル末端に有するアルキル(メタ)アクリレートの含有量は、単量体成分の全質量に対して、40質量%以上であることが好ましい。また、50質量%以上であることがより好ましく、60質量%以上であることが更に好ましい。 The content of alkyl (meth)acrylate having an alkyl group having 1 to 24 carbon atoms at the ester end is preferably 40% by mass or more, more preferably 50% by mass or more, and even more preferably 60% by mass or more, based on the total mass of the monomer component.

 (3.1.1.2)その他の単量体成分
 アルキル(メタ)アクリレート以外の単官能の共重合単量体(単官能性単量体)としては、例えば、環状窒素含有単量体が挙げられる。環状窒素含有単量体としては、(メタ)アクリロイル基又はビニル基等の不飽和二重結合を有する重合性の官能基を有し、かつ環状窒素構造を有するものであれば、特に制限されない。なお、環状窒素構造は、環状構造内に窒素原子を有するものが好ましい。
(3.1.1.2) Other Monomer Components Examples of monofunctional copolymerization monomers (monofunctional monomers) other than alkyl (meth)acrylates include cyclic nitrogen-containing monomers. The cyclic nitrogen-containing monomer is not particularly limited as long as it has a polymerizable functional group having an unsaturated double bond, such as a (meth)acryloyl group or a vinyl group, and has a cyclic nitrogen structure. The cyclic nitrogen structure is preferably one having a nitrogen atom in the cyclic structure.

 環状窒素含有単量体としては、例えば、N-ビニル-2-ピロリドン、N-ビニル-ε-カプロラクタム、メチルビニルピロリドン等のラクタム系ビニル単量体;ビニルピリジン、ビニルピペリドン、ビニルピリミジン、ビニルピペラジン、ビニルピラジン、ビニルピロール、ビニルイミダゾール、ビニルオキサゾール、ビニルモルホリン等の窒素含有複素環を有するビニル系単量体等が挙げられる。また、モルホリン環、ピペリジン環、ピロリジン環、ピペラジン環等の複素環を含有する(メタ)アクリル単量体が挙げられる。
 具体的には、N-アクリロイルモルホリン、N-アクリロイルピペリジン、N-メタクリロイルピペリジン、N-アクリロイルピロリジン等が挙げられる。
 中でも、ラクタム系ビニル単量体であることが好ましい。
Examples of the cyclic nitrogen-containing monomer include lactam-based vinyl monomers such as N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone, N-vinyl-ε-caprolactam, and methylvinylpyrrolidone, and vinyl-based monomers having a nitrogen-containing heterocycle such as vinylpyridine, vinylpiperidone, vinylpyrimidine, vinylpiperazine, vinylpyrazine, vinylpyrrole, vinylimidazole, vinyloxazole, and vinylmorpholine. Also included are (meth)acrylic monomers containing a heterocycle such as a morpholine ring, a piperidine ring, a pyrrolidine ring, and a piperazine ring.
Specific examples include N-acryloylmorpholine, N-acryloylpiperidine, N-methacryloylpiperidine, and N-acryloylpyrrolidine.
Among these, lactam vinyl monomers are preferred.

 環状窒素含有単量体の含有量は、単量体成分の全質量に対して、0.5~50質量%であることが好ましく、0.5~40質量%であることがより好ましく、0.5~30質量%であることが更に好ましい。 The content of the cyclic nitrogen-containing monomer is preferably 0.5 to 50 mass%, more preferably 0.5 to 40 mass%, and even more preferably 0.5 to 30 mass%, based on the total mass of the monomer components.

 また、単官能性単量体としては、ヒドロキシ基含有単量体が挙げられる。ヒドロキシ基含有単量体としては、(メタ)アクリロイル基又はビニル基等の不飽和二重結合を有する重合性の官能基を有し、かつヒドロキシ基を有するものであれば、特に制限されない。 An example of a monofunctional monomer is a hydroxyl group-containing monomer. There are no particular limitations on the hydroxyl group-containing monomer, so long as it has a polymerizable functional group with an unsaturated double bond, such as a (meth)acryloyl group or a vinyl group, and also has a hydroxyl group.

 ヒドロキシ基含有単量体としては、例えば、2-ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、2-ヒドロキシブチル(メタ)アクリレート、3-ヒドロキシプロピル(メタ)アクリレート、4-ヒドロキシブチル(メタ)アクリレート、6-ヒドロキシヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、8-ヒドロキシオクチル(メタ)アクリレート、10-ヒドロキシデシル(メタ)アクリレート、12-ヒドロキシラウリル(メタ)アクリレート等のヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレート;(4-ヒドロキシメチルシクロへキシル)メチル(メタ)アクリレート等のヒドロキシアルキルシクロアルカン(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。その他、ヒドロキシエチル(メタ)アクリルアミド、アリルアルコール、2-ヒドロキシエチルビニルエーテル、4-ヒドロキシブチルビニルエーテル、ジエチレングリコールモノビニルエーテル等が挙げられる。中でも、ヒドロキシアルキル(メタ)アクリレートであることが好ましい。
 これらを、一種単独で含有しても、二種以上含有してもよい。
Examples of the hydroxy group-containing monomer include hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates such as 2-hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 2-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hydroxypropyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate, 6-hydroxyhexyl (meth)acrylate, 8-hydroxyoctyl (meth)acrylate, 10-hydroxydecyl (meth)acrylate, and 12-hydroxylauryl (meth)acrylate; and hydroxyalkyl cycloalkane (meth)acrylates such as (4-hydroxymethylcyclohexyl)methyl (meth)acrylate. Other examples include hydroxyethyl (meth)acrylamide, allyl alcohol, 2-hydroxyethyl vinyl ether, 4-hydroxybutyl vinyl ether, and diethylene glycol monovinyl ether. Among these, hydroxyalkyl (meth)acrylates are preferred.
These may be contained alone or in combination of two or more.

 ヒドロキシ基含有単量体の含有量は、単量体成分の全質量に対して、1~30質量%の範囲内であることが好ましく、2~27質量%の範囲内であることがより好ましく、3~25質量%の範囲内であることが更に好ましい。上記範囲内であることにより、粘着層の接着力の低下を抑制できる。また、得られる粘着剤の粘度の上昇やゲル化を抑制できる。 The content of the hydroxyl group-containing monomer is preferably within the range of 1 to 30% by mass, more preferably within the range of 2 to 27% by mass, and even more preferably within the range of 3 to 25% by mass, based on the total mass of the monomer components. By keeping the content within the above range, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the adhesive strength of the adhesive layer. In addition, it is possible to suppress an increase in the viscosity and gelation of the resulting adhesive.

 単官能性単量体としては、その他、例えば、カルボキシ基含有単量体、環状エーテル基を有する単量体等が挙げられる。 Other examples of monofunctional monomers include carboxyl group-containing monomers and monomers having a cyclic ether group.

 カルボキシ基含有単量体としては、(メタ)アクリロイル基又はビニル基等の不飽和二重結合を有する重合性の官能基を有し、かつカルボキシ基を有するものであれば、特に制限されない。 There are no particular limitations on the carboxyl group-containing monomer, so long as it has a polymerizable functional group with an unsaturated double bond, such as a (meth)acryloyl group or a vinyl group, and also has a carboxyl group.

 カルボキシ基含有単量体としては、例えば、(メタ)アクリル酸、カルボキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、カルボキシペンチル(メタ)アクリレート、イタコン酸、マレイン酸、フマル酸、クロトン酸、イソクロトン酸等が挙げられる。また、イタコン酸又はマレイン酸は、これらの無水物であってもよい。
 中でも、カルボキシ基含有単量体は、アクリル酸又はメタクリル酸であることが好ましく、アクリル酸であることがより好ましい。
 これらを、一種単独で含有しても、二種以上含有してもよい。
Examples of the carboxy group-containing monomer include (meth)acrylic acid, carboxyethyl (meth)acrylate, carboxypentyl (meth)acrylate, itaconic acid, maleic acid, fumaric acid, crotonic acid, isocrotonic acid, etc. In addition, itaconic acid or maleic acid may be an anhydride thereof.
Among these, the carboxy group-containing monomer is preferably acrylic acid or methacrylic acid, and more preferably acrylic acid.
These may be contained alone or in combination of two or more.

 環状エーテル基を有する単量体としては、(メタ)アクリロイル基又はビニル基等の不飽和二重結合を有する重合性の官能基を有し、かつエポキシ基又はオキセタン基等の環状エーテル基を有するものであれば、特に制限されない。 The monomer having a cyclic ether group is not particularly limited as long as it has a polymerizable functional group having an unsaturated double bond, such as a (meth)acryloyl group or a vinyl group, and also has a cyclic ether group, such as an epoxy group or an oxetane group.

 エポキシ基含有単量体としては、例えば、グリシジル(メタ)アクリレート、3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシルメチル(メタ)アクリレート、4-ヒドロキシブチル(メタ)アクリレートグリシジルエーテル等が挙げられる。オキセタン基含有単量体としては、例えば、3-オキセタニルメチル(メタ)アクリレート、3-メチル-オキセタニルメチル(メタ)アクリレート、3-エチル-オキセタニルメチル(メタ)アクリレート、3-ブチル-オキセタニルメチル(メタ)アクリレート、3-ヘキシル-オキセタニルメチル(メタ)アクリレート、等が挙げられる。
 これらを、一種単独で含有しても、二種以上含有してもよい。
Examples of epoxy group-containing monomers include glycidyl (meth)acrylate, 3,4-epoxycyclohexylmethyl (meth)acrylate, 4-hydroxybutyl (meth)acrylate glycidyl ether, etc. Examples of oxetane group-containing monomers include 3-oxetanylmethyl (meth)acrylate, 3-methyl-oxetanylmethyl (meth)acrylate, 3-ethyl-oxetanylmethyl (meth)acrylate, 3-butyl-oxetanylmethyl (meth)acrylate, 3-hexyl-oxetanylmethyl (meth)acrylate, etc.
These may be contained alone or in combination of two or more.

 カルボキシ基含有単量体又は環状エーテル基を有する単量体の含有量は、単量体成分の全質量に対して、30質量%以下であることが好ましく、27質量%以下であることがより好ましく、25質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。 The content of the carboxyl group-containing monomer or the monomer having a cyclic ether group is preferably 30% by mass or less, more preferably 27% by mass or less, and even more preferably 25% by mass or less, based on the total mass of the monomer components.

 その他の単官能性単量体としては、例えば、CH=C(R)COORで表されるアルキル(メタ)アクリレートが挙げられる。なお、Rは水素原子又はメチル基を表し、Rは炭素数1~3の置換されたアルキル基、又は環状のシクロアルキル基を表す。 Other monofunctional monomers include, for example, alkyl(meth)acrylates represented by CH 2 ═C(R 1 )COOR 2 , where R 1 represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and R 2 represents a substituted alkyl group having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, or a cyclic cycloalkyl group.

 上記CH=C(R)COORで表されるアルキル(メタ)アクリレートとしては、例えば、フェノキシエチル(メタ)アクリレート、ベンジル(メタ)アクリレート、シクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、3,3,5-トリメチルシクロヘキシル(メタ)アクリレート、イソボルニル(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。
 これらを、一種単独で含有しても、二種以上含有してもよい。
Examples of the alkyl (meth)acrylate represented by CH 2 ═C(R 1 )COOR 2 include phenoxyethyl (meth)acrylate, benzyl (meth)acrylate, cyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, 3,3,5-trimethylcyclohexyl (meth)acrylate, and isobornyl (meth)acrylate.
These may be contained alone or in combination of two or more.

 上記CH=C(R)COORで表されるアルキル(メタ)アクリレートの含有量は、単量体成分の全質量に対して、50質量%以下であることが好ましく、45質量%以下であることがより好ましく、40質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。 The content of the alkyl (meth)acrylate represented by the above CH 2 ═C(R 1 )COOR 2 is preferably 50 mass% or less, more preferably 45 mass% or less, and even more preferably 40 mass% or less, based on the total mass of the monomer component.

 また、その他の単官能性単量体としては、例えば、酢酸ビニル、プロピオン酸ビニル、スチレン、α-メチルスチレン;(メタ)アクリル酸ポリエチレングリコール、(メタ)アクリル酸ポリプロピレングリコール、(メタ)アクリル酸メトキシエチレングリコール、(メタ)アクリル酸メトキシポリプロピレングリコール等のグリコール系アクリル酸エステル単量体;(メタ)アクリル酸テトラヒドロフルフリル、フッ素(メタ)アクリレート、シリコーン(メタ)アクリレート、2-メトキシエチルアクリレート等のアクリル酸エステル単量体;アミド基含有単量体、アミノ基含有単量体、イミド基含有単量体、N-アクリロイルモルホリン、ビニルエーテル単量体等が挙げられる。また、テルペン(メタ)アクリレート、ジシクロペンタニル(メタ)アクリレート等の環状構造を有する単量体が挙げられる。 Other monofunctional monomers include, for example, vinyl acetate, vinyl propionate, styrene, α-methylstyrene; glycol-based acrylic acid ester monomers such as polyethylene glycol (meth)acrylate, polypropylene glycol (meth)acrylate, methoxyethylene glycol (meth)acrylate, and methoxypolypropylene glycol (meth)acrylate; acrylic acid ester monomers such as tetrahydrofurfuryl (meth)acrylate, fluorine (meth)acrylate, silicone (meth)acrylate, and 2-methoxyethyl acrylate; amide group-containing monomers, amino group-containing monomers, imide group-containing monomers, N-acryloylmorpholine, and vinyl ether monomers. Also included are monomers having a cyclic structure such as terpene (meth)acrylate and dicyclopentanyl (meth)acrylate.

 さらに、その他の単官能性単量体としては、ケイ素原子を含有するシラン系単量体等が挙げられる。
 シラン系単量体としては、例えば、3-アクリロキシプロピルトリエトキシシラン、ビニルトリメトキシシラン、ビニルトリエトキシシラン、4-ビニルブチルトリメトキシシラン、4-ビニルブチルトリエトキシシラン、8-ビニルオクチルトリメトキシシラン、8-ビニルオクチルトリエトキシシラン、10-メタクリロイルオキシデシルトリメトキシシラン、10-アクリロイルオキシデシルトリメトキシシラン、10-メタクリロイルオキシデシルトリエトキシシラン、10-アクリロイルオキシデシルトリエトキシシラン等が挙げられる。
Further, other monofunctional monomers include silane-based monomers containing a silicon atom.
Examples of the silane monomer include 3-acryloxypropyltriethoxysilane, vinyltrimethoxysilane, vinyltriethoxysilane, 4-vinylbutyltrimethoxysilane, 4-vinylbutyltriethoxysilane, 8-vinyloctyltrimethoxysilane, 8-vinyloctyltriethoxysilane, 10-methacryloyloxydecyltrimethoxysilane, 10-acryloyloxydecyltrimethoxysilane, 10-methacryloyloxydecyltriethoxysilane, and 10-acryloyloxydecyltriethoxysilane.

 その他の単量体としては、上記で例示した単官能性単量体の他に、粘着層の凝集力を調整する観点から、必要に応じて多官能性単量体を含有してもよい。 In addition to the monofunctional monomers exemplified above, other monomers may contain polyfunctional monomers as necessary in order to adjust the cohesive strength of the adhesive layer.

 多官能性単量体は、(メタ)アクリロイル基又はビニル基等の不飽和二重結合を有する重合性の官能基を少なくとも2つ有する単量体であれば、特に制限されない。 The polyfunctional monomer is not particularly limited as long as it is a monomer having at least two polymerizable functional groups having an unsaturated double bond, such as a (meth)acryloyl group or a vinyl group.

 多官能性単量体としては、例えば、(ポリ)エチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、(ポリ)プロピレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ネオペンチルグリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールジ(メタ)アクリレート、ペンタエリスリトールトリ(メタ)アクリレート、ジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレート、1,2-エチレングリコールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,6-ヘキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、1,12-ドデカンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、テトラメチロールメタントリ(メタ)アクリレート等の多価アルコールと(メタ)アクリル酸とのエステル化合物;アリル(メタ)アクリレート、ビニル(メタ)アクリレート、ジビニルベンゼン、エポキシアクリレート、ポリエステルアクリレート、ウレタンアクリレート、ブチルジ(メタ)アクリレート、ヘキシルジ(メタ)アクリレート等が挙げられる。 Examples of polyfunctional monomers include ester compounds of polyhydric alcohols and (meth)acrylic acid such as (poly)ethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, (poly)propylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, neopentyl glycol di(meth)acrylate, pentaerythritol di(meth)acrylate, pentaerythritol tri(meth)acrylate, dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate, 1,2-ethylene glycol di(meth)acrylate, 1,6-hexanediol di(meth)acrylate, 1,12-dodecanediol di(meth)acrylate, trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate, and tetramethylolmethane tri(meth)acrylate; allyl (meth)acrylate, vinyl (meth)acrylate, divinylbenzene, epoxy acrylate, polyester acrylate, urethane acrylate, butyl di(meth)acrylate, and hexyl di(meth)acrylate.

 中でも、トリメチロールプロパントリ(メタ)アクリレート、ヘキサンジオールジ(メタ)アクリレート、又はジペンタエリスリトールヘキサ(メタ)アクリレートであることが好ましい。
 これらを、一種単独で含有しても、二種以上含有してもよい。
Of these, trimethylolpropane tri(meth)acrylate, hexanediol di(meth)acrylate, or dipentaerythritol hexa(meth)acrylate is preferred.
These may be contained alone or in combination of two or more.

 多官能性単量体の含有量は、分子量や官能基数等により異なるが、単官能性単量体の全質量に対して、3質量%以下であることが好ましく、2質量%以下であることがより好ましく、1質量%以下であることが更に好ましい。また、多官能性単量体の含有量は、0.001質量%以上であることが好ましい。上記範囲内であることにより、粘着層の接着力を向上できる。 The content of the polyfunctional monomer varies depending on the molecular weight, the number of functional groups, etc., but is preferably 3 mass% or less, more preferably 2 mass% or less, and even more preferably 1 mass% or less, relative to the total mass of the monofunctional monomer. In addition, the content of the polyfunctional monomer is preferably 0.001 mass% or more. By being within the above range, the adhesive strength of the adhesive layer can be improved.

 単量体成分においては、上記単量体成分の部分重合物が含有されていてもよい。 The monomer component may contain a partial polymer of the above monomer component.

 (3.1.2)光重合開始剤
 本発明に係る紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤は、光重合開始剤を含有することが好ましい。
 光重合開始剤を含有することにより、上記単量体成分を、十分に重合できる。
(3.1.2) Photopolymerization initiator The ultraviolet-curable acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive according to the present invention preferably contains a photopolymerization initiator.
By including a photopolymerization initiator, the monomer components can be polymerized sufficiently.

 光重合開始剤は、紫外線によりラジカルを発生し、光重合を開始するものであれば、特に制限されず、通常用いられる光重合開始剤を好適に用いることができる。例えば、ベンゾインエーテル系光重合開始剤、アセトフェノン系光重合開始剤、α-ケトール系光重合開始剤、光活性オキシム系光重合開始剤、ベンゾイン系光重合開始剤、ベンジル系光重合開始剤、ベンゾフェノン系光重合開始剤、ケタール系光重合開始剤、チオキサントン系光重合開始剤、アシルフォスフィンオキサイド系光重合開始剤等が挙げられる。 The photopolymerization initiator is not particularly limited as long as it generates radicals by ultraviolet light and initiates photopolymerization, and any commonly used photopolymerization initiator can be suitably used. Examples include benzoin ether-based photopolymerization initiators, acetophenone-based photopolymerization initiators, α-ketol-based photopolymerization initiators, photoactive oxime-based photopolymerization initiators, benzoin-based photopolymerization initiators, benzyl-based photopolymerization initiators, benzophenone-based photopolymerization initiators, ketal-based photopolymerization initiators, thioxanthone-based photopolymerization initiators, and acylphosphine oxide-based photopolymerization initiators.

 また、ビス(2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾイル)-フェニルフォスフィンオキサイド(市販品は、例えば、「Omnirad(登録商標)819」(IGM Resins B.V.社製))、2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾイル-ジフェニル-フォスフィンオキサイド(市販品は、例えば、「Omnirad(登録商標)TPO H」(IGM Resins B.V.製))等が挙げられる。
 これらを、一種単独で含有しても、二種以上含有してもよい。
Further examples thereof include bis(2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl)-phenylphosphine oxide (commercially available products include, for example, "Omnirad (registered trademark) 819" (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.)), 2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl-diphenyl-phosphine oxide (commercially available products include, for example, "Omnirad (registered trademark) TPO H" (manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.)), and the like.
These may be contained alone or in combination of two or more.

 光重合開始剤の含有量は、単量体成分の全質量に対して、0.005~0.5質量%の範囲内であることが好ましく、0.02~0.1質量%の範囲内であることがより好ましい。上記範囲内であることにより、紫外線硬化(紫外線重合)を十分に進行させることができる。 The content of the photopolymerization initiator is preferably within the range of 0.005 to 0.5% by mass, and more preferably within the range of 0.02 to 0.1% by mass, based on the total mass of the monomer components. By being within the above range, ultraviolet curing (ultraviolet polymerization) can proceed sufficiently.

 (3.1.3)その他
 本発明に係る紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤は、更にシランカップリング剤、架橋剤等を含有してもよい。
(3.1.3) Others The ultraviolet-curable acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive according to the present invention may further contain a silane coupling agent, a crosslinking agent, and the like.

 シランカップリング剤としては、例えば、3-グリシドキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-グリシドキシプロピルトリエトキシシラン、3-グリシドキシプロピルメチルジエトキシシラン、2-(3,4-エポキシシクロヘキシル)エチルトリメトキシシラン等のエポキシ基含有シランカップリング剤;3-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン、N-2-(アミノエチル)-3-アミノプロピルメチルジメトキシシラン、3-トリエトキシシリル-N-(1,3-ジメチルブチリデン)プロピルアミン、N-フェニル-γ-アミノプロピルトリメトキシシラン等のアミノ基含有シランカップリング剤;3-アクリロキシプロピルトリメトキシシラン、3-メタクリロキシプロピルトリエトキシシラン等の(メタ)アクリル基含有シランカップリング剤;3-イソシアネートプロピルトリエトキシシラン等のイソシアネート基含有シランカップリング剤等が挙げられる。 Silane coupling agents include, for example, epoxy group-containing silane coupling agents such as 3-glycidoxypropyltrimethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropyltriethoxysilane, 3-glycidoxypropylmethyldiethoxysilane, and 2-(3,4-epoxycyclohexyl)ethyltrimethoxysilane; amino group-containing silane coupling agents such as 3-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane, N-2-(aminoethyl)-3-aminopropylmethyldimethoxysilane, 3-triethoxysilyl-N-(1,3-dimethylbutylidene)propylamine, and N-phenyl-γ-aminopropyltrimethoxysilane; (meth)acrylic group-containing silane coupling agents such as 3-acryloxypropyltrimethoxysilane and 3-methacryloxypropyltriethoxysilane; and isocyanate group-containing silane coupling agents such as 3-isocyanatepropyltriethoxysilane.

 シランカップリング剤の含有量は、単量体成分の全質量に対して、1質量%以下であることが好ましく、0.01~1質量%の範囲内であることがより好ましく、0.02~0.6質量%の範囲内であることが更に好ましい。 The content of the silane coupling agent is preferably 1% by mass or less, more preferably in the range of 0.01 to 1% by mass, and even more preferably in the range of 0.02 to 0.6% by mass, based on the total mass of the monomer components.

 架橋剤としては、例えば、イソシアネート系架橋剤、エポキシ系架橋剤、シリコーン系架橋剤、オキサゾリン系架橋剤、アジリジン系架橋剤、シラン系架橋剤、アルキルエーテル化メラミン系架橋剤、金属キレート系架橋剤、過酸化物等の架橋剤が挙げられる。中でも、イソシアネート系架橋剤であることが好ましい。
 これらを、一種単独で含有しても、二種以上含有してもよい。
Examples of the crosslinking agent include isocyanate-based crosslinking agents, epoxy-based crosslinking agents, silicone-based crosslinking agents, oxazoline-based crosslinking agents, aziridine-based crosslinking agents, silane-based crosslinking agents, alkyl etherified melamine-based crosslinking agents, metal chelate-based crosslinking agents, peroxides, etc. Among these, isocyanate-based crosslinking agents are preferred.
These may be contained alone or in combination of two or more.

 イソシアネート系架橋剤は、イソシアネート基(イソシアネート基をブロック剤又は多量体化等により一時的に保護したイソシアネート再生型官能基を含む)を1分子中に2個以上有する化合物である。イソシアネート系架橋剤としては、トリレンジイソシアネート、キシレンジイソシアネート等の芳香族イソシアネート;イソホロンジイソシアネート等の脂環族イソシアネート;ヘキサメチレンジイソシアネート等の脂肪族イソシアネート等が挙げられる。 An isocyanate-based crosslinking agent is a compound that has two or more isocyanate groups (including isocyanate regenerating functional groups in which the isocyanate group is temporarily protected by a blocking agent or by polymerization, etc.) in one molecule. Examples of isocyanate-based crosslinking agents include aromatic isocyanates such as tolylene diisocyanate and xylylene diisocyanate; alicyclic isocyanates such as isophorone diisocyanate; and aliphatic isocyanates such as hexamethylene diisocyanate.

 架橋剤の含有量は、単量体成分の全質量に対して、5質量%以下であることが好ましく、0.01~5質量%の範囲内であることがより好ましく、0.01~4質量%の範囲内であることが更に好ましく、0.02~3質量%の範囲内であることが特に好ましい。 The content of the crosslinking agent is preferably 5% by mass or less, more preferably in the range of 0.01 to 5% by mass, even more preferably in the range of 0.01 to 4% by mass, and particularly preferably in the range of 0.02 to 3% by mass, based on the total mass of the monomer components.

 紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤は、上記成分の他に、用途に応じて、他の添加剤を適宜含有してもよい。このような添加剤としては、例えば、粘着付与剤;中空ガラスバルーン等の充填剤;可塑剤;老化防止剤;酸化防止剤等が挙げられる。なお、粘着付与剤とは、例えば、ロジン誘導体樹脂、テルペン樹脂、石油樹脂、油溶性フェノール樹脂等からなる、常温で固体、半固体、又は液状のもののことをいう。 In addition to the above components, the UV-curable acrylic adhesive may contain other additives as appropriate depending on the application. Examples of such additives include tackifiers; fillers such as hollow glass balloons; plasticizers; anti-aging agents; and antioxidants. Note that tackifiers refer to substances that are solid, semi-solid, or liquid at room temperature, such as rosin derivative resins, terpene resins, petroleum resins, and oil-soluble phenolic resins.

 紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤は、塗布作業に適した粘度に調整することが好ましい。粘度は、例えば、増粘性添加剤等の各種樹脂、多官能性単量体等を添加すること、又は紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤中の単量体成分を部分重合させることにより調整できる。なお、当該部分重合は、増粘性添加剤等の各種ポリマー、多官能性単量体等を添加する前に行ってもよく、その後に行ってもよい。 It is preferable to adjust the viscosity of the UV-curable acrylic adhesive to a level suitable for application. The viscosity can be adjusted, for example, by adding various resins such as thickening additives, polyfunctional monomers, etc., or by partially polymerizing the monomer components in the UV-curable acrylic adhesive. The partial polymerization may be carried out before or after adding various polymers such as thickening additives, polyfunctional monomers, etc.

 紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤の粘度は、添加剤の含有量等によって変わる。そのため、紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤中の単量体成分を部分重合させる場合の重合率は、一意に決めることはできない。ただし、目安として、重合率は、20%以下であることが好ましく、3~20%の範囲内であることがより好ましく、5~15%の範囲内であることが更に好ましい。
 なお、重合率が20%以下であることにより、塗布作業に適した粘度に調整できる。
The viscosity of the ultraviolet-curable acrylic adhesive varies depending on the content of additives, etc. Therefore, the polymerization rate when the monomer components in the ultraviolet-curable acrylic adhesive are partially polymerized cannot be uniquely determined. However, as a guideline, the polymerization rate is preferably 20% or less, more preferably within the range of 3 to 20%, and even more preferably within the range of 5 to 15%.
In addition, by controlling the polymerization rate to 20% or less, the viscosity can be adjusted to a level suitable for application work.

 (3.2)粘着層の作製方法
 粘着層は、紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤を、隣接する層上に塗布し、紫外線を照射して、紫外線硬化(紫外線重合)することにより作製できる。
 また、基材上に紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤を塗布し、紫外線を照射して、紫外線硬化(紫外線重合)することによりフィルム状の粘着層を作製できる。
(3.2) Method for Producing Adhesive Layer The adhesive layer can be produced by applying an ultraviolet-curable acrylic adhesive onto an adjacent layer, irradiating it with ultraviolet light, and ultraviolet curing (ultraviolet polymerization).
Alternatively, an ultraviolet-curable acrylic adhesive may be applied onto a substrate, and then irradiated with ultraviolet light to effect ultraviolet curing (ultraviolet polymerization), thereby producing a film-like adhesive layer.

 基材は、特に制限されず、例えば、離型フィルム、透明樹脂フィルム等が挙げられる。 The substrate is not particularly limited, and examples include release films, transparent resin films, etc.

 離型フィルムとしては、例えば、ポリエチレン、ポリプロピレン、ポリエチレンテレフタレート、ポリエステルフィルム等の離型樹脂フィルム、紙、布、不織布等の多孔質材料、ネット、発泡シート、金属箔、又はこれらのラミネート体等の薄葉体が挙げられる。中でも、表面平滑性に優れる観点から、樹脂フィルムであることが好ましい。 Examples of release films include release resin films such as polyethylene, polypropylene, polyethylene terephthalate, and polyester films; porous materials such as paper, cloth, and nonwoven fabric; and thin materials such as nets, foam sheets, metal foils, and laminates of these. Among these, resin films are preferred from the viewpoint of excellent surface smoothness.

 離型樹脂フィルムとしては、例えば、ポリエチレンフィルム、ポリプロピレンフィルム、ポリブテンフィルム、ポリブタジエンフィルム、ポリメチルペンテンフィルム、ポリ塩化ビニルフィルム、塩化ビニル共重合体フィルム、ポリエチレンテレフタレートフィルム、ポリブチレンテレフタレートフィルム、ポリウレタンフィルム、エチレン-酢酸ビニル共重合体フィルム等が挙げられる。 Examples of release resin films include polyethylene film, polypropylene film, polybutene film, polybutadiene film, polymethylpentene film, polyvinyl chloride film, vinyl chloride copolymer film, polyethylene terephthalate film, polybutylene terephthalate film, polyurethane film, ethylene-vinyl acetate copolymer film, etc.

 離型フィルムの厚さは、5~200μmの範囲内であることが好ましく、5~100μmの範囲内であることが好ましい。 The thickness of the release film is preferably within the range of 5 to 200 μm, and more preferably within the range of 5 to 100 μm.

 離型フィルムには、必要に応じて、シリコーン系、フッ素系、長鎖アルキル系又は脂肪酸アミド系の離型剤による離型処理をすることが好ましい。また、シリカ粉等により、防汚処理をすることが好ましい。その他、塗布型、練り込み型、蒸着型等の帯電防止処理をしてもよい。特に、シリコーン系、フッ素系又は長鎖アルキル系の離型剤による離型処理をすることにより、フィルム状の粘着層を剥離しやすくする。 If necessary, the release film is preferably subjected to a release treatment using a silicone-based, fluorine-based, long-chain alkyl-based or fatty acid amide-based release agent. It is also preferable to perform an anti-soiling treatment using silica powder or the like. In addition, anti-static treatments such as coating, kneading or deposition may be performed. In particular, release treatment using a silicone-based, fluorine-based or long-chain alkyl-based release agent makes it easier to peel off the film-like adhesive layer.

 透明樹脂フィルムは、特に制限されないが、透明性を有し、かつ一層のフィルムで構成されていることが好ましい。
 透明樹脂フィルムとしては、例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレート、ポリエチレンナフタレート等のポリエステル、アセテート系樹脂、ポリエーテルスルホン、ポリカーボネート、ポリアミド、ポリイミド、ポリオレフィン、(メタ)アクリル系樹脂、ポリ塩化ビニル、ポリ塩化ビニリデン、ポリスチレン、ポリビニルアルコール、ポリアリレート、ポリフェニレンサルファイド等が挙げられる。
 中でも、ポリエステル、ポリイミド又はポリエーテルスルホンであることが好ましい。
The transparent resin film is not particularly limited, but is preferably transparent and composed of a single layer film.
Examples of transparent resin films include polyesters such as polyethylene terephthalate and polyethylene naphthalate, acetate resins, polyethersulfone, polycarbonate, polyamide, polyimide, polyolefin, (meth)acrylic resins, polyvinyl chloride, polyvinylidene chloride, polystyrene, polyvinyl alcohol, polyarylate, and polyphenylene sulfide.
Among these, polyester, polyimide, or polyethersulfone is preferable.

 透明樹脂フィルムの厚さは、2~200μmの範囲内であることが好ましく、20~188μmの範囲内であることがより好ましい。 The thickness of the transparent resin film is preferably within the range of 2 to 200 μm, and more preferably within the range of 20 to 188 μm.

 紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤を塗布する方法は、特に制限されず、従来公知の方法を用いることができる。塗布方法としては、ロールコート法、キスロールコート法、グラビアコート法、リバースコート法、ロールブラッシュ法、スプレーコート法、ディップロールコート法、バーコート法、ナイフコート法、エアーナイフコート法、カーテンコート法、リップコート法、ダイコーター法等が挙げられる。 The method for applying the UV-curable acrylic adhesive is not particularly limited, and any conventionally known method can be used. Examples of application methods include roll coating, kiss roll coating, gravure coating, reverse coating, roll brushing, spray coating, dip roll coating, bar coating, knife coating, air knife coating, curtain coating, lip coating, and die coater methods.

 紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤に照射する紫外線の照度は、5~200mW/cmの範囲内であることが好ましい。紫外線の照度が5mW/cm以上であることにより、重合反応時間を短くでき、生産性に優れる。また、紫外線の照度が200mW/cm以下であることにより、光重合開始剤が急激に消費されるのを抑制できる。その結果、重合が十分に進行し、高分子量の重合体((メタ)アクリル系樹脂)が得られる。これにより、特に高温時における保持力に優れた粘着層とすることができる。
 紫外線の積算光量は、100~5000mJ/cmの範囲内であることが好ましい。
The illuminance of the ultraviolet light irradiated to the ultraviolet-curable acrylic adhesive is preferably within the range of 5 to 200 mW/ cm2 . By setting the illuminance of the ultraviolet light to 5 mW/ cm2 or more, the polymerization reaction time can be shortened, resulting in excellent productivity. Furthermore, by setting the illuminance of the ultraviolet light to 200 mW/cm2 or less , the photopolymerization initiator can be prevented from being rapidly consumed. As a result, the polymerization proceeds sufficiently, and a high molecular weight polymer ((meth)acrylic resin) can be obtained. This allows the adhesive layer to have excellent holding power, especially at high temperatures.
The integrated amount of ultraviolet light is preferably within the range of 100 to 5000 mJ/ cm2 .

 本発明に用いられる紫外線ランプは、特に制限されないが、LEDランプであることが好ましい。LEDランプは、他の紫外線ランプに比べて放出熱が低いランプであるため、紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤の紫外線硬化中における温度の上昇を抑制できる。これにより、高分子量の重合体が得られ、十分な凝集力を有する粘着層が得られ、粘着シートとした場合の高温時における保持力を高めることができる。
 紫外線ランプは、複数の紫外線ランプを組み合わせて用いてもよい。また、照射方法としては、紫外線を間欠的に照射し、紫外線を照射する明期と紫外線を照射しない暗期とを設けてもよい。
The ultraviolet lamp used in the present invention is not particularly limited, but is preferably an LED lamp. The LED lamp emits less heat than other ultraviolet lamps, so that the temperature rise during the ultraviolet curing of the ultraviolet curing acrylic adhesive can be suppressed. This allows a polymer with a high molecular weight to be obtained, and an adhesive layer with sufficient cohesive strength can be obtained, thereby increasing the holding power at high temperatures when the adhesive sheet is made.
The ultraviolet lamp may be a combination of a plurality of ultraviolet lamps. As for the irradiation method, ultraviolet light may be intermittently irradiated, and a light period during which ultraviolet light is irradiated and a dark period during which ultraviolet light is not irradiated may be provided.

 紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤中の単量体成分の最終的な重合率は、90%以上であることが好ましく、95%以上であることがより好ましく、98%以上であることが更に好ましい。 The final polymerization rate of the monomer components in the UV-curable acrylic adhesive is preferably 90% or more, more preferably 95% or more, and even more preferably 98% or more.

 紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤に照射する紫外線のピーク波長は、200~500nmの範囲内であることが好ましく、300~450nmの範囲内であることがより好ましい。紫外線のピーク波長が500nm以下であることにより、光重合開始剤が分解し、重合反応が開始する。また、紫外線のピーク波長が200nm以上であることにより、ポリマー鎖の切断を抑制でき、十分な接着性が得られる。 The peak wavelength of the ultraviolet light irradiated onto the ultraviolet-curing acrylic adhesive is preferably within the range of 200 to 500 nm, and more preferably within the range of 300 to 450 nm. When the peak wavelength of the ultraviolet light is 500 nm or less, the photopolymerization initiator decomposes and the polymerization reaction begins. Furthermore, when the peak wavelength of the ultraviolet light is 200 nm or more, the scission of the polymer chain can be suppressed, and sufficient adhesion can be obtained.

 重合反応は空気中の酸素によって阻害されやすいため、酸素を遮断することが好ましい。酸素を遮断する方法としては、紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤の塗布層上に離型フィルム等を作製したり、重合反応を窒素雰囲気下で行ったりする方法が挙げられる。離型フィルムとしては、前出の離型フィルムが挙げられる。 Since the polymerization reaction is easily inhibited by oxygen in the air, it is preferable to block oxygen. Methods for blocking oxygen include creating a release film on the coating layer of the UV-curable acrylic adhesive, and carrying out the polymerization reaction in a nitrogen atmosphere. Examples of release films include the release films mentioned above.

 (3.3)粘着層の物性
 粘着層の厚さは、最終的に得られる積層体をより薄くする観点から、2~60μmの範囲内であることが好ましく、2~20μmの範囲内であることがより好ましく、5~15μmの範囲内であることが更に好ましい。
(3.3) Physical Properties of Adhesive Layer From the viewpoint of making the final laminate thinner, the thickness of the adhesive layer is preferably within the range of 2 to 60 μm, more preferably within the range of 2 to 20 μm, and even more preferably within the range of 5 to 15 μm.

 粘着層で用いられる樹脂材料(例えば、(メタ)アクリル系樹脂)の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、貯蔵弾性率を制御する観点から、10万~500万の範囲内であることが好ましく、20万~100万の範囲内であることがより好ましい。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin material (e.g., (meth)acrylic resin) used in the adhesive layer is preferably within the range of 100,000 to 5,000,000, and more preferably within the range of 200,000 to 1,000,000, from the viewpoint of controlling the storage modulus.

 粘着層で用いられる樹脂材料の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、光学フィルムで用いられる樹脂材料の重量平均分子量(Mw)よりも小さいことが好ましい。これにより、本発明の効果をより効率よく得られる。 The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin material used in the adhesive layer is preferably smaller than the weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin material used in the optical film. This allows the effects of the present invention to be obtained more efficiently.

 なお、樹脂材料の重量平均分子量(Mw)は、ゲル浸透クロマトグラフィー「HLC8220GPC」(東ソー株式会社製)、及びカラム「TSK-GEL G6000」、「HXL-G5000」、「HXL-G5000」、「HXL-G4000」、「HXL-G3000HXL」(以上、東ソー株式会社製、直列)を用いて測定できる。
 試料20mg±0.5mgを、テトラヒドロフラン10mLに溶解し、0.45mmのフィルターで濾過する。そして、この溶液をカラム(温度40℃)に100mL注入し、RI検出器、温度40℃で測定し、スチレン換算した値とする。
The weight average molecular weight (Mw) of the resin material can be measured using a gel permeation chromatography "HLC8220GPC" (manufactured by Tosoh Corporation) and columns "TSK-GEL G6000", "HXL-G5000", "HXL-G5000", "HXL-G4000", and "HXL-G3000HXL" (all manufactured by Tosoh Corporation, in series).
20 mg±0.5 mg of a sample is dissolved in 10 mL of tetrahydrofuran and filtered through a 0.45 mm filter. 100 mL of this solution is then injected into a column (temperature 40° C.) and measured with an RI detector at a temperature of 40° C., and the value is expressed in terms of styrene.

 粘着層のガラス転移温度(Tg)は、低温環境下での耐衝撃性及び屈曲後におけるコントラストの両立の観点から、0℃以下であることが好ましく、-10℃以下であることがより好ましく、-20℃以下であることが更に好ましい。 The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the adhesive layer is preferably 0°C or lower, more preferably -10°C or lower, and even more preferably -20°C or lower, from the viewpoint of achieving both impact resistance in a low-temperature environment and contrast after bending.

 ガラス転移温度(Tg)は、DSC(Differential Scanning Colorimetry:示差走査熱量装置)を用いて、JIS K 7121(2012)に準拠して測定できる。 The glass transition temperature (Tg) can be measured in accordance with JIS K 7121 (2012) using a DSC (Differential Scanning Colorimetry) device.

 (3.4)第2粘着層におけるベゼル
 第2粘着層は、ベゼルを有していてもよい。
 本発明において、「ベゼル」とは、可視光の透過率が極めて低い領域であり、かつ表示装置の周囲に、枠状に形成される領域のことをいう。
(3.4) Bezel in Second Adhesive Layer The second adhesive layer may have a bezel.
In the present invention, the term "bezel" refers to an area that has an extremely low transmittance of visible light and is formed in a frame shape around the periphery of a display device.

 ベゼルを有することにより、トランジスタ等を制御するための装置や、情報を集積するためのICを収納できる。また、表示装置を保護したり、表示装置の強度を向上させたりできる。一方、ベゼルをより細くすることにより、表示装置を小型化及び軽量化できる。また、画像が表示される領域を、より大きくすることができる。 By having a bezel, it is possible to house devices for controlling transistors, etc., and ICs for accumulating information. It also protects the display device and improves its strength. On the other hand, by making the bezel thinner, it is possible to make the display device smaller and lighter. It is also possible to make the area in which an image is displayed larger.

 ベゼルは、第2粘着層内に配置され、かつ第2樹脂層又はガラス層と接していることが好ましい。ただし、ベゼルは、必ずしも、第2粘着層に配置される必要はなく、第1粘着層や、積層体の他の層間に配置されていてもよい。 The bezel is preferably disposed within the second adhesive layer and in contact with the second resin layer or the glass layer. However, the bezel does not necessarily have to be disposed within the second adhesive layer, and may be disposed within the first adhesive layer or between other layers of the laminate.

 ベゼルは、有色の遮光膜であり、染料又は顔料を含有する。ベゼルの形成方法は、特に制限されないが、例えば、コーティング方式で形成されることが好ましい。ベゼルは、平面上で枠状に形成されることが好ましい。 The bezel is a colored light-shielding film that contains a dye or pigment. There are no particular limitations on the method of forming the bezel, but it is preferable that it is formed, for example, by a coating method. It is preferable that the bezel is formed in a frame shape on a flat surface.

 (4)ガラス層
 本発明の積層体は、薄膜ガラスに貼り合わせ、さらに、表示装置に取り付けられる。
(4) Glass Layer The laminate of the present invention is attached to a thin glass film, and then attached to a display device.

 (4.1)ガラス層(薄膜ガラス)の概要
 本発明に係るガラス層は、耐久性、平面性等に優れる観点から、薄膜ガラスであることが好ましい。薄膜ガラスの材料としては、例えば、アルミノケイ酸リチウムガラス、ソーダライムガラス、ホウケイ酸ガラス、シリカガラス、アルカリ金属アルミノケイ酸塩ガラス、低アルカリ含有量であるアルミノケイ酸塩ガラス等が挙げられる。
(4.1) Overview of Glass Layer (Thin Film Glass) The glass layer according to the present invention is preferably a thin film glass from the viewpoint of excellent durability, flatness, etc. Examples of materials for thin film glass include lithium aluminosilicate glass, soda-lime glass, borosilicate glass, silica glass, alkali metal aluminosilicate glass, and aluminosilicate glass with a low alkali content.

 薄膜ガラスは、アルカリ成分を実質的に含有していない無アルカリガラスであることが好ましい。具体的には、アルカリ成分の含有量が、薄膜ガラスの全質量に対して、1000質量ppm以下であることが好ましく、500質量ppm以下であることがより好ましく、300質量ppm以下であることが更に好ましい。 The thin film glass is preferably an alkali-free glass that contains substantially no alkali components. Specifically, the content of alkali components is preferably 1000 ppm by mass or less, more preferably 500 ppm by mass or less, and even more preferably 300 ppm by mass or less, relative to the total mass of the thin film glass.

 アルカリ成分を低減することにより、薄膜ガラス表面での陽イオンの置換を抑制し、ソーダ吹きと呼ばれる現象を抑制できる。これにより、薄膜ガラス表面の密度の低下を抑制でき、破損しづらくできる。 By reducing the alkaline content, it is possible to suppress the replacement of cations on the surface of the thin glass film, and to prevent a phenomenon known as soda blowing. This prevents the density of the thin glass surface from decreasing, making it less susceptible to breakage.

 薄膜ガラスの厚さは、10~50μmの範囲内であることが好ましい。薄膜ガラスの厚さを10μm以上とすることにより、積層体の十分な耐衝撃性が得られる。一方、薄膜ガラスの厚さを50μm以下とすることにより、積層体の十分な屈曲性が得られる。また、薄膜ガラスの厚さを薄くするほど、積層体を薄型にでき、表示装置を薄型にできる。
 耐衝撃性及び屈曲性を両立させる観点から、薄膜ガラスの厚さは、10~40μmの範囲内であることがより好ましく、10~30μmの範囲内であることが更に好ましい。
The thickness of the thin film glass is preferably within a range of 10 to 50 μm. By making the thickness of the thin film glass 10 μm or more, sufficient impact resistance of the laminate can be obtained. On the other hand, by making the thickness of the thin film glass 50 μm or less, sufficient flexibility of the laminate can be obtained. Furthermore, the thinner the thin film glass is, the thinner the laminate can be, and the thinner the display device can be.
From the viewpoint of achieving both impact resistance and flexibility, the thickness of the thin glass is more preferably within the range of 10 to 40 μm, and further preferably within the range of 10 to 30 μm.

 (4.2)ガラス層(薄膜ガラス)の作製方法
 薄膜ガラス(ガラス層)は、一般的に知られた方法、例えばフロート法、ダウンドロー法、オーバーフローダウンドロー法等により作製できる。中でも、作製時に薄膜ガラスの表面が成形部材と接触せず、得られる薄膜ガラスの表面に傷がつきにくいことなどから、オーバーフローダウンドロー法又はフロート法であることが好ましい。中でも、厚さが10~50μmの範囲内である薄膜ガラスを得られる観点から、フロート法であることが好ましい。
(4.2) Method for Producing Glass Layer (Thin Glass) Thin glass (glass layer) can be produced by commonly known methods, such as the float method, down-draw method, overflow down-draw method, etc. Among these, the overflow down-draw method or float method is preferred because the surface of the thin glass does not come into contact with the forming member during production, and the surface of the obtained thin glass is less likely to be scratched. Among these, the float method is preferred from the viewpoint of obtaining a thin glass having a thickness in the range of 10 to 50 μm.

 通常、ガラスの厚さが薄いほど、ガラスの強度は低下し、破損しやすくなるため、薄膜ガラスの単体での取り扱いや加工は難しい。しかし、薄膜ガラスをより厚い支持基板(キャリア基板)に一時的に接着しながら加工し、加工の後工程として支持基板を剥離することにより、薄膜ガラスの取り扱いや加工を容易化できる。 Normally, the thinner the glass, the weaker it is and the more susceptible it is to breakage, making it difficult to handle and process thin-film glass on its own. However, by processing the thin-film glass while temporarily adhering it to a thicker support substrate (carrier substrate), and then peeling off the support substrate as a post-processing step, it is possible to make the thin-film glass easier to handle and process.

 例えば、国際公開第2017/066924号に記載の技術では、厚さが100μm未満のソーダライムガラスは、下記の工程によって作製できる。なお、図4は、薄膜ガラスの作製方法の一例を示す模式図である。 For example, in the technology described in International Publication No. 2017/066924, soda-lime glass having a thickness of less than 100 μm can be produced by the following process. Note that FIG. 4 is a schematic diagram showing an example of a method for producing thin-film glass.

 (工程1)
 図4に示すように、工程1では、接合面を有するキャリア基板21上に、薄膜ガラスの第1の表面が接するように薄膜ガラス22を作製する。そして、上記第1の表面とは反対側の第2の表面に、接着力を有するコンタクト膜23(コンタクトフィルム)を圧着させる。
(Step 1)
4, in step 1, a thin film glass 22 is prepared so that a first surface of the thin film glass is in contact with a carrier substrate 21 having a bonding surface. Then, a contact film 23 having adhesive force is pressure-bonded to a second surface opposite to the first surface.

 すなわち、十分な強度と加工しやすい厚さを有するキャリア基板21上に、薄膜ガラスの材料を、所望の厚さになるよう流し込む。これにより、薄膜ガラス22の第1の表面が、キャリア基板21に接するように作製される。その後、上記第1の表面とは反対側の第2の表面にコンタクト膜23を圧着させる。 That is, the thin-film glass material is poured to the desired thickness onto a carrier substrate 21 that has sufficient strength and a thickness that is easy to process. This creates a first surface of the thin-film glass 22 that is in contact with the carrier substrate 21. Then, a contact film 23 is pressed onto a second surface on the opposite side to the first surface.

 (工程2)
 図4に示すように、工程2では、薄膜ガラス22を接着力の高いコンタクト膜23によって、キャリア基板21から剥離する。
(Step 2)
As shown in FIG. 4, in step 2, the thin glass 22 is peeled off from the carrier substrate 21 by the contact film 23 having high adhesive strength.

 (工程3)
 図4に示すように、工程3では、コンタクト膜の接着力を弱める脆弱化処理(電磁放射線照射24)を行う。これにより、薄膜ガラス22の第2の表面から、コンタクト膜23を除去する。
(Step 3)
4, in step 3, a weakening treatment (electromagnetic radiation irradiation 24) is performed to weaken the adhesive strength of the contact film, thereby removing the contact film 23 from the second surface of the thin glass 22.

 このように、薄膜ガラス22を安全に保持するためのコンタクト膜23を使用することにより、薄膜ガラス22を保護することができる。薄膜ガラス22の露出した表面を、例えば、機械的損傷から保護することができ、安全かつ簡便に取り扱うことができる。 In this way, the contact film 23 is used to safely hold the thin-film glass 22, thereby protecting the thin-film glass 22. The exposed surface of the thin-film glass 22 can be protected from, for example, mechanical damage, and can be handled safely and easily.

 コンタクト膜の材料としては、例えば、ポリエチレンテレフタレート(PET)、ポリエチレン(PE)等のポリオレフィン(PO)が挙げられる。 Examples of materials for the contact film include polyolefins (PO) such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET) and polyethylene (PE).

 コンタクト膜は、通常、基材の一方の面に設けられた接着剤からなる接着剤層によって、薄膜ガラスに接着されている。コンタクト膜は、コンタクト膜自体が有する接着性によって直接薄膜ガラスに接着されていてもよい。 The contact film is typically adhered to the thin glass by an adhesive layer made of an adhesive provided on one side of the substrate. The contact film may also be adhered directly to the thin glass by the adhesive properties of the contact film itself.

 コンタクト膜と薄膜ガラスの第2の表面との間の接着力は、剥離装置により、キャリア基板から薄膜ガラスを剥離するのに十分な力が伝達されるよう、適宜選択される。 The adhesion strength between the contact film and the second surface of the thin film glass is appropriately selected so that the peeling device transmits sufficient force to peel the thin film glass from the carrier substrate.

 コンタクト膜の形状は、箔又はテープとすることが好ましい。箔又はテープとすることにより、ロール状に巻き取ることができる。コンタクト膜の厚さは、50μm以上であることが好ましく、80μm以上であることが好ましく、125μm以上であることがより好ましく、150μm以上であることが特に好ましい。 The contact film is preferably in the form of a foil or tape. By forming it into a foil or tape, it can be wound into a roll. The thickness of the contact film is preferably 50 μm or more, more preferably 80 μm or more, more preferably 125 μm or more, and particularly preferably 150 μm or more.

 薄膜ガラスは、前述のダウンドロー法、オーバーフローダウンドロー法、又はフロート法等によって、キャリア基板上に作製されることが好ましい。 The thin glass is preferably fabricated on a carrier substrate by the aforementioned downdraw method, overflow downdraw method, or float method.

 キャリア基板の厚さは、100μm以上であることが好ましく、300μm以上であることがより好ましく、500μm以上であることが更に好ましい。
 また、キャリア基板の幅手方向の長さは、3インチ(1インチは2.54cm)以上であることが好ましく、6インチ以上であることがより好ましく、8インチ以上であることが更に好ましく、12インチ以上であることが特に好ましい。
The thickness of the carrier substrate is preferably 100 μm or more, more preferably 300 μm or more, and even more preferably 500 μm or more.
Furthermore, the width of the carrier substrate is preferably 3 inches or more (1 inch is 2.54 cm), more preferably 6 inches or more, even more preferably 8 inches or more, and particularly preferably 12 inches or more.

 特に、キャリア基板は、ガラス基板第一世代サイズ以上であることが好ましく、例えば第二世代~第八世代のサイズであることが好ましい。または、例えば1×1m~3×3mの更に大きいサイズとしてもよい。キャリア基板は、長方形、楕円形、円形等の様々な形状としてもよい。 In particular, the carrier substrate is preferably equal to or larger than the first generation glass substrate size, for example, second to eighth generation sizes. Alternatively, it may be even larger, for example, 1x1m to 3x3m. The carrier substrate may be of various shapes, such as rectangular, elliptical, circular, etc.

 薄膜ガラスは、コンタクト膜と共に、コンタクト膜の接着力によってキャリア基板から剥離される。その後、コンタクト膜が剥離され、薄膜ガラスの単体が得られる。 The thin glass film, together with the contact film, is peeled off from the carrier substrate by the adhesive force of the contact film. The contact film is then peeled off, leaving a single thin glass film.

 薄膜ガラスからコンタクト膜を剥離する前に、コンタクト膜に対して接着力の脆弱化処理を施すことにより、接着力を低下させることが好ましい。具体的には、接着力を0.5N/25mm以下に低下させることが好ましい。 Before peeling the contact film from the thin glass, it is preferable to weaken the adhesive strength of the contact film by subjecting it to a treatment to weaken its adhesive strength. Specifically, it is preferable to reduce the adhesive strength to 0.5 N/25 mm or less.

 脆弱化処理では、例えば赤外線、紫外線、可視光等の電磁放射線を適宜用いることが好ましい。電磁放射線は、使用される接着材料に対応して、狭帯域であってもよく、より広い帯域をカバーしてもよい。また、レーザー放射であってもよい。 In the weakening process, it is preferable to use electromagnetic radiation, such as infrared, ultraviolet, or visible light, as appropriate. The electromagnetic radiation may be narrowband or may cover a wider band depending on the adhesive material used. It may also be laser radiation.

 中でも、可視光の曝露の下で接着力が劣化しないよう、可視スペクトルの外側の波長を有する電磁放射線を選択することが好ましい。市販されている接着材料の中には、電磁放射線の照射によって、少なくとも部分的に非活性化することができるものがあり、このような接着材料をコンタクト膜として使用できる。 It is preferable to select electromagnetic radiation having a wavelength outside the visible spectrum so that the adhesive strength does not deteriorate under exposure to visible light. Some commercially available adhesive materials can be at least partially deactivated by exposure to electromagnetic radiation and can be used as contact films.

 温度を上昇又は下降させることにより、コンタクト膜の接着性が低下する場合には、脆弱化処理として熱処理を用いてもよい。 If increasing or decreasing the temperature reduces the adhesion of the contact film, heat treatment may be used as a weakening treatment.

 電磁放射線の照射は、コンタクト膜の外側の面から、すなわち薄膜ガラスが接着していない側の面から行われることが好ましい。 The electromagnetic radiation is preferably applied from the outer surface of the contact film, i.e., the side to which the thin glass is not adhered.

 コンタクト膜としては、例えば、「NDS4150-20」(道明光学股▲ふん▼有限公司製)等が挙げられる。これに対応する脆弱化処理は、波長365nmの紫外線照射が挙げられる。 An example of a contact film is "NDS4150-20" (manufactured by Dao Ming Optical Co., Ltd.). A corresponding weakening treatment is exposure to ultraviolet light with a wavelength of 365 nm.

 具体的な薄膜ガラスの作製方法や条件については、実施例の項にて説明する。また、薄膜ガラスとして、例えば、SCHOTT社製、日本電気硝子株式会社製等の市販品を用いることができる。 Specific methods and conditions for producing the thin-film glass will be explained in the Examples section. In addition, commercially available products manufactured by, for example, SCHOTT and Nippon Electric Glass Co., Ltd., can be used as the thin-film glass.

 3.積層体の製造方法
 本発明の積層体の製造方法は、特に制限されず、硬化層、樹脂層及び粘着層を順次配置していく方法が挙げられる。
3. Method for Producing the Laminate The method for producing the laminate of the present invention is not particularly limited, and examples thereof include a method in which a cured layer, a resin layer, and an adhesive layer are disposed in this order.

 4.積層体の物性
 本発明の積層体の厚さは、耐衝撃性及び屈曲性の両立の観点から、100~300μmの範囲内であることが好ましく、100~200μmの範囲内であることがより好ましい。
4. Physical Properties of the Laminate The thickness of the laminate of the present invention is preferably within a range of 100 to 300 μm, and more preferably within a range of 100 to 200 μm, from the viewpoint of achieving both impact resistance and flexibility.

 5.表示装置
 本発明の表示装置は、上記積層体を具備することを特徴とする。積層体は、ガラス層を有することが好ましい。
 また、第1樹脂層が、第2樹脂層よりも当該表示装置の視認側に配置されることが好ましい。積層体のより視認側に、紫外線を吸収する特性を有する層を配置することにより、表示装置だけでなく積層体の他の層も、紫外線から保護できる。
5. Display Device The display device of the present invention is characterized by comprising the laminate described above. The laminate preferably has a glass layer.
In addition, it is preferable that the first resin layer is disposed closer to the viewing side of the display device than the second resin layer. By disposing a layer having ultraviolet ray absorbing properties closer to the viewing side of the laminate, not only the display device but also other layers of the laminate can be protected from ultraviolet ray.

 本発明の表示装置は、上記積層体を、下記表示装置の表面に取り付けることにより得られる。なお、積層体は、ガラス層を有することが好ましい。取り付け方法は、特に制限されない。耐衝撃性と屈曲性を両立させる観点から、上記粘着剤を用いて貼り合わせることが好ましい。 The display device of the present invention can be obtained by attaching the laminate to the surface of the display device described below. The laminate preferably has a glass layer. There are no particular limitations on the attachment method. From the viewpoint of achieving both impact resistance and flexibility, it is preferable to use the adhesive described above for bonding.

 また、本発明の表示装置は、上記積層体と、下記表示装置との間に偏光板を有していてもよい。ただし、上記積層体が外光反射を抑制できる、すなわち、上記積層体が偏光板としての機能の一部を有しているため、必ずしも、偏光板を有していなくてもよい。 The display device of the present invention may also have a polarizing plate between the laminate and the display device described below. However, since the laminate can suppress external light reflection, that is, since the laminate has some of the function of a polarizing plate, it does not necessarily have to have a polarizing plate.

 本発明において、「表示装置」とは、表示機構を有する装置のことをいい、発光源として発光素子又は発光装置を有する。また、本発明では、表示機構を有する装置を、「表示部材」ともいう。 In the present invention, a "display device" refers to a device having a display mechanism, and has a light-emitting element or a light-emitting device as a light source. In addition, in the present invention, a device having a display mechanism is also called a "display member."

 表示装置としては、液晶表示装置、有機エレクトロルミネッセンス(EL)表示装置、無機エレクトロルミネッセンス(EL)表示装置、タッチパネル表示装置、電子放出表示装置(電場放出表示装置(FED等)、表面電界放出表示装置(SED))、電子ペーパー(電子インクや電気泳動素子を用いた表示装置)、プラズマ表示装置、投射型表示装置(グレーティングライトバルブ(GLV)表示装置、デジタルマイクロミラーデバイス(DMD)を有する表示装置等)、圧電セラミックディスプレイ等が挙げられる。
 なお、液晶表示装置としては、透過型液晶表示装置、半透過型液晶表示装置、反射型液晶表示装置、直視型液晶表示装置、投写型液晶表示装置等が挙げられる。
Examples of the display device include a liquid crystal display device, an organic electroluminescence (EL) display device, an inorganic electroluminescence (EL) display device, a touch panel display device, an electron emission display device (such as a field emission display device (FED) and a surface field emission display device (SED)), an electronic paper (a display device using electronic ink or an electrophoretic element), a plasma display device, a projection type display device (such as a grating light valve (GLV) display device and a display device having a digital micromirror device (DMD)), a piezoelectric ceramic display, and the like.
Examples of the liquid crystal display device include a transmissive liquid crystal display device, a semi-transmissive liquid crystal display device, a reflective liquid crystal display device, a direct-view liquid crystal display device, and a projection liquid crystal display device.

 これらの表示装置は、二次元画像を表示する表示装置であってもよいし、三次元画像を表示する立体表示装置であってもよい。
 中でも、有機EL表示装置又はタッチパネル表示装置であることが好ましく、有機EL表示装置であることがより好ましい。
These display devices may be display devices that display two-dimensional images, or may be stereoscopic display devices that display three-dimensional images.
Among these, an organic EL display device or a touch panel display device is preferable, and an organic EL display device is more preferable.

 本発明の表示装置は、上記積層体(カバー部材)を具備することにより、耐光性と耐衝撃性を両立できる。 The display device of the present invention is equipped with the above-mentioned laminate (cover member), thereby achieving both light resistance and impact resistance.

 図5に、表示装置の一例である有機ELディスプレイへの適用例を示す。
 図5に示すように、表示装置100は、ガラス層6における、第2粘着層7とは反対側の面に、有機EL層9を有する。また、ガラス層6と有機EL層9との間に、第3粘着層8を有していてもよい。第3粘着層は、第1粘着層及び第2粘着層と、同じ材質や物性であっても、異なる材質や物性であってもよい。
FIG. 5 shows an example of application to an organic EL display, which is an example of a display device.
5, the display device 100 has an organic EL layer 9 on the surface of the glass layer 6 opposite to the second adhesive layer 7. In addition, a third adhesive layer 8 may be provided between the glass layer 6 and the organic EL layer 9. The third adhesive layer may be made of the same material and have the same physical properties as the first adhesive layer and the second adhesive layer, or may be made of a different material and have different physical properties.

 通常、有機ELディスプレイは、電極/電子輸送層/発光層/ホール輸送層/透明電極からなる有機EL層、及び画質を向上させるための位相差板(λ/4板)具備する偏光板から構成される。ただし、本発明の積層体は、偏光板としての機能の一部を有しているため、必ずしも、偏光板を有していなくてもよい。 Normally, an organic EL display is composed of an organic EL layer consisting of an electrode/electron transport layer/light-emitting layer/hole transport layer/transparent electrode, and a polarizing plate equipped with a retardation plate (lambda/4 plate) to improve image quality. However, since the laminate of the present invention has some of the functions of a polarizing plate, it does not necessarily have to have a polarizing plate.

 また、本発明の表示装置は、折り畳み型ディスプレイとしてもよい。折り畳み型ディスプレイは、連続した1枚のディスプレイを、携帯時には二つ折りにすることでサイズを半減させ、携帯性を向上させる構造であることが好ましい。折り畳み型ディスプレイは、さらに、薄型、かつ軽量であることが好ましい。 The display device of the present invention may also be a foldable display. A foldable display is preferably a single continuous display that can be folded in half when carried, reducing its size by half and improving portability. It is also preferable that the foldable display is thin and lightweight.

 本発明の積層体は、耐衝撃性が良好であり、繰り返し畳んでも折り跡が付きにくい。また、繰り返し折り畳んだ後でもコントラストを維持できる。そのため、折り畳み型ディスプレイにおいて、繰り返し折り畳んだ後の視認性、具体的には、折り畳み部分における画像の乱れの抑制に優れる。また、本発明の積層体は、耐光性が良好であるため、屋外で使用するモバイルデバイスに適用しても、長期に亘って品質を保持できる。 The laminate of the present invention has good impact resistance and is unlikely to leave creases even when folded repeatedly. In addition, the contrast can be maintained even after repeated folding. Therefore, in a foldable display, the visibility after repeated folding is excellent, specifically, the suppression of image distortion at the folded portion. In addition, since the laminate of the present invention has good light resistance, the quality can be maintained for a long period of time even when applied to a mobile device used outdoors.

 以下、実施例を挙げて本発明を具体的に説明するが、本発明はこれらに限定されるものではない。なお、実施例において「部」又は「%」の表示を用いるが、特に断りがない限り「質量部」又は「質量%」を表す。
 また、下記実施例において、特記しない限り操作は室温(25℃)で行われた。
The present invention will be specifically described below with reference to examples, but the present invention is not limited thereto. In the examples, the terms "parts" and "%" are used, but they represent "parts by mass" or "% by mass" unless otherwise specified.
In the following examples, operations were carried out at room temperature (25° C.) unless otherwise specified.

 1.積層体の作製
 本実施例においては、樹脂層を作製した後、樹脂層上に硬化層を作製し、二層フィルムを作製した。詳しくは、第1樹脂層上に第1硬化層を作製した二層フィルムと、第2樹脂層上に第2硬化層を作製した二層フィルムを、それぞれ作製した。そして、二つの二層フィルムを、粘着層を介して貼り合わせ、積層体を作製した。なお、各層が、第1硬化層、第1樹脂層、第1粘着層、第2硬化層、第2樹脂層の順で配置されるよう、貼り合わせた。
1. Preparation of Laminate In this embodiment, after preparing a resin layer, a cured layer was prepared on the resin layer to prepare a two-layer film. In detail, a two-layer film in which a first cured layer was prepared on a first resin layer and a two-layer film in which a second cured layer was prepared on a second resin layer were prepared, respectively. Then, the two two-layer films were laminated together via an adhesive layer to prepare a laminate. The layers were laminated together so that they were arranged in the order of the first cured layer, the first resin layer, the first adhesive layer, the second cured layer, and the second resin layer.

 (1)樹脂層の作製
 (1.1)樹脂層1の作製
 (1.1.1)ドープ1の調製
 (二酸化ケイ素分散液)
 「アエロジル(登録商標)R812」(日本アエロジル株式会社製、一次粒子の平均径7nm)
                        10.000質量部
 エタノール                  90.000質量部
 上記成分を、ディゾルバーで30分間撹拌混合した後、マントンゴーリンで分散を行い、二酸化ケイ素分散液を調製した。二酸化ケイ素分散液を、微粒子分散希釈液濾過器(アドバンテック東洋(株):ポリプロピレンワインドカートリッジフィルターTCW-PPS-1N)で濾過した。
(1) Preparation of resin layer (1.1) Preparation of resin layer 1 (1.1.1) Preparation of dope 1 (silicon dioxide dispersion liquid)
"Aerosil (registered trademark) R812" (manufactured by Nippon Aerosil Co., Ltd., average primary particle diameter 7 nm)
The above components were mixed and stirred for 30 minutes using a dissolver, and then dispersed using a Manton-Gaulin to prepare a silicon dioxide dispersion. The silicon dioxide dispersion was filtered using a fine particle dispersion dilution filter (Advantec Toyo Co., Ltd.: polypropylene wound cartridge filter TCW-PPS-1N).

 ジクロロメタン                80.960質量部
 エタノール                   7.040質量部
 上記二酸化ケイ素分散液(10質量%分散液)   0.120質量部
 上記色素化合物(2-3)            0.720質量部
 上記成分を23℃で1時間撹拌し、その後、アセチルセルロース12質量部を添加し、23℃で4時間撹拌した。そして、安積濾紙株式会社製の安積濾紙No.24を使用して濾過し、ドープ1を調製した。
Dichloromethane 80.960 parts by weight Ethanol 7.040 parts by weight The above silicon dioxide dispersion (10% by weight dispersion) 0.120 parts by weight The above dye compound (2-3) 0.720 parts by weight The above components were stirred at 23° C. for 1 hour, and then 12 parts by weight of acetyl cellulose was added and stirred at 23° C. for 4 hours. Then, the mixture was filtered using Azumi Filter Paper No. 24 manufactured by Azumi Filter Paper Co., Ltd. to prepare Dope 1.

 なお、二酸化ケイ素の含有量は、アセチルセルロースの全質量に対して、0.1質量%であった。また、アセチルセルロースは、置換度が、3.0であるトリアセチルセルロース(TAC)を公知の方法で準備した。 The content of silicon dioxide was 0.1% by mass based on the total mass of the acetyl cellulose. The acetyl cellulose was prepared by a known method using triacetyl cellulose (TAC) with a degree of substitution of 3.0.

 (1.1.2)樹脂層1の形成
 次に、ベルト流延装置を用い、ステンレスバンド支持体に、上記ドープ1を均一に流延し、流延膜を形成した。ステンレスバンド支持体で、流延膜の残留溶媒量が100%になるまで溶剤を蒸発させ、ステンレスバンド支持体上から流延膜を剥離した。流延膜を、35℃で加熱し、溶剤を蒸発させた。そして、溶剤を蒸発させた流延膜を、1.65m幅にスリットし、テンターで幅保持し、160℃の乾燥温度で乾燥させた。なお、ここでの乾燥温度は、熱処理温度及び延伸温度でもある。
(1.1.2) Formation of Resin Layer 1 Next, the above dope 1 was uniformly cast on a stainless steel band support using a belt casting device to form a cast film. The solvent was evaporated on the stainless steel band support until the residual solvent amount in the cast film reached 100%, and the cast film was peeled off from the stainless steel band support. The cast film was heated at 35°C to evaporate the solvent. The cast film from which the solvent had been evaporated was slit into a width of 1.65 m, and the width was held by a tenter and dried at a drying temperature of 160°C. The drying temperature here was also the heat treatment temperature and the stretching temperature.

 乾燥を始めたときの残留溶媒量は20%であった。その後、120℃の乾燥装置内を多数のロールで搬送させながら15分間乾燥させた後、フィルム両端に幅15mm、高さ10μmのナーリング加工を施した。フィルムを巻芯に巻き取り、樹脂層1を得た。樹脂層1の残留溶媒量は0.2%であり、厚さは40μm、巻数は6000mであった。 The residual solvent content was 20% when drying began. The film was then dried for 15 minutes while being transported by multiple rolls through a drying device at 120°C, after which knurling was applied to both ends of the film to a width of 15 mm and a height of 10 μm. The film was wound around a core to obtain resin layer 1. The residual solvent content of resin layer 1 was 0.2%, the thickness was 40 μm, and the number of windings was 6,000 m.

 (1.2)樹脂層2、4、6~13及び15~18の作製
 樹脂の種類、色素化合物の種類及び含有量、並びに厚さを、表I及びIIに記載のとおりに変更した以外は、上記樹脂層1の作製と同様の手順で、樹脂層2、4、6~13及び15~18を作製した。
(1.2) Preparation of Resin Layers 2, 4, 6 to 13, and 15 to 18 Resin layers 2, 4, 6 to 13, and 15 to 18 were prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of Resin Layer 1, except that the type of resin, the type and content of the dye compound, and the thickness were changed as shown in Tables I and II.

 (1.3)樹脂層3の作製
 貯蔵弾性率が6.7GPaとなるよう、金属酸化物粒子を含有させた以外は、上記樹脂層1の作製と同様の手順で、樹脂層3を作製した。
(1.3) Preparation of Resin Layer 3 Resin layer 3 was prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of resin layer 1 above, except that metal oxide particles were added so that the storage modulus was 6.7 GPa.

 (1.4)樹脂層5の作製
 上記ドープ1の、エタノールの添加量7.04質量部を1.65質量部とし、樹脂の種類を変更した以外は、上記樹脂層1の作製と同様の手順で、樹脂層5を作製した。
(1.4) Preparation of Resin Layer 5 A resin layer 5 was prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of the resin layer 1, except that the amount of ethanol added in the dope 1 was changed from 7.04 parts by mass to 1.65 parts by mass, and the type of resin was changed.

 (1.5)樹脂層14の作製
 (1.5.1)熱可塑性(メタ)アクリル系樹脂の調製
 熱可塑性(メタ)アクリル系樹脂として、MMA(メタクリル酸メチル)/PMI(フェニルマレイミド)/MA(アクリル酸メチル)共重合体(85/10/5質量比、Mw:200万、Tg:122℃)を準備した。
(1.5) Fabrication of Resin Layer 14 (1.5.1) Preparation of Thermoplastic (Meth)acrylic Resin As a thermoplastic (meth)acrylic resin, a MMA (methyl methacrylate)/PMI (phenylmaleimide)/MA (methyl acrylate) copolymer (85/10/5 mass ratio, Mw: 2 million, Tg: 122° C.) was prepared.

 (1.5.2)ゴム粒子(グラフト共重合体)R1の作製
 以下の方法で作製したゴム粒子(グラフト共重合体)を用いた。
(1.5.2) Preparation of Rubber Particles (Graft Copolymer) R1 Rubber particles (graft copolymer) prepared by the following method were used.

 攪拌機付き8L重合装置に、下記成分を仕込んで、溶液Iとした。
 脱イオン水                 180.000質量部
 ポリオキシエチレンラウリルエーテルリン酸    0.002質量部
 ホウ酸                     0.473質量部
 炭酸ナトリウム                 0.047質量部
 水酸化ナトリウム                0.008質量部
The following components were charged into an 8 L polymerization apparatus equipped with a stirrer to prepare solution I.
Deionized water 180.000 parts by weight Polyoxyethylene lauryl ether phosphate 0.002 parts by weight Boric acid 0.473 parts by weight Sodium carbonate 0.047 parts by weight Sodium hydroxide 0.008 parts by weight

 重合装置内を窒素ガスで充分に置換した後、内温を80℃にし、下記成分を投入した。
 過硫酸カリウム(2質量%水溶液として投入)   0.021質量部
After thoroughly replacing the atmosphere inside the polymerization apparatus with nitrogen gas, the internal temperature was adjusted to 80° C., and the following components were added.
Potassium persulfate (added as a 2% by weight aqueous solution) 0.021 parts by weight

 次いで、下記成分からなる単量体混合物(c’)を調製した。
 メタクリル酸メチル(メチルメタクリレート)    84.6質量%
 アクリル酸n-ブチル(n-ブチルアクリレート)   5.9質量%
 スチレン                      7.9質量%
 メタクリル酸アリル(アリルメタクリレート)     0.5質量%
 n-オクチルメルカプタン              1.1質量%
Next, a monomer mixture (c') consisting of the following components was prepared.
Methyl methacrylate (methyl methacrylate) 84.6% by mass
n-Butyl acrylate (n-butyl acrylate) 5.9% by mass
Styrene 7.9% by mass
Allyl methacrylate (allyl methacrylate) 0.5% by mass
n-Octyl mercaptan 1.1% by mass

 そして、下記成分からなる混合液を調製した。
 単量体混合物(c’)             21.000質量部
 ポリオキシエチレンラウリルエーテルリン酸    0.070質量部
 そして、当該混合液を、上記溶液Iに63分かけて連続的に添加した。さらに、60分間重合反応を継続させることにより、最内部に含まれる硬質重合体(架橋重合体(c))を得た。
Then, a mixture of the following components was prepared.
Monomer mixture (c') 21.000 parts by mass Polyoxyethylene lauryl ether phosphate 0.070 parts by mass Then, the mixture was continuously added to the above solution I over 63 minutes. The polymerization reaction was further continued for 60 minutes to obtain a hard polymer (crosslinked polymer (c)) contained in the innermost part.

 その後、下記成分を添加し、溶液IIとした。
 水酸化ナトリウム(2質量%水溶液として添加)  0.021質量部
 過硫酸カリウム(2質量%水溶液として添加)   0.062質量部
Thereafter, the following components were added to prepare solution II.
Sodium hydroxide (added as a 2% by weight aqueous solution) 0.021 parts by weight Potassium persulfate (added as a 2% by weight aqueous solution) 0.062 parts by weight

 次いで、下記成分からなる単量体混合物(a’)を調製した。
 アクリル酸n-ブチル(n-ブチルアクリレート)  80.0質量%
 スチレン                     18.5質量%
 メタクリル酸アリル(アリルメタクリレート)     1.5質量%
Next, a monomer mixture (a') consisting of the following components was prepared.
n-Butyl acrylate (n-butyl acrylate) 80.0% by mass
Styrene 18.5% by mass
Allyl methacrylate (allyl methacrylate) 1.5% by mass

 そして、下記成分からなる混合液を調製した。
 単量体混合物(a’)             39.000質量部
 ポリオキシエチレンラウリルエーテルリン酸    0.250質量部
 そして、当該混合液を、溶液IIに117分かけて連続的に添加した。
Then, a mixture of the following components was prepared.
Monomer mixture (a') 39.000 parts by mass Polyoxyethylene lauryl ether phosphate 0.250 parts by mass Then, this mixture was continuously added to solution II over a period of 117 minutes.

 その後、下記成分を添加した。
 過硫酸カリウム(2質量%水溶液として添加)   0.012質量部
 120分間重合反応を継続させて、軟質層(アクリル系ゴム状重合体(a)からなる層)を得た。アクリル系ゴム状重合体(a)を構成する各モノマーの単独重合体のガラス転移温度を用いて、組成比に応じて平均して算出した軟質層のガラス転移温度(Tg)は、-30℃であった。
The following ingredients were then added:
Potassium persulfate (added as a 2% by weight aqueous solution) 0.012 parts by weight The polymerization reaction was continued for 120 minutes to obtain a soft layer (a layer made of acrylic rubber-like polymer (a)). The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the soft layer, calculated by averaging the glass transition temperatures of the homopolymers of the monomers constituting the acrylic rubber-like polymer (a) according to the composition ratio, was -30°C.

 その後、下記成分を添加し、溶液IIIとした。
 過硫酸カリウム(2質量%水溶液で添加)     0.040質量部
Thereafter, the following components were added to prepare solution III.
Potassium persulfate (added as a 2% by weight aqueous solution) 0.040 parts by weight

 そして、下記成分からなる単量体混合物(b’)を調製した。
 メタクリル酸メチル(メチルメタクリレート)    97.5質量%
 アクリル酸n-ブチル(n-ブチルアクリレート)   2.5質量%
Then, a monomer mixture (b') consisting of the following components was prepared.
Methyl methacrylate (methyl methacrylate) 97.5% by mass
n-Butyl acrylate (n-butyl acrylate) 2.5% by mass

 下記単量体混合物(b’)を、溶液IIIに78分間かけて連続的に添加した。さらに30分間重合反応を継続させて、メタクリル系重合体(b)を得た。
 単量体混合物(b’)             26.100質量部
The following monomer mixture (b') was continuously added to solution III over 78 minutes. The polymerization reaction was continued for an additional 30 minutes to obtain a methacrylic polymer (b).
Monomer mixture (b') 26.100 parts by mass

 得られたメタクリル系重合体(b)を3質量%硫酸ナトリウム温水溶液中へ投入して、塩析及び凝固させた。次いで、脱水及び洗浄を繰り返した後、乾燥させて、3層構造のアクリル系グラフト共重合体粒子(ゴム粒子)R1を得た。
 得られたゴム粒子R1の平均粒子径を、ゼータ電位・粒径測定システム「ELSZ-2000ZS」(大塚電子株式会社製)で測定したところ、200nmであった。また、ゴム粒子のガラス転移温度(Tg)は、-30℃であった。
The obtained methacrylic polymer (b) was poured into a 3% by mass aqueous solution of sodium sulfate to cause salting out and coagulation. Then, after repeated dehydration and washing, the mixture was dried to obtain acrylic graft copolymer particles (rubber particles) R1 having a three-layer structure.
The average particle size of the obtained rubber particles R1 was measured by a zeta potential/particle size measuring system "ELSZ-2000ZS" (manufactured by Otsuka Electronics Co., Ltd.) and found to be 200 nm. The glass transition temperature (Tg) of the rubber particles was -30°C.

 (1.5.3)界面活性剤溶液の調製
 下記成分を混合、溶解し、界面活性剤溶液を調製した。
 メチルエチルケトン(MEK)         98.000質量部
 フォスファノールML-220(ポリオキシエチレンラウリルエーテルリン酸、東邦化学工業株式会社製)
                         2.000質量部
(1.5.3) Preparation of Surfactant Solution The following components were mixed and dissolved to prepare a surfactant solution.
Methyl ethyl ketone (MEK) 98.000 parts by mass Phosphanol ML-220 (polyoxyethylene lauryl ether phosphate, manufactured by Toho Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.)
2.000 parts by weight

 (1.5.4)ドープの調製
 窒素濃度を98.5体積%、酸素濃度を1.5体積%に制御した溶解タンクに、溶剤として下記成分を投入した。
 メチルエチルケトン              85.300質量部
 次に、この溶剤の入った溶解タンクに、下記成分を投入し、30分間攪拌を行った。
 界面活性剤溶液                15.000質量部
 上記色素化合物(2-3)            0.660質量部
(1.5.4) Preparation of Dope The following components were charged as a solvent into a dissolution tank in which the nitrogen concentration was controlled to 98.5 vol % and the oxygen concentration was controlled to 1.5 vol %.
Methyl ethyl ketone: 85.300 parts by mass Next, the following components were added to the dissolution tank containing this solvent, and the mixture was stirred for 30 minutes.
Surfactant solution: 15.000 parts by weight Dye compound (2-3): 0.660 parts by weight

 その後、下記成分を攪拌しながら投入し、23℃で1時間攪拌を続けゴム粒子(グラフト共重合体)を分散させた。
 ゴム粒子(グラフト共重合体粒子)        2.200質量部
 そして、溶解タンクに、攪拌しながら下記成分を投入した後、23℃で4時間攪拌し、固形分を完全に溶解し、ドープを完成させた。
 熱可塑性(メタ)アクリル系樹脂         8.800質量部
Thereafter, the following components were added with stirring, and stirring was continued at 23° C. for 1 hour to disperse the rubber particles (graft copolymer).
Rubber particles (graft copolymer particles) 2.200 parts by mass The following components were then charged into a dissolution tank with stirring, and the mixture was stirred at 23° C. for 4 hours to completely dissolve the solids, thereby completing the dope.
Thermoplastic (meth)acrylic resin 8.800 parts by mass

 (1.5.5)樹脂層14の形成
 基材として、PETフィルム「TN100」(東洋紡株式会社製、厚さ50μm、非シリコーン系剥離剤を含有する離型層あり)を準備した。このPETフィルムの離型層上に、バックコート法によりダイスを用いて、上記ドープを塗布した後、溶剤濃度0.18体積%の雰囲気下、80℃で乾燥させた。そして、基材を剥離し、厚さ40μmの樹脂層14を得た。
(1.5.5) Formation of resin layer 14 As a substrate, a PET film "TN100" (manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd., thickness 50 μm, with a release layer containing a non-silicone release agent) was prepared. The above dope was applied onto the release layer of this PET film using a die by a backcoat method, and then dried at 80° C. in an atmosphere with a solvent concentration of 0.18% by volume. Then, the substrate was peeled off to obtain a resin layer 14 with a thickness of 40 μm.

 (1.6)樹脂層19の作製
 色素化合物を添加せず、厚さを50μmに変更した以外は、上記樹脂層14の作製と同様の手順で、樹脂層19を作製した。
(1.6) Preparation of Resin Layer 19 Resin layer 19 was prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of resin layer 14, except that no dye compound was added and the thickness was changed to 50 μm.

 樹脂及び色素化合物は、下記のものを使用した。 The following resins and dye compounds were used:

 (樹脂)
 TAC:トリアセチルセルロース
 DAC:ジアセチルセルロース
 COP:シクロオレフィン樹脂「ARTON G7810」(JSR社製)
 CPI:4,4’-(ヘキサフルオロイソプロピリデン)ジフタル酸無水物に由来する構造単位と2,2’-ビス(トリフルオロメチル)ベンジジンに由来する構造単位とを有する重合体(ポリイミド)、Mw:15万、Tg:350℃
 アクリル:MMA(メタクリル酸メチル)/PMI(フェニルマレイミド)/MA(アクリル酸メチル)共重合体(85/10/5質量比、Mw:200万、Tg:122℃)
 PET:ポリエチレンテレフタレート「E5000」(東洋紡社製)
(resin)
TAC: triacetyl cellulose DAC: diacetyl cellulose COP: cycloolefin resin "ARTON G7810" (manufactured by JSR Corporation)
CPI: a polymer (polyimide) having a structural unit derived from 4,4'-(hexafluoroisopropylidene)diphthalic anhydride and a structural unit derived from 2,2'-bis(trifluoromethyl)benzidine, Mw: 150,000, Tg: 350°C
Acrylic: MMA (methyl methacrylate)/PMI (phenylmaleimide)/MA (methyl acrylate) copolymer (85/10/5 mass ratio, Mw: 2 million, Tg: 122° C.)
PET: Polyethylene terephthalate "E5000" (manufactured by Toyobo Co., Ltd.)

 (色素化合物)
 化合物(1-2) :上記例示の色素化合物(1-2)
 化合物(1-13):上記例示の色素化合物(1-13)
 化合物(2-2) :上記例示の色素化合物(2-2)
 化合物(2-3) :上記例示の色素化合物(2-3)
 化合物(2-8) :上記例示の色素化合物(2-8)
 化合物(2-11):上記例示の色素化合物(2-11)
 化合物a:「Kayaset Black A-N」(日本化薬株式会社製)
(Pigment Compound)
Compound (1-2): The above-exemplified dye compound (1-2)
Compound (1-13): The above-exemplified dye compound (1-13)
Compound (2-2): The above-exemplified dye compound (2-2)
Compound (2-3): The above-exemplified dye compound (2-3)
Compound (2-8): the above-exemplified dye compound (2-8)
Compound (2-11): The above-exemplified dye compound (2-11)
Compound a: "Kayaset Black A-N" (manufactured by Nippon Kayaku Co., Ltd.)

 化合物の化学構造式を下記に示す。 The chemical structure of the compound is shown below.

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000018

 (2)硬化層の作製
 (2.1)硬化層1の作製
 (2.1.1)硬化層形成用組成物の調製
 樹脂;
 ペンタエリスリトールトリ/テトラアクリレート「NKエステルA-TMM-3L」(新中村化学工業株式会社製)
                       100.000質量部
 光重合開始剤;
 「イルガキュア184」(BASFジャパン株式会社製)
                         9.000質量部
 溶媒;
 プロピレングリコールモノメチルエーテル    20.000質量部
 酢酸メチル                  30.000質量部
 メチルエチルケトン              70.000質量部
 添加剤;
 界面活性剤;「KF-351A」(ポリエーテル変性シリコーンオイル、信越化学工業株式会社製)
                         2.000質量部
 微粒子;
 ポリマーシランカップリング剤被覆シリカ   100.000質量部
(2) Preparation of cured layer (2.1) Preparation of cured layer 1 (2.1.1) Preparation of composition for forming cured layer Resin;
Pentaerythritol tri/tetraacrylate "NK Ester A-TMM-3L" (manufactured by Shin-Nakamura Chemical Co., Ltd.)
100.000 parts by weight of photopolymerization initiator;
"Irgacure 184" (manufactured by BASF Japan Ltd.)
9.000 parts by weight solvent;
Propylene glycol monomethyl ether 20.000 parts by mass Methyl acetate 30.000 parts by mass Methyl ethyl ketone 70.000 parts by mass Additives;
Surfactant: "KF-351A" (polyether modified silicone oil, manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.)
2.000 parts by mass fine particles;
Polymer silane coupling agent coated silica 100.000 parts by mass

 (微粒子の作製)
 上記ポリマーシランカップリング剤被覆シリカは、次のように作製した。
 容器に下記成分を添加し、Nガスで置換した後、80℃で3時間加熱してポリマーシランカップリング剤を調製した。得られたポリマーシランカップリング剤の分子量は16000であった。なお、分子量の測定は、ゲルパーミエーションクロマトグラフィー装置で測定した。
(Preparation of Microparticles)
The above polymer silane coupling agent-coated silica was prepared as follows.
The following components were added to a container, and the atmosphere was replaced with N2 gas, and then the container was heated at 80°C for 3 hours to prepare a polymer silane coupling agent. The molecular weight of the obtained polymer silane coupling agent was 16000. The molecular weight was measured using a gel permeation chromatography device.

 メタクリル酸メチル「ライトエステルM」(共栄社化学株式会社製)
                             30mL
 3-メルカプトプロピルトリメトキシシラン「KBM-803」(信越化学株式会社製)
                              1mL
 溶媒;テトラヒドロフラン               100mL
 重合開始剤;アゾイソブチロニトリル「AIBN」(関東化学株式会社製)
                             50mg
Methyl methacrylate "Light Ester M" (Kyoeisha Chemical Co., Ltd.)
30mL
3-Mercaptopropyltrimethoxysilane "KBM-803" (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.)
1 mL
Solvent: tetrahydrofuran 100 mL
Polymerization initiator: azoisobutyronitrile "AIBN" (manufactured by Kanto Chemical Co., Ltd.)
50mg

 次に、下記成分をイオン交換樹脂にてイオン交換した。そして、限外濾過膜法で、水をエタノールに溶媒置換して、シリカ微粒子のエタノール分散液100g(SiO濃度30質量%)を調製した。
 シリカゾル「カタロイドSi-45P」(日揮触媒化成工業株式会社製、SiO濃度30質量%、平均粒子径45nm、分散媒:水)
Next, the following components were ion-exchanged with an ion exchange resin: Then, the water was replaced with ethanol by an ultrafiltration membrane method to prepare 100 g of an ethanol dispersion of silica fine particles ( SiO2 concentration: 30% by mass).
Silica sol "CATALOID Si-45P" (manufactured by JGC Catalysts and Chemicals Co., Ltd., SiO2 concentration 30 mass%, average particle size 45 nm, dispersion medium: water)

 このシリカ微粒子エタノール分散液100gと、上記ポリマーシランカップリング剤1.5gとを、アセトン20g(25mL)に分散した。この分散液に、濃度29.8質量%のアンモニア水20mgを添加した。そして、室温で30時間撹拌して、ポリマーシランカップリング剤をシリカ微粒子に吸着させた。 100 g of this silica fine particle ethanol dispersion and 1.5 g of the above polymer silane coupling agent were dispersed in 20 g (25 mL) of acetone. 20 mg of ammonia water with a concentration of 29.8% by mass was added to this dispersion. The mixture was then stirred at room temperature for 30 hours to allow the polymer silane coupling agent to be adsorbed onto the silica fine particles.

 その後、平均粒子径5μmのシリカ粒子を添加し、2時間撹拌して、溶液中の未吸着のポリマーシランカップリング剤をシリカ粒子に吸着させた。次いで、遠心分離により、未吸着であったポリマーシランカップリング剤を吸着した平均粒子径5μmのシリカ粒子を除去した。ポリマーシランカップリング剤を吸着したシリカ微粒子分散液に、エタノール1000g加え、シリカ微粒子を沈降させた。シリカ微粒子を分離、減圧乾燥し、25℃で8時間乾燥して、ポリマーシランカップリング剤被覆シリカを得た。得られたポリマーシランカップリング剤被覆シリカの平均粒子径は、57nmであった。平均粒子径はレーザー粒子径測定装置により測定した。  Then, silica particles with an average particle size of 5 μm were added and stirred for 2 hours to allow the unadsorbed polymer silane coupling agent in the solution to be adsorbed onto the silica particles. Next, the silica particles with an average particle size of 5 μm that had adsorbed the unadsorbed polymer silane coupling agent were removed by centrifugation. 1000 g of ethanol was added to the dispersion of silica particles with the adsorbed polymer silane coupling agent to allow the silica particles to settle. The silica particles were separated, dried under reduced pressure, and dried at 25°C for 8 hours to obtain silica coated with a polymer silane coupling agent. The average particle size of the obtained polymer silane coupling agent-coated silica was 57 nm. The average particle size was measured using a laser particle size measuring device.

 (2.1.2)硬化層1の形成
 上記で作製した樹脂層上に、上記で調製した硬化層形成用組成物を、バーコーターで、ドライ膜厚が2.5μmになるように塗布した。この塗布層を、50℃の乾燥炉で40秒間ドライヤー乾燥させて、溶媒を揮発させた。そして、この状態で酸素濃度が1.0体積%以下の雰囲気になるよう窒素パージしながら、紫外線ランプを用いて、照射部の照度を100mW/cm、照射量を0.2J/cmとし、塗布層を硬化させ、硬化層1を作製した。
(2.1.2) Formation of cured layer 1 On the resin layer prepared above, the composition for forming the cured layer prepared above was applied with a bar coater so that the dry film thickness was 2.5 μm. This coating layer was dried with a dryer in a drying oven at 50° C. for 40 seconds to volatilize the solvent. Then, while purging with nitrogen so that the oxygen concentration is 1.0 volume % or less in this state, the coating layer was cured using an ultraviolet lamp with the illuminance of the irradiation part set to 100 mW/cm 2 and the irradiation amount set to 0.2 J/cm 2 to prepare cured layer 1.

 (3)粘着層の作製
 (3.1)粘着層1の作製
 (3.1.1)紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤組成物(a-1)の調製
 下記成分からなるモノマー混合物を調製した。
 2-エチルヘキシルアクリレート(2EHA)  78.000質量部
 N-ビニル-2-ピロリドン(NVP)     18.000質量部
 2-ヒドロキシエチルアクリレート(HEA)   4.000質量部
(3) Preparation of Adhesive Layer (3.1) Preparation of Adhesive Layer 1 (3.1.1) Preparation of UV-Curable Acrylic Adhesive Composition (a-1) A monomer mixture consisting of the following components was prepared.
2-Ethylhexyl acrylate (2EHA) 78.000 parts by weight N-vinyl-2-pyrrolidone (NVP) 18.000 parts by weight 2-hydroxyethyl acrylate (HEA) 4.000 parts by weight

 そして、光重合開始剤として下記成分を添加した。
 1-ヒドロキシシクロヘキシルフェニルケトン   0.035質量部
 2,2-ジメトキシ-1,2-ジフェニルエタン-1-オン
                         0.035質量部
 なお、光重合開始剤は下記の市販品を用いた。
 1-ヒドロキシシクロヘキシルフェニルケトン:「Omnirad(登録商標)184」(波長200~370nmに吸収帯を有する、IGM Resins B.V.社製)
 2,2-ジメトキシ-1,2-ジフェニルエタン-1-オン:「Omnirad(登録商標)651」(波長200~380nmに吸収帯を有する、IGM Resins B.V.社製)
Then, the following components were added as photopolymerization initiators.
1-Hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone 0.035 parts by mass 2,2-Dimethoxy-1,2-diphenylethan-1-one 0.035 parts by mass The following commercially available photopolymerization initiator was used.
1-Hydroxycyclohexyl phenyl ketone: "Omnirad (registered trademark) 184" (having an absorption band in the wavelength range of 200 to 370 nm, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.)
2,2-Dimethoxy-1,2-diphenylethan-1-one: "Omnirad (registered trademark) 651" (having an absorption band in the wavelength range of 200 to 380 nm, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.)

 その後、粘度(計測条件:BH粘度計No.5ローター、10rpm、測定温度30℃)が、約20Pa・sになるまで紫外線を照射した。そして、上記モノマー成分の一部が重合したプレポリマー組成物(重合率:8%)を得た。 Then, ultraviolet light was applied until the viscosity (measurement conditions: BH viscometer No. 5 rotor, 10 rpm, measurement temperature 30°C) reached approximately 20 Pa·s. A prepolymer composition (polymerization rate: 8%) in which some of the monomer components were polymerized was obtained.

 次に、当該プレポリマー組成物に、下記成分を添加して混合し、アクリル系粘着剤組成物を得た。
 ヘキサンジオールジアクリレート(HDDA)   0.150質量部
 シランカップリング剤「KBM-403」(信越化学工業株式会社製)
                         0.300質量部
Next, the following components were added to the prepolymer composition and mixed to obtain an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition.
Hexanediol diacrylate (HDDA) 0.150 parts by mass Silane coupling agent "KBM-403" (manufactured by Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.)
0.300 parts by weight

 得られたアクリル系粘着剤組成物に、下記成分を添加し攪拌することにより、紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤組成物(a-1)を得た。
 2,4-ビス-[{4-(4-エチルヘキシルオキシ)-4-ヒドロキシ}-フェニル]-6-(4-メトキシフェニル)-1,3,5-トリアジン
 (固形分濃度が15質量%となるようにn-ブチルアクリレートに溶解して添加)
                         1.400質量部
 ビス(2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾイル)-フェニルフォスフィンオキサイド
                         0.200質量部
 なお、下記の市販品を用いた。
 2,4-ビス-[{4-(4-エチルヘキシルオキシ)-4-ヒドロキシ}-フェニル]-6-(4-メトキシフェニル)-1,3,5-トリアジン:「Tinosorb(登録商標)S」(BASFジャパン株式会社製)
 ビス(2,4,6-トリメチルベンゾイル)-フェニルフォスフィンオキサイド:「Omnirad(登録商標)819」(波長200~450nmに吸収帯を有する、IGM Resins B.V.社製)
The following components were added to the obtained acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition and stirred to obtain an ultraviolet-curable acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive composition (a-1).
2,4-bis-[{4-(4-ethylhexyloxy)-4-hydroxy}-phenyl]-6-(4-methoxyphenyl)-1,3,5-triazine (dissolved in n-butyl acrylate to give a solids concentration of 15% by mass and added)
1.400 parts by mass Bis(2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl)-phenylphosphine oxide 0.200 parts by mass The following commercially available products were used.
2,4-Bis-[{4-(4-ethylhexyloxy)-4-hydroxy}-phenyl]-6-(4-methoxyphenyl)-1,3,5-triazine: "Tinosorb (registered trademark) S" (manufactured by BASF Japan Ltd.)
Bis(2,4,6-trimethylbenzoyl)-phenylphosphine oxide: "Omnirad (registered trademark) 819" (having an absorption band in the wavelength range of 200 to 450 nm, manufactured by IGM Resins B.V.)

 (3.1.2)粘着層1の形成
 得られた紫外線硬化型アクリル系粘着剤組成物(a-1)を、離型フィルムの面上に、硬化後の厚さが25μmとなるように塗布し、さらに、その表面に離型フィルムを貼り合わせた。その後、照度:6.5mW/cm、積算光量:1500mJ/cmの条件で紫外線照射を行い、組成物を硬化させて、離型フィルムを剥離し、粘着層1を形成した。
(3.1.2) Formation of adhesive layer 1 The obtained ultraviolet-curable acrylic adhesive composition (a-1) was applied onto the surface of a release film so that the thickness after curing was 25 μm, and a release film was then attached to the surface. Thereafter, ultraviolet light was irradiated under conditions of illuminance: 6.5 mW/cm 2 and cumulative light amount: 1500 mJ/cm 2 to cure the composition, and the release film was peeled off to form adhesive layer 1.

 (4)積層体の作製
 樹脂層上に硬化層を作製して得られた二種類の二層フィルムを、表に記載のとおりの組み合わせとし、上記粘着層を介して貼り合わせ、積層体を作製した。なお、各層が、第1硬化層、第1樹脂層、第1粘着層、第2硬化層、第2樹脂層の順で配置されるよう、貼り合わせた。
(4) Preparation of Laminate Two types of two-layer films obtained by preparing a cured layer on a resin layer were combined as shown in the table, and laminated together via the adhesive layer to prepare a laminate. The layers were laminated together in the following order: first cured layer, first resin layer, first adhesive layer, second cured layer, and second resin layer.

 (5)ガラス層(薄膜ガラス)の作製
 (5.1)ガラス層1の作製
 12インチの寸法を有するガラス層(ソーダライムガラス)を、下記工程にしたがって作製した。
(5) Preparation of Glass Layer (Thin Glass) (5.1) Preparation of Glass Layer 1 A glass layer (soda lime glass) having a size of 12 inches was prepared according to the following steps.

 (工程1)接合面を有するキャリア基板上に、薄膜ガラスの第1の表面が接するように薄膜ガラスを作製した。そして、薄膜ガラスの第1の表面とは反対側の第2の表面に、接着力を有するコンタクト膜(「コンタクトフィルム」ともいう)を付着させた。
 (工程2)次いで、薄膜ガラスを、接着力の高いコンタクト膜によって、キャリア基板より剥離した。
 (工程3)コンタクト膜の接着力を弱める脆弱化処理(電磁放射線照射)によって、キャリア基板から剥離された薄膜ガラスの第2の表面から、コンタクト膜を除去した。
(Step 1) A thin film glass was prepared so that a first surface of the thin film glass was in contact with a carrier substrate having a bonding surface. Then, a contact film having adhesive force was attached to a second surface of the thin film glass opposite to the first surface.
(Step 2) The thin glass was then peeled off from the carrier substrate by the highly adhesive contact film.
(Step 3) The contact film was removed from the second surface of the thin glass peeled off from the carrier substrate by a weakening treatment (electromagnetic radiation exposure) that weakened the adhesive strength of the contact film.

 工程1によって、厚さ500μmのキャリア基板に接するように、また、所定の厚さとなるように薄膜ガラスを作製した後、下記コンタクト膜を付着させた。次いで、工程2によって、キャリア基板から、コンタクト膜と共に薄膜ガラスを、30秒間で剥離した。
 なお、コンタクト膜は、市販品の「NDS4150-20」を使用した。「NDS4150-20」は、ポリオレフィン(PO)を含む厚さ150μmのフィルムであり、さらに、厚さ10μmの接着剤層を有する。
In step 1, a thin glass film was prepared so as to be in contact with a carrier substrate having a thickness of 500 μm and to have a predetermined thickness, and then a contact film was attached to the thin glass film. Next, in step 2, the thin glass film together with the contact film was peeled off from the carrier substrate in 30 seconds.
The contact film used was a commercially available product, "NDS4150-20.""NDS4150-20" is a 150 μm thick film containing polyolefin (PO), and further has a 10 μm thick adhesive layer.

 次いで、工程3によって、露出したコンタクト膜を脆弱化処理して接着力を低下させた。脆弱化処理では、波長365nmの紫外線を、コンタクト膜に10秒間照射した。紫外線の照度は、500mW/cm、積算光量は500mJ/cmであった。脆弱化処理前の接着力は、11N/25mmであったが、脆弱化処理後の接着力は、0.4N/25mmに低減した。これにより、コンタクト膜を薄膜ガラスから容易に剥離することができ、厚さ30μmのガラス層を得た。 Next, in step 3, the exposed contact film was subjected to a weakening treatment to reduce the adhesive strength. In the weakening treatment, ultraviolet light with a wavelength of 365 nm was irradiated onto the contact film for 10 seconds. The illuminance of the ultraviolet light was 500 mW/ cm2 , and the cumulative amount of light was 500 mJ/ cm2 . The adhesive strength before the weakening treatment was 11 N/25 mm, but after the weakening treatment, the adhesive strength was reduced to 0.4 N/25 mm. This allowed the contact film to be easily peeled off from the thin glass, and a glass layer with a thickness of 30 μm was obtained.

 (5.2)ガラス層2の作製
 厚さを10μmに変更した以外は、ガラス層1の作製と同様の手順で、ガラス層2を作製した。
(5.2) Preparation of Glass Layer 2 Glass layer 2 was prepared in the same manner as in the preparation of glass layer 1, except that the thickness was changed to 10 μm.

 (6)ガラス層を有する積層体の作製
 上記積層体と上記ガラス層を、上記粘着層を介して貼り合わせ、ガラス層を有する積層体を作製した。なお、各層が、第1硬化層、第1樹脂層、第1粘着層、第2硬化層、第2樹脂層、第2粘着層、ガラス層の順で配置されるよう、貼り合わせた。
(6) Preparation of a laminate having a glass layer The laminate and the glass layer were laminated together via the adhesive layer to prepare a laminate having a glass layer. The layers were laminated together in the following order: first cured layer, first resin layer, first adhesive layer, second cured layer, second resin layer, second adhesive layer, and glass layer.

 下記の表I~表IIIに、得られた各積層体の構成を示す。
 表内の「-」は、該当する層を有しない、又は該当する成分を含有しないことを表す。
 表内の「波長」は、色素化合物の300~460nmの波長領域の紫外可視光吸収スペクトルにおける最大吸収波長を表す。
 表内の「含有量」は、樹脂の全質量に対する色素化合物の含有量を表す。なお、樹脂層14については、熱可塑性(メタ)アクリル系樹脂及びゴム粒子の総質量を、樹脂の全質量とした。
The structures of the resulting laminates are shown in Tables I to III below.
In the table, "-" indicates that the corresponding layer is not present or that the corresponding component is not contained.
The "wavelength" in the table indicates the maximum absorption wavelength in the ultraviolet-visible light absorption spectrum of the dye compound in the wavelength region of 300 to 460 nm.
In the table, "content" indicates the content of the dye compound relative to the total mass of the resin. Note that, for the resin layer 14, the total mass of the thermoplastic (meth)acrylic resin and the rubber particles was taken as the total mass of the resin.

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000019
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000019

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000020
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000020

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000021
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000021

 2.樹脂層の物性の測定方法
 (第1樹脂層の平均光透過率)
 樹脂層を、気温23℃、相対湿度55RHの空調室で24時間調湿した。そして、JIS K-7375:2008に準拠して、紫外可視分光光度計「UV-2450」(株式会社島津製作所製)を用いて、光透過率を測定し、450~800nmの波長領域において、その算術平均値を求めた。
2. Method for measuring physical properties of resin layer (average light transmittance of first resin layer)
The resin layer was conditioned for 24 hours in an air-conditioned room at a temperature of 23° C. and a relative humidity of 55 RH. Then, in accordance with JIS K-7375:2008, the light transmittance was measured using a UV-2450 UV-visible spectrophotometer (manufactured by Shimadzu Corporation), and the arithmetic average value was calculated in the wavelength region of 450 to 800 nm.

 (第1樹脂層及び第2樹脂層の貯蔵弾性率)
 各樹脂層の、25℃における貯蔵弾性率は、レオメーター装置「RSA-3」(ティー・エイ・インスツルメント・ジャパン株式会社製)を用い、下記の試験条件にて測定した。
 試験条件(動的粘弾性試験)
 試験機:動的粘弾性測定装置「RSA-3」(ティー・エイ・インスツルメント・ジャパン株式会社製)
 変形方法:引張
 プレロード荷重:55g
 温度範囲:-70~200℃
 周波数:1.0Hz
 変位:±0.1%
 サンプル:幅5mm
 チャック間距離:20mm
(Storage Modulus of First Resin Layer and Second Resin Layer)
The storage modulus of each resin layer at 25° C. was measured using a rheometer device “RSA-3” (manufactured by TA Instruments Japan, Inc.) under the following test conditions.
Test conditions (dynamic viscoelasticity test)
Testing machine: Dynamic viscoelasticity measuring device "RSA-3" (manufactured by TA Instruments Japan, Inc.)
Deformation method: tension Preload load: 55g
Temperature range: -70 to 200°C
Frequency: 1.0Hz
Displacement: ±0.1%
Sample: Width 5mm
Chuck distance: 20 mm

 下記の表IVに、各積層体における第1樹脂層及び第2樹脂層の物性の測定結果を示す。
 表内の「450~800nm平均光透過率」は、450~800nmの波長領域における光透過率の算術平均値を表す。
 表内の「弾性率2/弾性率1」は、「第2樹脂層の貯蔵弾性率2/第1樹脂層の貯蔵弾性率1」で表される値を表す。すなわち、第2樹脂層の第1樹脂層に対する25℃における貯蔵弾性率の比の値を表す。
The following Table IV shows the measurement results of the physical properties of the first resin layer and the second resin layer in each laminate.
In the table, "Average light transmittance from 450 to 800 nm" indicates the arithmetic mean value of the light transmittance in the wavelength region from 450 to 800 nm.
In the table, "Elastic modulus 2/Elastic modulus 1" represents a value expressed by "storage modulus 2 of the second resin layer/storage modulus 1 of the first resin layer", i.e., the ratio of the storage modulus at 25°C of the second resin layer to that of the first resin layer.

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000022
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000022

 3.評価
 得られた各積層体について、それぞれ下記評価を行った。
3. Evaluation Each of the obtained laminates was evaluated as follows.

 (1)耐光性
 上記で得られた各積層体のガラス層と、有機EL層を積層して得られた表示装置の視認側とを、第3粘着層を介して貼り合わせた。ガラス層を有さない積層体については、第2樹脂層と、有機EL層を積層して得られた表示装置の視認側とを、第3粘着層を介して貼り合わせた。この表示装置に、視認側から、キセノンランプ(60W/m)の光を連続的に100時間照射した。その後、黒画像を表示させた。そして、分光測色計「CM-2600d」(コニカミノルタ株式会社製)を用いて、正面反射率を測定し、正面反射率を、下記の基準で評価した。なお、評価がA以上(AAA~A)であれば、実用可能である。
(1) Light resistance The glass layer of each laminate obtained above and the viewing side of the display device obtained by laminating the organic EL layer were bonded together via a third adhesive layer. For laminates not having a glass layer, the second resin layer and the viewing side of the display device obtained by laminating the organic EL layer were bonded together via a third adhesive layer. This display device was continuously irradiated with light from a xenon lamp (60 W/m 2 ) from the viewing side for 100 hours. Thereafter, a black image was displayed. Then, the front reflectance was measured using a spectrophotometer "CM-2600d" (manufactured by Konica Minolta, Inc.), and the front reflectance was evaluated according to the following criteria. It should be noted that if the evaluation is A or higher (AAA to A), it is practical.

 AAA:1.5以下である。
  AA:1.5超、1.6以下である。
   A:1.6超、1.7以下である。
   B:1.7超、1.8以下である。
   C:1.8超である。
AAA: 1.5 or less.
AA: greater than 1.5 and equal to or less than 1.6.
A: More than 1.6 and 1.7 or less.
B: More than 1.7 and 1.8 or less.
C: greater than 1.8.

 (2)ペンドロップ試験(耐衝撃性)
 上記で得られた各積層体のガラス層に有機EL層を積層させ、第1硬化層が最上部となるよう配置し、表示装置を得た。ガラス層を有さない積層体については、第2樹脂層に有機EL層を積層させ、第1硬化層が最上部となるよう配置し、表示装置を得た。ペン先半径(R)0.35mm、重さ(m)12gのボールペンを、落下高さを変えながら、各表示装置の第1硬化層の面に落とした。ペンドロップ試験後の各表示装置に、黒画像を表示させた。そして、分光測色計「CM-2600d」(コニカミノルタ株式会社製)を用いて、正面反射率を測定し、下記の基準で評価した。なお、評価がA以上(AAA~A)であれば、実用可能である。
(2) Pen drop test (impact resistance)
An organic EL layer was laminated on the glass layer of each laminate obtained above, and the first cured layer was arranged to be the uppermost part, to obtain a display device. For the laminate not having a glass layer, an organic EL layer was laminated on the second resin layer, and the first cured layer was arranged to be the uppermost part, to obtain a display device. A ballpoint pen with a pen tip radius (R) of 0.35 mm and a weight (m) of 12 g was dropped on the surface of the first cured layer of each display device while changing the drop height. A black image was displayed on each display device after the pen drop test. Then, the front reflectance was measured using a spectrophotometer "CM-2600d" (manufactured by Konica Minolta, Inc.) and evaluated according to the following criteria. It should be noted that if the evaluation is A or higher (AAA to A), it is practical.

 AAA:1.5以下である。
  AA:1.5超、1.6以下である。
   A:1.6超、1.7以下である。
   B:1.7超、1.8以下である。
   C:1.8超である。
AAA: 1.5 or less.
AA: greater than 1.5 and equal to or less than 1.6.
A: More than 1.6 and 1.7 or less.
B: More than 1.7 and 1.8 or less.
C: greater than 1.8.

 下記の表Vに、各積層体における評価結果を示す。  Table V below shows the evaluation results for each laminate.

Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000023
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-T000023

 実施例と比較例から、本発明の積層体は、耐光性と耐衝撃性を両立できることがわかる。
 実施例1~5の比較から、第1樹脂層が、セルロースエステルを含有することにより、耐光性と耐衝撃性を両立できることがわかる。
From the Examples and Comparative Examples, it is apparent that the laminate of the present invention can achieve both light resistance and impact resistance.
From a comparison of Examples 1 to 5, it is apparent that the first resin layer containing cellulose ester can achieve both light resistance and impact resistance.

 実施例8及び14から、色素化合物が、上記一般式(1)で表される構造を有することにより、樹脂層の光透過率を所望の値に調整できることがわかる。
 実施例1及び11~13から、色素化合物が、上記一般式(2)で表される構造を有することにより、樹脂層の光透過率を所望の値に調整できることがわかる。
From Examples 8 and 14, it is seen that the light transmittance of the resin layer can be adjusted to a desired value by using a dye compound having a structure represented by the above general formula (1).
From Examples 1 and 11 to 13, it is seen that the light transmittance of the resin layer can be adjusted to a desired value by using a dye compound having a structure represented by the above general formula (2).

 実施例8と9から、ガラス層の厚さが、10~30μmの範囲内において、耐光性と耐衝撃性を両立できることがわかる。 Examples 8 and 9 show that light resistance and impact resistance can be achieved together when the glass layer thickness is in the range of 10 to 30 μm.

 本発明を用いることにより、耐光性と耐衝撃性を両立させた表示装置を提供することができる。 By using this invention, it is possible to provide a display device that is both light-resistant and impact-resistant.

  1 第1硬化層
  2 第1樹脂層
  3 第1粘着層
  4 第2硬化層
  5 第2樹脂層
  6 ガラス層
  7 第2粘着層
  8 第3粘着層
  9 有機EL層
 10 積層体
 11 積層体
 12 積層体
 21 キャリア基板
 22 薄膜ガラス
 23 コンタクト膜
 24 電磁放射線
100 表示装置
REFERENCE SIGNS LIST 1 First cured layer 2 First resin layer 3 First adhesive layer 4 Second cured layer 5 Second resin layer 6 Glass layer 7 Second adhesive layer 8 Third adhesive layer 9 Organic EL layer 10 Laminate 11 Laminate 12 Laminate 21 Carrier substrate 22 Thin glass 23 Contact film 24 Electromagnetic radiation 100 Display device

Claims (12)

 樹脂層、硬化層及び粘着層を有する積層体であって、
 第1硬化層、第1樹脂層、第1粘着層、第2硬化層、第2樹脂層の順で積層され、
 前記第1樹脂層が、300~460nmの波長領域の紫外可視光吸収スペクトルにおいて最大吸収波長が360~379nmの範囲内に存在する色素化合物を含有し、
 前記第1樹脂層の450~800nmの波長領域における平均光透過率が、87%以上であり、
 前記第1樹脂層の25℃における貯蔵弾性率が、4.0~8.0GPaの範囲内であり、
 前記第2樹脂層の前記第1樹脂層に対する25℃における貯蔵弾性率の比の値が、0.7~1.5の範囲内である
 ことを特徴とする積層体。
A laminate having a resin layer, a cured layer, and an adhesive layer,
A first cured layer, a first resin layer, a first adhesive layer, a second cured layer, and a second resin layer are laminated in this order,
the first resin layer contains a dye compound having a maximum absorption wavelength in the range of 360 to 379 nm in an ultraviolet-visible light absorption spectrum in a wavelength region of 300 to 460 nm,
The first resin layer has an average light transmittance of 87% or more in a wavelength range of 450 to 800 nm;
The storage modulus of the first resin layer at 25° C. is within a range of 4.0 to 8.0 GPa,
a ratio of a storage modulus at 25° C. of the second resin layer to that of the first resin layer is within a range of 0.7 to 1.5.
 前記第1樹脂層が、セルロースエステルを含有する
 ことを特徴とする請求項1に記載の積層体。
The laminate according to claim 1 , wherein the first resin layer contains a cellulose ester.
 前記色素化合物が、下記一般式(1)で表される構造を有する
 ことを特徴とする請求項1に記載の積層体。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
 (式中、R11は、水素原子、ハロゲン原子、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、ヒドロキシ基、アミノ基、アルキル置換アミノ基、カルボキシ基、アルキルオキシカルボニル基、ヒドロキシアルキル基、アルキルカルボニルオキシアルキル基、カルボキシアルキル基、アルキルオキシカルボニルアルキル基、アリール基、アシル基、又はスルホ基を表す。R12は、水素原子又はヒドロキシ基を表す。)
The laminate according to claim 1 , wherein the dye compound has a structure represented by the following general formula (1):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000001
(In the formula, R 11 represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, a hydroxy group, an amino group, an alkyl-substituted amino group, a carboxy group, an alkyloxycarbonyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkylcarbonyloxyalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group, an alkyloxycarbonylalkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group, or a sulfo group. R 12 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydroxy group.)
 前記色素化合物が、下記一般式(2)で表される構造を有する
 ことを特徴とする請求項1に記載の積層体。
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
 (式中、R21は、水素原子又はヒドロキシ基を表す。R22、R23、及びR24は、アルキル基、アルコキシ基、アルキル置換アミノ基、カルボキシ基、アルキルオキシカルボニル基、ヒドロキシアルキル基、アルキルカルボニルオキシアルキル基、カルボキシアルキル基、アルキルオキシカルボニルアルキル基、アリール基、アシル基、又はスルホ基を表す。)
The laminate according to claim 1 , wherein the dye compound has a structure represented by the following general formula (2):
Figure JPOXMLDOC01-appb-C000002
(In the formula, R 21 represents a hydrogen atom or a hydroxy group. R 22 , R 23 , and R 24 represent an alkyl group, an alkoxy group, an alkyl-substituted amino group, a carboxy group, an alkyloxycarbonyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group, an alkylcarbonyloxyalkyl group, a carboxyalkyl group, an alkyloxycarbonylalkyl group, an aryl group, an acyl group, or a sulfo group.)
 前記第1樹脂層の厚さが、15~50μmの範囲内である
 ことを特徴とする請求項1に記載の積層体。
2. The laminate according to claim 1, wherein the first resin layer has a thickness in the range of 15 to 50 μm.
 前記第2樹脂層の25℃における貯蔵弾性率が、4.0~8.0GPaの範囲内である
 ことを特徴とする請求項1に記載の積層体。
2. The laminate according to claim 1, wherein the second resin layer has a storage modulus at 25° C. in the range of 4.0 to 8.0 GPa.
 ガラス層を更に有し、
 前記第1硬化層、前記第1樹脂層、前記第1粘着層、前記第2硬化層、前記第2樹脂層、前記ガラス層の順で積層される
 ことを特徴とする請求項1から請求項6までのいずれか一項に記載の積層体。
Further comprising a glass layer,
The laminate according to any one of claims 1 to 6, wherein the first cured layer, the first resin layer, the first adhesive layer, the second cured layer, the second resin layer, and the glass layer are laminated in this order.
 第2粘着層を更に有し、
 前記第1硬化層、前記第1樹脂層、前記第1粘着層、前記第2硬化層、前記第2樹脂層、前記第2粘着層、前記ガラス層の順で積層される
 ことを特徴とする請求項7に記載の積層体。
Further comprising a second adhesive layer,
The laminate according to claim 7 , wherein the first cured layer, the first resin layer, the first adhesive layer, the second cured layer, the second resin layer, the second adhesive layer, and the glass layer are laminated in this order.
 前記ガラス層の厚さが、10~30μmの範囲内である
 ことを特徴とする請求項7に記載の積層体。
8. The laminate according to claim 7, wherein the glass layer has a thickness in the range of 10 to 30 μm.
 第3粘着層を更に有し、
 前記第1硬化層、前記第1樹脂層、前記第1粘着層、前記第2硬化層、前記第2樹脂層、前記第2粘着層、前記ガラス層、前記第3粘着層の順で積層される
 ことを特徴とする請求項8に記載の積層体。
Further comprising a third adhesive layer,
The laminate according to claim 8 , wherein the first cured layer, the first resin layer, the first adhesive layer, the second cured layer, the second resin layer, the second adhesive layer, the glass layer, and the third adhesive layer are laminated in this order.
 請求項10に記載の積層体を具備する
 ことを特徴とする表示装置。
A display device comprising the laminate according to claim 10.
 前記積層体の前記第1樹脂層が、前記第2樹脂層よりも当該表示装置の視認側に配置される
 ことを特徴とする請求項11に記載の表示装置。
The display device according to claim 11 , wherein the first resin layer of the laminate is disposed on a viewing side of the display device relative to the second resin layer.
PCT/JP2024/025563 2023-09-28 2024-07-17 Laminate and display device Pending WO2025069656A1 (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (2)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2023166591 2023-09-28
JP2023-166591 2023-09-28

Publications (1)

Publication Number Publication Date
WO2025069656A1 true WO2025069656A1 (en) 2025-04-03

Family

ID=95202888

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
PCT/JP2024/025563 Pending WO2025069656A1 (en) 2023-09-28 2024-07-17 Laminate and display device

Country Status (1)

Country Link
WO (1) WO2025069656A1 (en)

Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2014215592A (en) * 2013-04-30 2014-11-17 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Glass with polarization function and liquid crystal display device provided therewith
JP2020139108A (en) * 2019-03-01 2020-09-03 日東電工株式会社 Adhesive composition for organic EL display device, adhesive layer for organic EL display device, polarizing film with adhesive layer for organic EL display device, and organic EL display device
WO2021112253A1 (en) * 2019-12-05 2021-06-10 富士フイルム株式会社 Optical laminate body, polarization plate, image display device, resistive touch panel and capacitive touch panel
WO2021177288A1 (en) * 2020-03-05 2021-09-10 大日本印刷株式会社 Display device member, optical laminate, and display device
WO2023149169A1 (en) * 2022-02-07 2023-08-10 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Optical layered body

Patent Citations (5)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
JP2014215592A (en) * 2013-04-30 2014-11-17 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Glass with polarization function and liquid crystal display device provided therewith
JP2020139108A (en) * 2019-03-01 2020-09-03 日東電工株式会社 Adhesive composition for organic EL display device, adhesive layer for organic EL display device, polarizing film with adhesive layer for organic EL display device, and organic EL display device
WO2021112253A1 (en) * 2019-12-05 2021-06-10 富士フイルム株式会社 Optical laminate body, polarization plate, image display device, resistive touch panel and capacitive touch panel
WO2021177288A1 (en) * 2020-03-05 2021-09-10 大日本印刷株式会社 Display device member, optical laminate, and display device
WO2023149169A1 (en) * 2022-02-07 2023-08-10 コニカミノルタ株式会社 Optical layered body

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CN103298897B (en) Active energy ray curable adhesive composite, Polarizer, optical thin film and image display device
JP7413290B2 (en) Reinforced polarizing optical film laminate for power running vehicles, and optical display panel using the reinforced polarizing optical film laminate
JP5617843B2 (en) OPTICAL LAMINATE AND METHOD FOR PRODUCING OPTICAL LAMINATE
WO2014171479A1 (en) Polarizing plate and image display device
CN105122103B (en) Polarization plates and its manufacture method and image display device
TW201014890A (en) Acrylic composition for optical elements, protective film for optical elements, polarizer and liquid crystal display
JP6348291B2 (en) Polarizing plate and display device
JP6806453B2 (en) A method for manufacturing a single-protective polarizing film with a transparent resin layer, a method for manufacturing a polarizing film with an adhesive layer, and a method for manufacturing an optical laminate.
KR20230107357A (en) Laminate film, laminate, polarizer, polarizer roll manufacturing method and display device
CN116209928A (en) Cover member, base film for cover member, and display device having them
JP4345927B2 (en) Optical member with adhesive, method for producing the same, and image display device
CN116615497A (en) Optical film, polarizer and organic electroluminescent display device
JP2023126055A (en) Optical laminate for OLED display device and OLED display device
CN116997834A (en) Polarizer protective film
WO2025069656A1 (en) Laminate and display device
TWI831132B (en) Polarizing plate protective film
TWI770876B (en) Polarizing plate and organic electroluminescence display device
JP2016071274A (en) Optical film and use thereof
TWI773115B (en) Polarizing plate and organic electroluminescence display device
KR20250097903A (en) Laminates and display devices
KR20250086774A (en) Laminates and display devices
KR20250092272A (en) Laminates and display devices
WO2024095890A1 (en) Laminate and display device
WO2024142910A1 (en) Display device
TW202303201A (en) Polarizing plate and organic EL display device

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
121 Ep: the epo has been informed by wipo that ep was designated in this application

Ref document number: 24871460

Country of ref document: EP

Kind code of ref document: A1